SiMT341715E (VRV A Service Manual) - 1

SiMT341715E
Service
Manual
RXQ6-60A(M)
Cooling Only 50/60 Hz

SiMT341715E
RXQ-A(M)
Cooling Only
R-410A 50/60 Hz
ED Reference
Refer to EDAMT341716 (Preview edition) for the details of specifications, option list, etc.
1. Safety Cautions...................................................................................... vi
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers............................ vi
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users.............................. viii
2. Icons Used ............................................................................................. xi
Part 1 General Information ........................................................... 1

1. Model Names ..........................................................................................2
1.1 Singapore and Vietnam............................................................................2
1.2 Malaysia and Pakistan .............................................................................4
1.3 Thailand....................................................................................................6
1.4 Indonesia..................................................................................................8
1.5 Philippines ..............................................................................................10
2. External Appearance.............................................................................12
2.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................12
2.2 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................14
2.3 Air Treatment Equipment .......................................................................14
3. Combination of Outdoor Units...............................................................15
4. Capacity Range.....................................................................................16
4.1 Capacity Range for VRV Indoor Units Only ...........................................16
4.2 Capacity Range for Mixed Combination of VRV and
Residential Indoor Units .........................................................................19
Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit ........................................................... 20

1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) ...................................................21
1.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................21
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit .....................................................................................27
1.3 Residential Indoor Unit ...........................................................................29
1.4 BP Unit ...................................................................................................34
1.5 Outdoor-Air Processing Unit...................................................................35
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................36
2.1 RXQ6/8A ................................................................................................36
2.2 RXQ10/12A ............................................................................................37
2.3 RXQ14A .................................................................................................38
2.4 RXQ16/18A ............................................................................................39
2.5 RXQ20A .................................................................................................40
i Table of Contents
SiMT341715E
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................41

3.1 RXQ6/8/10/12A ......................................................................................41
3.2 RXQ14A .................................................................................................43
3.3 RXQ16/18/20A .......................................................................................45
Part 3 Remote Controller ............................................................ 47

1. Applicable Models .................................................................................48
2. Names and Functions ...........................................................................50
2.1 BRC1E62 ...............................................................................................50
2.2 BRC1E63 ...............................................................................................52
2.3 BRC4C, BRC7C, BRC7E Series............................................................54
2.4 BRC4M, BRC7M Series .........................................................................55
2.5 ARC433A22 ...........................................................................................57
2.6 ARC433B47 ...........................................................................................59
2.7 ARC433B71 ...........................................................................................61
2.8 ARC433B76 ...........................................................................................63
2.9 ARC466A17 ...........................................................................................65
3. Main/Sub Setting...................................................................................67
3.1 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1E62, BRC1E63) ..................................67
3.2 When Wireless Remote Controller is Used Together.............................68
4. Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller...................................69
5. Centralized Control Group No. Setting..................................................72
5.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63 .............................................................................72
5.3 Group No. Setting Example....................................................................73
6. Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu..........................................74
6.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63 .............................................................................74
Part 4 Functions and Control...................................................... 79

1. Operation Flowchart..............................................................................80
2. Stop Control ..........................................................................................81
2.1 Abnormal Shutdown ...............................................................................81
2.2 Slave Unit Stops during Master Unit Operation......................................81
3. Standby Control ....................................................................................82
3.1 Restart Standby......................................................................................82
4. Startup Control ......................................................................................83
4.1 Cooling Startup Control ..........................................................................83
5. Normal Operation..................................................................................84
5.1 List of Functions in Normal Operation ....................................................84
5.2 Compressor Control ...............................................................................84
5.3 Compressor Capacity Control ................................................................85
5.4 Operating Priority and Rotation of Compressors....................................86
5.5 Compressor Step Control.......................................................................87
5.6 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................87
5.7 Step Control of Outdoor Fans ................................................................87
6. Protection Control .................................................................................88
6.1 High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................88
6.2 Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................88
6.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................89
Table of Contents ii
SiMT341715E
6.4 Compressor Body Protection Control.....................................................89

6.5 Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................90
7. Special Control......................................................................................92
7.1 Outdoor Unit Rotation.............................................................................92
7.2 Oil Return Operation ..............................................................................93
7.3 Inverter Pre-Heat Operation ...................................................................94
8. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................95
8.1 Set Temperature and Control Target Temperature................................95
8.2 Thermostat Control.................................................................................95
8.3 Automatic Airflow Rate Control ..............................................................97
8.4 Airflow Direction Control.........................................................................98
8.5 Auto Draft Reducing Control (FXFSQ only) ...........................................99
8.6 Eco Full Automatic Control (FXFSQ only)..............................................99
8.7 Drain Pump Control..............................................................................100
8.8 Freeze-up Prevention Control ..............................................................102
8.9 Dew Condensation Prevention Control ................................................103
8.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .....................................................104
8.11 Circulation Airflow (FXFSQ, FXFQ only) ..............................................105
Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation................................. 106

1. Field Settings for Indoor Unit...............................................................107
1.1 Field Settings from Remote Controller .................................................107
1.2 List of Field Settings for Indoor Unit .....................................................112
1.3 Details of Field Settings for Indoor Unit................................................114
1.4 List of Field Settings for Outdoor-air Processing Unit ..........................125
1.5 Operation Control Mode .......................................................................126
2. Field Settings for Outdoor Unit............................................................128
2.1 Function Setting ...................................................................................128
2.2 Settings by DIP Switches .....................................................................129
2.3 Settings by BS Buttons.........................................................................131
2.4 Normal Mode........................................................................................133
2.5 Monitor Mode (Mode 1) ........................................................................134
2.6 Setting Mode (Mode 2).........................................................................138
2.7 Eco Mode Setting .................................................................................149
2.8 Setting of Night-Time Low Noise Operation and
Demand Operation ...............................................................................150
3. Test Operation ....................................................................................154
3.1 Checks before Test Operation .............................................................154
3.2 Checkpoints..........................................................................................154
3.3 Test Operation Procedure ....................................................................155
3.4 Turn Power ON ....................................................................................156
Part 6 Service Diagnosis........................................................... 157

1. Servicing Items to be Confirmed .........................................................159
1.1 Troubleshooting....................................................................................159
1.2 Precautions for Maintenance................................................................159
1.3 Refrigerant Properties (R-410A)...........................................................161
2. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................162
2.1 With the Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor...............................165
2.2 For All Outdoor Units............................................................................166
iii Table of Contents

SiMT341715E
3. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller ...............................................167

3.1 Wired Remote Controller......................................................................167
3.2 BRC4C, BRC7C, BRC7E Series..........................................................168
3.3 BRC4M, BRC7M Series .......................................................................170
3.4 Error Codes and Descriptions ..............................................................171
3.5 Error Codes (Sub Codes).....................................................................173
4. Troubleshooting by Error Code ...........................................................184
4.1 External Protection Device Abnormality ...............................................184
4.2 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality ...............................................................185
4.3 Drain Level Control System Abnormality..............................................186
4.4 Indoor Fan Motor Lock, Overload.........................................................188
4.5 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality..............................................................190
4.6 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality ......................................................196
4.8 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality, Dust Clogging ..............199
4.9 Humidifier System Abnormality ............................................................201
4.10 Auto Grille Unit Error ............................................................................202
4.11 Capacity Determination Device Abnormality ........................................203
4.12 Transmission Abnormality
(between Indoor Unit PCB and Fan PCB)............................................204
4.13 Transmission Error ...............................................................................206
4.14 Transmission Error
(between indoor unit PCB and Auto Grille Control PCB) .....................207
4.15 Thermistor Abnormality ........................................................................209
4.16 Combination Abnormality
4.17 Capacity Setting Abnormality ...............................................................211
4.19 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error ..................................................213
4.20 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality ..........................................218
4.21 Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality....................................................219
4.22 Current Leakage Detection ..................................................................220
4.23 Missing of Leakage Detection Core .....................................................221
4.24 Actuation of High Pressure Switch .......................................................222
4.25 Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor .......................................................224
4.26 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock..........................................................226
4.27 Outdoor Fan Motor Abnormality ...........................................................228
4.28 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality.......................................231
4.29 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality ...........................................233
4.30 Wet Alarm.............................................................................................235
4.31 Refrigerant Overcharged......................................................................236
4.32 Harness Abnormality
(between Outdoor Unit Main PCB and Inverter PCB) ..........................237
4.33 Outdoor Fan PCB Abnormality.............................................................238
4.35 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality ......................................................241
4.36 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality .......................................................242
4.37 Inverter PCB Abnormality.....................................................................243
4.38 Momentary Power Failure during Test Operation ................................245
4.39 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality .........................246
4.40 Inverter Compressor Instantaneous Overcurrent .................................248
4.41 Inverter Compressor Overcurrent.........................................................250
Table of Contents iv
SiMT341715E
4.42 Inverter Compressor Startup Abnormality ............................................252

4.43 Transmission Error between Inverter PCB and
Outdoor Unit Main PCB........................................................................255
4.44 Power Supply Voltage Imbalance ........................................................257
4.45 Reactor Temperature Abnormality .......................................................259
4.46 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality .................................260
4.47 Field Setting after Replacing Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality or
Combination of PCB Abnormality.........................................................262
4.48 Refrigerant Shortage Warning..............................................................263
4.49 Open Phase .........................................................................................264
4.50 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Abnormality .....................265
4.51 Check Operation Not Executed............................................................267
4.52 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor Units..............268
4.53 Transmission Error between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit.........271
4.54 Transmission Error between Outdoor Units .........................................272
4.55 Transmission Error between Main and Sub Remote Controllers .........277
4.56 Other Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit Abnormality................................278
4.57 Improper Combination of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit,
Indoor Unit and Remote Controller.......................................................279
4.58 Address Duplication of Centralized Controller......................................282
4.59 Transmission Error between Centralized Controller and
Indoor Unit............................................................................................283
4.60 System Not Set Yet ..............................................................................285
4.61 System Abnormality, Refrigerant System Address Undefined .............286
5. Check ..................................................................................................288
5.1 High Pressure Check ...........................................................................288
5.2 Low Pressure Check ............................................................................289
5.3 Superheat Operation Check.................................................................290
5.4 Power Transistor Check .......................................................................291
5.5 Refrigerant Overcharge Check.............................................................292
5.6 Refrigerant Shortage Check.................................................................293
5.7 Vacuuming and Dehydration Procedure ..............................................294
5.8 Thermistor Check .................................................................................295
5.9 Pressure Sensor Check .......................................................................298
5.10 Broken Wire Check of the Relay Wires ................................................299
5.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable) ............................300
Part 7 Appendix......................................................................... 301

1. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................302
1.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................302
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit ...................................................................................306
1.3 Residential Indoor Unit .........................................................................330
1.4 BP Unit .................................................................................................341
1.5 Air Treatment Equipment .....................................................................345
2. Compressor Cover Removal and Assembly .......................................351
2.1 Compressor Cover Removal ................................................................351
2.2 Compressor Cover Assembly...............................................................355
v Table of Contents
SiMT341715E Safety Cautions
1. Safety Cautions
Be sure to read the following safety cautions before conducting repair work.
After the repair work is complete, be sure to conduct a test operation to ensure that the
equipment operates normally, and explain the cautions for operating the product to the
customer.
This manual is for the
person in charge of
maintenance and
inspection.
Caution Items The caution items are classified into Warning and Caution. The Warning items are
especially important since death or serious injury can result if they are not followed closely. The
Caution items can also lead to serious accidents under some conditions if they are not
followed. Therefore, be sure to observe all the safety caution items described below.
Pictograms This symbol indicates an item for which caution must be exercised.
The pictogram shows the item to which attention must be paid.
This symbol indicates a prohibited action.
The prohibited item or action is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
This symbol indicates an action that must be taken, or an instruction.
The instruction is shown in the illustration or near the symbol.
1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

Warning
Do not store equipment in a room with fire sources (e.g. naked flames,
gas appliances, electric heaters).
Be sure to disconnect the power cable from the socket before

disassembling equipment for repair.
Working on equipment that is connected to the power supply may cause an
electrical shock.
If it is necessary to supply power to the equipment to conduct the repair or
inspect the circuits, do not touch any electrically charged sections of the
equipment.
If refrigerant gas is discharged during repair work, do not touch the
discharged refrigerant gas.
Refrigerant gas may cause frostbite.
When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at

the welded section, evacuate the refrigerant gas completely at a well-
ventilated place first.
If there is gas remaining inside the compressor, the refrigerant gas or
refrigerating machine oil discharges when the pipe is disconnected, and it may
cause injury.
If refrigerant gas leaks during repair work, ventilate the area.

Refrigerant gas may generate toxic gases when it contacts flames.
vi
Safety Cautions SiMT341715E
Warning
Be sure to discharge the capacitor completely before conducting repair
work.
The step-up capacitor supplies high-voltage electricity to the electrical
components of the outdoor unit.
A charged capacitor may cause an electrical shock.
Do not turn the air conditioner on or off by plugging in or unplugging the

power cable.
Plugging in or unplugging the power cable to operate the equipment may cause
an electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to wear a safety helmet, gloves, and a safety belt when working
in a high place (more than 2 m).
Insufficient safety measures may cause a fall.
In case of R-32 and R-410A refrigerant models, be sure to use pipes, flare
nuts and tools intended for exclusive use with R-32 and R-410A
refrigerant.
The use of materials for R-22 refrigerant models may cause a serious accident,
such as a damage of refrigerant cycle or equipment failure.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-32, R-410A,
R-22) in the refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerant system, excessively high pressure results, causing
equipment damage and injury.
Caution
Do not repair electrical components with wet hands.
Working on the equipment with wet hands may cause an electrical shock.
Do not clean the air conditioner with water.

Washing the unit with water may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to provide an earth/grounding when repairing the equipment in a

humid or wet place, to avoid electrical shocks.
Be sure to turn off the power switch and unplug the power cable when
cleaning the equipment.
The internal fan rotates at a high speed, and may cause injury.
Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

The use of inappropriate tools may cause injury.
vii
Caution
Be sure to check that the refrigerating cycle section has cooled down
enough before conducting repair work.
Working on the unit when the refrigerating cycle section is hot may cause
burns.
Conduct welding work in a well-ventilated place.

Using a welder in an enclosed room may cause oxygen deficiency.
1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

Warning
Do not store the equipment in a room with fire sources (e.g. naked flames,
gas appliances, electric heaters).
Be sure to use parts listed in the service parts list of the applicable model
and appropriate tools to conduct repair work. Never attempt to modify the
equipment.
The use of inappropriate parts or tools may cause an electrical shock,
excessive heat generation or fire.
If the power cable and lead wires are scratched or have deteriorated, be
sure to replace them.
Damaged cable and wires may cause an electrical shock, excessive heat
generation or fire.
Do not use a joined power cable or extension cable, or share the same
power outlet with other electrical appliances, since it may cause an
electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
Be sure to use an exclusive power circuit for the equipment, and follow
the local technical standards related to the electrical equipment, the
internal wiring regulations, and the instruction manual for installation
when conducting electrical work.
Insufficient power circuit capacity and improper electrical work may cause an
electrical shock or fire.
Be sure to use the specified cable for wiring between the indoor and
outdoor units.
Make the connections securely and route the cable properly so that there is no
force pulling the cable at the connection terminals.
Improper connections may cause excessive heat generation or fire.
When wiring between the indoor and outdoor units, make sure that the
terminal cover does not lift off or dismount because of the cable.
If the cover is not mounted properly, the terminal connection section may cause
an electrical shock, excessive heat generation or fire.
viii
Safety Cautions SiMT341715E
Warning
Do not damage or modify the power cable.
Damaged or modified power cables may cause an electrical shock or fire.
Placing heavy items on the power cable, or heating or pulling the power cable
may damage it.
Do not mix air or gas other than the specified refrigerant (R-32, R-410A,
R-22) in the refrigerant system.
If air enters the refrigerant system, excessively high pressure results, causing
equipment damage and injury.
If the refrigerant gas leaks, be sure to locate the leakage and repair it
before charging the refrigerant. After charging the refrigerant, make sure
that there is no leakage.
If the leakage cannot be located and the repair work must be stopped, be sure
to pump-down, and close the service valve, to prevent refrigerant gas from
leaking into the room. Refrigerant gas itself is harmless, but it may generate
toxic gases when it contacts flames, such as those from fan type and other
heaters, stoves and ranges.
When relocating the equipment, make sure that the new installation site
has sufficient strength to withstand the weight of the equipment.
If the installation site does not have sufficient strength or the installation work
is not conducted securely, the equipment may fall and cause injury.
Check to make sure that the power cable plug is not dirty or loose, then
insert the plug into a power outlet securely.
If the plug is dusty or has a loose connection, it may cause an electrical shock
or fire.
When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to

dispose of the old battery to prevent children from swallowing it.
If a child swallows the coin battery, see a doctor immediately.
Caution
Installation of a leakage breaker is necessary in some cases depending
on the conditions of the installation site, to prevent electrical shocks.
Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

combustible gas leaks.
If combustible gas leaks and remains around the unit, it may cause a fire.
Check to see if parts and wires are mounted and connected properly, and
if connections at the soldered or crimped terminals are secure.
Improper installation and connections may cause excessive heat generation,
fire or an electrical shock.
ix
Caution
If the installation platform or frame has corroded, replace it.
A corroded installation platform or frame may cause the unit to fall, resulting in
injury.
Check the earth/grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not properly

earthed/grounded.
Improper earth/grounding may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to measure insulation resistance after the repair, and make sure
that the resistance is 1 MΩ or higher.
Faulty insulation may cause an electrical shock.
Be sure to check the drainage of the indoor unit after the repair.
Faulty drainage may cause water to enter the room and wet the furniture and
floor.
Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

The water inside the unit may spill and wet the furniture and floor.
x
Icons Used SiMT341715E
2. Icons Used
The following icons are used to attract the attention of the reader to specific information.
Icon Type of Description

Information
Warning A Warning is used when there is danger of personal injury.
Warning
Caution A Caution is used when there is danger that the reader, through
incorrect manipulation, may damage equipment, lose data, get
Caution an unexpected result or have to restart (part of) a procedure.
Note A Note provides information that is not indispensable, but may

nevertheless be valuable to the reader, such as tips and tricks.
Note:
Reference A Reference guides the reader to other places in this binder or

in this manual, where he/she will find additional information on a
specific topic.
xi
SiMT341715E
Part 1
General Information
1. Model Names ..........................................................................................2
1.1 Singapore and Vietnam............................................................................2
1.2 Malaysia and Pakistan .............................................................................4
1.3 Thailand....................................................................................................6
1.4 Indonesia..................................................................................................8
1.5 Philippines ..............................................................................................10
2. External Appearance.............................................................................12
2.1 Indoor Unit..............................................................................................12
2.2 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................14
2.3 Air Treatment Equipment .......................................................................14
3. Combination of Outdoor Units...............................................................15
4. Capacity Range.....................................................................................16
4.1 Capacity Range for VRV Indoor Units Only ...........................................16
Residential Indoor Units .........................................................................19
General Information 1
Model Names SiMT341715E
1. Model Names
1.1 Singapore and Vietnam
VRV Indoor Unit
kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6 7.1 8.0 9.0 11.2 14.0 16.0 22.4 28.0 45.0 56.0 Power
Capacity range
HP 0.8 1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3 3.2 4 5 6 8 10 16 20 supply,
Capacity index 20 25 31.25 40 50 62.5 71 80 100 125 140 200 250 400 500 Standard
Ceiling mounted cassette
(Round flow with FXFSQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A 100A 125A 140A — — — —
sensing) type
VM
(Round flow) type FXFQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — 80A 100A 125A 140A — — — —

(Compact multi flow) FXZQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M — — — — — — — — — — VE9
type
4-way flow ceiling
suspended type FXUQ — — — — — — 71A — 100A — — — — — — VEB

(Double flow) type FXCQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M — 80M — 125M — — — — — VE9

(Single flow) type FXEQ 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — — — — — — — — — V36
20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — — — — — — —

with
drain VE
Slim ceiling pump
— — — 40ND 50ND 63ND — — — — — — — — —
mounted duct
type FXDQ
(Standard
series) 20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — — — — — — —
without
drain VET
pump
— — — 40ND 50ND 63ND — — — — — — — — —
Slim ceiling mounted

duct type (Compact FXDQ 20SP 25SP 32SP 40SP 50SP 63SP — — — — — — — — — V1
series)
Middle static pressure
ceiling mounted duct FXSQ 20PA 25PA 32PA 40PA 50PA 63PA — 80PA 100PA 125PA 140PA — — — —
type
VE
20PA 25PA 32PA 40PA 50PA 63PA — 80PA 100PA 125PA 140PA — — — —
Ceiling mounted duct
type FXMQ
— — — — — — — — — — — 200M 250M — — VE9
Ceiling suspended type FXHQ — — 32MA — — 63MA — — 100MA — — — — — —

VE
Wall mounted type FXAQ 20P 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P — — — — — — — — —
Floor standing type FXLQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — — — —
VE8
Concealed floor standing
type FXNQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — — — —
— — — — — — — — — 125N — 200N 250N 400N 500N Y1

Floor standing duct type FXVQ
— — — — — — — — — — — — — — 500N Y16
FXBQ — — — 40P 50P 63P — — — — — — — — —

Clean type air
conditioner VE
FXBPQ — — — — — 63P — — — — — — — — —
Power supply and standard symbols

V1, V36: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
VE, VE8, VE9, VET: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
VEB, VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
Y1, Y16: 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50 Hz
2 General Information
SiMT341715E Model Names
Residential Indoor Units with Connection to BP Unit

Capacity range kW 2.5 3.5 5.0 6.0 7.1 Power supply,
Capacity index 25 35 50 60 71 Standard
Slim ceiling 25EA 35EA — — —
mounted duct FDKS 25CA 35CA — — — VMB
type — — 50C 60C —
25N 35N 50N — — VMW
FTKJ +1
25N 35N 50N — — VMS
25N 35N 50N — — VMVW
Wall mounted FTKJ +2
25N 35N 50N — — VMVS
type
25D 35D — — — VM
FTKS — — 50B — — VMA8
— — 50F 60F 71F VM
Note: BP units are necessary for residential indoor units.
Residential indoor units can be connected with only single outdoor units.
VM:1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
+1 Only available to the Singapore market.

+2 Only available to the Vietnam market.
BP Unit
Type Model name
3 Ports BPMKS967A3
BP units
2 Ports BPMKS967A2
Air Treatment Equipment

Outdoor-air processing unit
Series Model name Power supply
FXMQ 125MF 200MF 250MF V1
V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM series)

Heat reclaim 50GA 80GA 100GA
ventilator with DX coil
Heat reclaim VKM V1
ventilator with DX 50GAM 80GAM 100GAM
coil and humidifier
Note: For details, refer to Engineering Data ED71-440B.
V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM series)

Heat reclaim
ventilator VAM 150GJ 250GJ 350GJ 500GJ 650GJ 800GJ 1000GJ 1500GJ 2000GJ VE
Note: For details, refer to Engineering Data EDMT711618.
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
Outdoor Unit
VRV A SERIES
6A 8A 10A 12A 14A 16A 18A 18AM 20A 20AM
Outdoor units RXQ 22AM 24AM 26AM 28AM 30AM 32AM 34AM 36AM 38AM 40AM YM
42AM 44AM 46AM 48AM 50AM 52AM 54AM 56AM 58AM 60AM
YM: 3 phase, 380-415/380 V, 50/60 Hz
1.2 Malaysia and Pakistan

VRV Indoor Unit
kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6 7.1 8.0 9.0 11.2 14.0 16.0 22.4 28.0 45.0 56.0 Power
Capacity range
HP 0.8 1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3 3.2 4 5 6 8 10 16 20 supply,
sensing) type
VM

type
4-way flow ceiling


corner type FXKQ — 25MA 32MA 40MA — 63MA — — — — — — — — —
20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — — — — — — — VE

with
drain
Slim ceiling
mounted duct pump — — — 40ND 50ND 63ND — — — — — — — — —
type FXDQ
(Standard 20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — — — — — — —
series) without
drain VET
pump — — — 40ND 50ND 63ND — — — — — — — — —
series)
type
VE
type FXMQ
— — — — — — — — — — — 200M 250M — — VE9

VE
VE8
— — — — — — — — — 125N — 200N 250N 400N 500N Y1

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — 500N Y16
FXBQ + — — — 40P 50P 63P — — — — — — — — —

Clean type air
conditioner VE
FXBPQ + — — — — — 63P — — — — — — — — —

V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
VEB, VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
Y1, Y16: 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50 Hz
+ FXBQ and FXBPQ models are not available to the Pakistan market.

Slim ceiling 25EA 35EA — — —
mounted duct FDKS 25CA 35CA — — — VMB
type — — 50C 60C —
25N 35N 50N — — VMMW
FTKJ +
25N 35N 50N — — VMMS
Wall mounted
type 25D 35D — — — VM
FTKS — — 50B — — VMA8
— — 50F 60F 71F VM
VM:1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
+ FTKJ models are not available to the Pakistan market.
BP Unit
Type Model name
3 Ports BPMKS967A3
BP units
2 Ports BPMKS967A2

V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

Heat reclaim 50GA 80GA 100GA
ventilator with DX coil
Heat reclaim VKM V1
coil and humidifier
V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

Heat reclaim
VAM 150GJ 250GJ 350GJ 500GJ 650GJ 800GJ 1000GJ 1500GJ 2000GJ VE
ventilator
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
Outdoor Unit
VRV A SERIES
6A 8A 10A 12A 14A 16A 18A 18AM 20A 20AM
YM: 3 phase, 380-415/380 V, 50/60 Hz
1.3 Thailand
VRV Indoor Unit
kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6 7.1 8.0 9.0 11.2 14.0 16.0 22.4 28.0 45.0 56.0
Capacity range Power
HP 0.8 1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3 3.2 4 5 6 8 10 16 20 supply,
Standard
Capacity index 20 25 31.25 40 50 62.5 71 80 100 125 140 200 250 400 500
sensing) type
VS

(Compact multi flow) FXZQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M — — — — — — — — — — VES
type
4-way flow ceiling



(Single flow) type FXEQ 20A 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A — — — — — — — — — V36
20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — — — — — — —

with
drain V2S
pump
Slim ceiling — — — 40ND 50ND 63ND — — — — — — — — —
mounted duct
type (Standard FXDQ
series) 20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — — — — — — —
without
drain VTS
pump
— — — 40ND 50ND 63ND — — — — — — — — —

series
type
VS
type FXMQ
— — — — — — — — — — — 200M 250M — — VES
Ceiling suspended type FXHQ — — 32MA — — 63MA — — 100MA — — — — — — VS
Wall mounted type FXAQ 20P 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P — — — — — — — — — VES
VE8
— — — — — — — — — 125N — 200N 250N 400N 500N Y1

— — — — — — — — — — — — — — 500N Y16
FXBQ — — — 40P 50P 63P — — — — — — — — —

Clean type air
conditioner VE
FXBPQ — — — — — 63P — — — — — — — — —

V1, V36: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
VS, V2S: 1 phase, 220 V, 50 Hz
VE, VE8, VE9, VES, VTS: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
VEB: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
Y1, Y16: 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50 Hz

09EA 12EA — — —
Slim ceiling
mounted duct FDKS 09CA 12CA — — — VMS
type
— — 18C 24C —
09N 12N 18N — — V1SW
FTKJ
Wall mounted 09N 12N 18N — — V1SS
type 09D 12D — — —
FTKS VMS
— — 18F 24F 28F
Residential Indoor units can be connected with only single outdoor units.
V1:1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

VM:1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
BP Unit
Type Model name
3 Ports BPMKS967B3S
BP units
2 Ports BPMKS967B2S

Outdoor-air processing Unit
V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

Heat reclaim
ventilator with DX 50GA 80GA 100GA
coil
VKM V1
Heat reclaim
coil and humidifier
V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

Heat reclaim
VAM 150GJ 250GJ 350GJ 500GJ 650GJ 800GJ 1000GJ 1500GJ 2000GJ VE
ventilator
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
Outdoor Unit
VRV A SERIES
Power supply,
Series Model name
Standard
6A 8A 10A 12A 14A 16A 18A 18AM 20A 20AM
Outdoor units RXQ 22AM 24AM 26AM 28AM 30AM 32AM 34AM 36AM 38AM 40AM Y1S
Y1S: 3 phase, 380-415V, 50Hz (for Thailand)
1.4 Indonesia
VRV Indoor Unit
kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6 7.1 9.0 11.2 14.0 16.0 22.4 28.0 45.0 56.0
Capacity range Power
HP 0.8 1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3.2 4 5 6 8 10 16 20 supply,
Standard
Capacity index 20 25 31.25 40 50 62.5 80 100 125 140 200 250 400 500
(Round flow with FXFSQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A 80A 100A 125A 140A — — — —
sensing) type
V4
(Round flow) type FXFQ — 25A 32A 40A 50A 63A 80A 100A 125A 140A — — — —

(Compact multi flow) FXZQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M — — — — — — — — —
type

(Double flow) type FXCQ 20M 25M 32M 40M 50M 63M 80M — 125M — — — — —
Ceiling mounted cassette VE4

corner type FXKQ — 25MA 32MA 40MA — 63MA — — — — — — — —
20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — — — — — —

with
drain
pump
Slim ceiling — — — 40ND 50ND 63ND — — — — — — — —
mounted duct
type (Standard FXDQ
series) 20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — — — — — —
without
drain VT4
pump
— — — 40ND 50ND 63ND — — — — — — — —

duct type (Compact FXDQ 20SP 25SP 32SP 40SP 50SP 63SP — — — — — — — — V14
series)
ceiling mounted duct FXSQ 20PA 25PA 32PA 40PA 50PA 63PA 80PA 100PA 125PA 140PA — — — —
type
V4
20PA 25PA 32PA 40PA 50PA 63PA 80PA 100PA 125PA 140PA — — — —
type FXMQ
— — — — — — — — — — 200M 250M — — VE4
Ceiling suspended type FXHQ — — 32MA — — 63MA — 100MA — — — — — — V7
Wall mounted type FXAQ 20P 25P 32P 40P 50P 63P — — — — — — — —
Floor standing type FXLQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — — — VE4

type FXNQ 20MA 25MA 32MA 40MA 50MA 63MA — — — — — — — —
Floor standing duct type FXVQ — — — — — — — — 125N — 200N 250N 400N 500N Y14
FXBQ — — — 40P 50P 63P — — — — — — — —

Clean type air
conditioner VE4
FXBPQ — — — — — 63P — — — — — — — —

V4: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz (for FXFSQ, FXFQ)
V4: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz (for FXSQ, FXMQ-PA)
V14: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz
VE4, VT4, V7: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
Y14: 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50 Hz

Slim ceiling 25E 35E — — —
mounted duct FDKS VMB4
type 25C 35C 50C 60C —
25N 35N 50N — — VM4W
FTKJ
Wall mounted 25N 35N 50N — — VM4S
type 25D 35D — — —
FTKS VM4
— — 50F 60F 71F
Residential Indoor units can be connected with only single outdoor units.
VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
BP Unit
Type Model name
3 Ports BPMKS967A3
BP units
2 Ports BPMKS967A2

Outdoor-air processing Unit
V7: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz (for Indonesia)

Heat reclaim
Note:For details, refer to Engineering Data EDMT711618.
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
Outdoor Unit
VRV A SERIES
6A 8A 10A 12A 14A 16A 18A 18AM 20A 20AM
Outdoor units RXQ 22AM 24AM 26AM 28AM 30AM 32AM 34AM 36AM 38AM 40AM Y14
Y14: 3 phase, 380-415 V, 50 Hz (for Indonesia)
1.5 Philippines
VRV Indoor Unit
kW 2.2 2.8 3.6 4.5 5.6 7.1 8.0 9.0 11.2 14.0 16.0 22.4 28.0 45.0 56.0 Power
Capacity range
HP 0.8 1 1.25 1.6 2 2.5 3 3.2 4 5 6 8 10 16 20 supply,
sensing) type
VM

type
4-way flow ceiling


corner type FXKQ — 25MA 32MA 40MA — 63MA — — — — — — — — —
20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — — — — — — — VE

with
drain
Slim ceiling
mounted duct pump — — — 40ND 50ND 63ND — — — — — — — — —
type FXDQ
(Standard 20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — — — — — — —
series) without
drain VET
pump — — — 40ND 50ND 63ND — — — — — — — — —
type
VE
type FXMQ
— — — — — — — — — — — 200M 250M — — VE9

VE
VE8
Floor standing duct type FXVQ — — — — — — — — — 125N — 200N 250N 400N 500N TL
FXBQ — — — 40P 50P 63P — — — — — — — — —

Clean type air
conditioner VE
FXBPQ — — — — — 63P — — — — — — — — —

VEB, VM: 1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
TL: 3 phase, 220-230 V, 60 Hz

Slim ceiling
mounted duct CDKS 25K 35K 50K 60K — VM
type
25N 35N 50N — — VMW
Wall mounted FTKJ
type 25N 35N 50N — — VMS
FTKS 25K 35K 50K 60K 71K VM
VM:1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz
BP Unit
Type Model name
3 Ports BPMKS967A3
BP units
2 Ports BPMKS967A2

FXMQ 48MF 72MF 96MF VJU
VJU: 1 phase, 208/230 V, 60 Hz

Heat reclaim
VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz
Outdoor Unit
VRV A SERIES
6A 8A 10A 12A 14A 16A 18A 18AM 20A 20AM
YM: 3 phase, 380-415/380 V, 50/60 Hz
External Appearance SiMT341715E
2. External Appearance
2.1 Indoor Unit
VRV Indoor Unit
Ceiling mounted cassette (Round flow with sensing) type Middle static pressure ceiling mounted duct type
FXFSQ-A FXSQ-PA
Ceiling mounted cassette (Round flow) type Ceiling mounted duct type
FXFQ-A FXMQ-PA
Ceiling mounted cassette (Compact multi flow) type Ceiling mounted duct type
FXZQ-M FXMQ-M
4-way flow ceiling suspended type Ceiling suspended type
FXUQ-A FXHQ-MA
Ceiling mounted cassette (Double flow) type Wall mounted type

FXCQ-M FXAQ-P
Ceiling mounted cassette (Single flow) type Floor standing type

FXEQ-A FXLQ-MA
Ceiling mounted cassette corner type Concealed floor standing type

FXKQ-MA FXNQ-MA
Slim ceiling mounted duct type (Standard series) Floor standing duct type
FXDQ-PD FXVQ-N
FXDQ-ND
Slim ceiling mounted duct type (Compact series) Clean type air conditioner
FXDQ-SP FXBQ-P
FXBPQ-P
SiMT341715E External Appearance
Residential Indoor Unit with Connection to BP Unit

Slim ceiling mounted duct type Wall mounted type
(700 mm width type)
FTKS-D
FDKS-E(A) FTKS25/35K
CDKS25/35K
Slim ceiling mounted duct type Wall mounted type

(900/1,100 mm width type)
FTKS-B
FDKS-C(A)
CDKS50/60K
Wall mounted type Wall mounted type
FTKJ-N FTKS-F
FTKS50/60/71K
BP Unit
BPMKS967A3, BPMKS967B3S (3 ports)
BPMKS967A2, BPMKS967B2S (2 ports)
External Appearance SiMT341715E
2.2 Outdoor Unit

VRV A SERIES
6, 8, 10, 12 HP 14, 16, 18, 20 HP
RXQ6AYM RXQ6AY14 RXQ6AY1S RXQ14AYM RXQ14AY14 RXQ14AY1S

18, 20, 22, 24 HP 26, 28, 30 HP 32, 34, 36, 38, 40 HP
RXQ18AMYM RXQ18AMY14 RXQ18AMY1S RXQ26AMYM RXQ26AMY14 RXQ26AMY1S RXQ32AMYM RXQ32AMY14 RXQ32AMY1S

RXQ24AMYM RXQ24AMY14 RXQ24AMY1S RXQ38AMYM RXQ38AMY14 RXQ38AMY1S
RXQ40AMYM RXQ40AMY14 RXQ40AMY1S
42, 44 HP 46, 48, 50, 52, 54, 56, 58, 60 HP

2.3 Air Treatment Equipment

Outdoor-air processing unit Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM series) Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM series)
FXMQ-MF VKM-GA VAM-GJ
VKM-GAM
with DX coil (GA)

with DX coil
and humidifier (GAM)
SiMT341715E Combination of Outdoor Units
3. Combination of Outdoor Units

VRV A SERIES
Capacity range 6 HP 8 HP 10 HP 12 HP 14 HP 16 HP 18 HP 20 HP
Model name RXQ6A RXQ8A RXQ10A RXQ12A RXQ14A RXQ16A RXQ18A RXQ20A
Model name RXQ18AM RXQ20AM RXQ22AM RXQ24AM RXQ26AM RXQ28AM RXQ30AM RXQ32AM
Outdoor unit 1 RXQ8A RXQ8A RXQ10A RXQ12A RXQ12A RXQ12A RXQ12A RXQ14A
Outdoor unit 3 – – – – – – – –
Model name RXQ34AM RXQ36AM RXQ38AM RXQ40AM RXQ42AM RXQ44AM RXQ46AM RXQ48AM
Outdoor unit 3 – – – – RXQ18A RXQ20A RXQ18A RXQ18A
Capacity range 50 HP 52 HP 54 HP 56 HP 58 HP 60 HP
Model name RXQ50AM RXQ52AM RXQ54AM RXQ56AM RXQ58AM RXQ60AM
Outdoor unit 1 RXQ14A RXQ16A RXQ18A RXQ18A RXQ18A RXQ20A
System capacity Number Module Outdoor unit multi connection

kW HP of units 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 piping kit 1
16.0 6 1 O
22.4 8 1 O
28.0 10 1 O
33.5 12 1 O
—
40.0 14 1 O
45.0 16 1 O
50.0 18 1 O
56.0 20 1 O
50.4 18 2 O O
55.9 20 2 O O
61.5 22 2 O O
67.0 24 2 OO
73.5 26 2 O O
78.5 28 2 O O
BHFP22P100
83.5 30 2 O O
90.0 32 2 O O
95.0 34 2 O O
100 36 2 OO
106 38 2 O O
112 40 2 OO
117 42 3 OO O
123 44 3 OO O
130 46 3 OO O
135 48 3 O O O
140 50 3 O OO
BHFP22P151
145 52 3 O OO
150 54 3 OOO
156 56 3 OO O
162 58 3 O OO
168 60 3 OOO
Note: 1. For multiple connection, the outdoor unit multi connection piping kit (separately sold) is required.
Capacity Range SiMT341715E
4. Capacity Range
4.1 Capacity Range for VRV Indoor Units Only
4.1.1 Combination Ratio
Total capacity index of the indoor units

Combination ratio =
Capacity index of the outdoor units
Max. combination ratio

Types of connected indoor units Type of connected air treatment equipment
Min. FXDQ, Including VKM FXMQ-MF
Type combination FXSQ, FXFSQ25A, When
ratio Other When
FXMQ-PA, FXFQ25A, indoor unit FXMQ-MF
FXAQ, and FXVQ When VKM and indoor FXMQ-MF
models and indoor
FXBQ, at least one units are connected is only
connected units are
FXBPQ unit connected
Single outdoor units 200%
Double outdoor units 50% 200% 130% 160% 130% 100% 100%*
Triple outdoor units 130%
* When outdoor-air processing units (FXMQ-MF) and standard indoor units are connected, the total connection
capacity of the outdoor-air processing units (FXMQ-MF) must not exceed 30% of the capacity index of the
outdoor units. And the connection ratio must not exceed 100%.
Note:When outdoor-air processing mode of FXVQ is selected, be sure to connect as follows:

ASEAN
HP Indoor unit Outdoor unit
5 HP FXVQ125NY1 × 1 RXQ6AYM × 1
FXVQ500NY1 × 1
20 HP RXQ20AYM × 1
FXVQ500NY16 × 1
Indonesia
5 HP FXVQ125NY1 × 1 RXQ6AY14 × 1
8 HP FXVQ200NY1 × 1 RXQ8AY14 × 1
10 HP FXVQ250NY1 × 1 RXQ10AY14 × 1
16 HP FXVQ400NY1 × 1 RXQ16AY14 × 1
20 HP FXVQ500NY1 × 1 RXQ20AY14 × 1
Thailand
5 HP FXVQ125NY1 × 1 RXQ6AY1S × 1
FXVQ500NY1 × 1
20 HP RXQ20AY1S × 1
FXVQ500NY16 × 1
SiMT341715E Capacity Range
4.1.2 Outdoor Unit Combinations

VRV A SERIES
Capacity Outdoor unit multi Total capacity index of Maximum number of
kW HP index Model name Combination connection piping kit *1 connectable indoor units *2 *3 connectable indoor units *2
16.0 6 150 RXQ6A RXQ6A — 75 to 195 (300) 9 (15)
22.4 8 200 RXQ8A RXQ8A — 100 to 260 (400) 13 (20)
28.0 10 250 RXQ10A RXQ10A — 125 to 325 (500) 16 (25)
33.5 12 300 RXQ12A RXQ12A — 150 to 390 (600) 19 (30)
40.0 14 350 RXQ14A RXQ14A — 175 to 455 (700) 22 (35)
45.0 16 400 RXQ16A RXQ16A — 200 to 520 (800) 26 (40)
50.0 18 450 RXQ18A RXQ18A — 225 to 585 (900) 29 (45)
56.0 20 500 RXQ20A RXQ20A — 250 to 650 (1,000) 32 (50)
50.4 18 450 RXQ18AM RXQ8A + RXQ10A 225 to 585 (720) 29 (36)
67.0 24 600 RXQ24AM RXQ12A × 2 300 to 780 (960) 39 (48)
73.5 26 650 RXQ26AM RXQ12A + RXQ14A 325 to 845 (1,040) 42 (52)
BHFP22P100
90.0 32 800 RXQ32AM RXQ14A + RXQ18A 400 to 1,040 (1,280) 52 (64)
95.0 34 850 RXQ34AM RXQ16A + RXQ18A 425 to 1,105 (1,360) 55 (64)
100 36 900 RXQ36AM RXQ18A × 2 450 to 1,170 (1,440) 58 (64)
106 38 950 RXQ38AM RXQ18A + RXQ20A 475 to 1,235 (1,520) 61 (64)
112 40 1,000 RXQ40AM RXQ20A × 2 500 to 1,300 (1,600)
117 42 1,050 RXQ42AM RXQ12A × 2 + RXQ18A 525 to 1,365 (1,365)
135 48 1,200 RXQ48AM RXQ14A + RXQ16A + RXQ18A 600 to 1,560 (1,560)
140 50 1,250 RXQ50AM RXQ14A + RXQ18A × 2 625 to 1,625 (1,625) 64 (64)
BHFP22P151
145 52 1,300 RXQ52AM RXQ16A + RXQ18A × 2 650 to 1,690 (1,690)
150 54 1,350 RXQ54AM RXQ18A × 3 675 to 1,755 (1,755)
162 58 1,450 RXQ58AM RXQ18A + RXQ20A × 2 725 to 1,885 (1,885)
168 60 1,500 RXQ60AM RXQ20A × 3 750 to 1,950 (1,950)
Notes: *1. For multiple connection, the outdoor unit multi connection piping kit (separately sold) is required.
*2. Values inside brackets are based on connection of indoor units rated at maximum capacity, 200% for
single outdoor units, 160% for double outdoor units, and 130% for triple outdoor units.
*3. When outdoor-air processing units (FXMQ-MF) and standard indoor units are connected, the total
connection capacity of the outdoor-air processing units (FXMQ-MF) must not exceed 30% of the
capacity index of the outdoor units. And the connection ratio must not exceed 100%.
Capacity Range SiMT341715E
VRV A SERIES
Types of connected indoor units
Including FXFSQ25A,
FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ-PA, FXFQ25A, and FXVQ at Other indoor unit models
Capacity Model Min. FXAQ, FXBQ, FXBPQ
Type HP least one unit
index name combination
ratio Max. Max. number Max. Max. number Max. Max. number
combination of connectable combination of connectable combination of connectable
ratio indoor units ratio indoor units ratio indoor units
6 150 RXQ6A 15 9 15
8 200 RXQ8A 20 13 20
10 250 RXQ10A 25 16 25
Single 12 300 RXQ12A 30 19 30
outdoor 200%
unit 14 350 RXQ14A 35 22 35
16 400 RXQ16A 40 26 40
18 450 RXQ18A 45 29 45
20 500 RXQ20A 50 32 50
18 450 RXQ18AM 45 29 36
20 500 RXQ20AM 50 32 40
22 550 RXQ22AM 55 35 44
24 600 RXQ24AM 60 39 48
26 650 RXQ26AM 42 52
Double 28 700 RXQ28AM 45 56
outdoor 160%
units 30 750 RXQ30AM 48 60
50% 200% 130%
32 800 RXQ32AM 52
34 850 RXQ34AM 55
36 900 RXQ36AM 58
38 950 RXQ38AM 61
40 1,000 RXQ40AM
42 1,050 RXQ42AM
64
44 1,100 RXQ44AM
46 1,150 RXQ46AM 64
48 1,200 RXQ48AM
Triple 50 1,250 RXQ50AM 64
outdoor 130%
units 52 1,300 RXQ52AM
54 1,350 RXQ54AM
56 1,400 RXQ56AM
58 1,450 RXQ58AM
60 1,500 RXQ60AM
Note: If the operational capacity of indoor units is more than 130%, low airflow operation is enforced in all the
indoor units.
SiMT341715E Capacity Range

Residential Indoor Units
4.2.1 Combination Ratio
Total capacity index of the indoor units

Combination ratio =
Capacity index of the outdoor units
Max. combination ratio

Type of connected Type of connected air treatment equipment
Min. combination indoor units VKM FXMQ-MF
Type
ratio
When FXMQ-MF and
Residential indoor units When VKM and indoor
indoor units are
or VRV mix combination units are connected connected
Single outdoor units 50% 130% 130% 100% *1
Note: *1. When outdoor-air processing units (FXMQ-MF) and standard indoor units are connected, the total
4.2.2 Outdoor Unit Combinations

VRV A SERIES
Total capacity index of connectable indoor units *2
Capacity Maximum number of
kW HP index Model name *1 Combination ratio (%) connectable indoor units
50% 100% 130%
16.0 6 150 RXQ6A 75 150 195 9
22.4 8 200 RXQ8A 100 200 260 13
28.0 10 250 RXQ10A 125 250 325 16
33.5 12 300 RXQ12A 150 300 390 19
40.0 14 350 RXQ14A 175 350 455 22
45.0 16 400 RXQ16A 200 400 520 26
50.0 18 450 RXQ18A 225 450 585 29
56.0 20 500 RXQ20A 250 500 650 32
Notes: *1. Only single outdoor unit (RXQ6-20A) can be connected.
*2. When outdoor-air processing units (FXMQ-MF) and standard indoor units are connected, the total
SiMT341715E
Part 2
Refrigerant Circuit
1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) ...................................................21
1.1 Outdoor Unit ...........................................................................................21
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit .....................................................................................27
1.3 Residential Indoor Unit ...........................................................................29
1.4 BP Unit ...................................................................................................34
1.5 Outdoor-air Processing Unit ...................................................................35
2. Functional Parts Layout ........................................................................36
2.1 RXQ6/8A ................................................................................................36
2.2 RXQ10/12A ............................................................................................37
2.3 RXQ14A .................................................................................................38
2.4 RXQ16/18A ............................................................................................39
2.5 RXQ20A .................................................................................................40
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................41
3.1 RXQ6/8/10/12A ......................................................................................41
3.2 RXQ14A .................................................................................................43
3.3 RXQ16/18/20A .......................................................................................45
20 Refrigerant Circuit
SiMT341715E Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams)
1. Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams)

1.1 Outdoor Unit
1.1.1 RXQ6/8/10/12A
No. in
Electric
piping symbol Name Function
diagram
(1) M1C Inverter compressor Inverter driven compressor is operated in multi-steps according to Te.
Because the system is an air heat exchange type, the fan is operated at 10-step
(2) M1F Inverter fan
rotation speed by using the inverter.
Electronic expansion valve
(3) Y1E Fully open during cooling operation.
(Main)
Electronic expansion valve PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree of subcooling heat
(4) Y2E
(Injection) exchanger constant.
(5) Y4E Electronic expansion valve Used to control refrigerant charging speed during refrigerant auto charge operation
(Refrigerant auto charge) and to stop refrigerant charge automatically.
(6) Y3S Solenoid valve (Oil return 1) Used to control the amount of oil from the oil separator to the compressor.
(7) S1NPH High pressure sensor Used to detect high pressure.
(8) S1NPL Low pressure sensor Used to detect low pressure.
In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when an error occurs, this switch is
(9) S1PH High pressure switch
activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the compressor operation.
This valve opens at a pressure of 4.0 MPa for prevention of pressure increase, thus
(10) — Pressure regulating valve resulting in no damage of functional parts due to the increase of pressure in
transportation or storage.
Double tube heat exchanger
(11) — Used to subcooling liquid refrigerant from the electronic expansion valve.
(Subcooling heat exchanger)
Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil separator to the
(12) — Capillary tube compressor.
(13) R1T Thermistor (Outdoor air: Ta) Used to detect outdoor air temperature, correct discharge pipe temperature, and
others.
(14) R21T Thermistor (Discharge pipe: Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature protection control of
Tdi1) compressor, and others.
(15) R3T Thermistor (Suction pipe: Ts) Used to detect suction pipe temperature, and for other purposes.
This detects temperature of liquid pipe between the air heat exchanger and main
Thermistor (Heat exchanger
(16) R4T liquid pipe: Tf) electronic expansion valve. Used to make judgements on the recover or discharge
refrigerants to the refrigerant regulator.
Thermistor (Subcooling heat This detects temperature of liquid pipe between the main electronic expansion valve
(17) R5T
exchanger liquid pipe: Tsc) and subcooling heat exchanger.
This detects temperature of gas pipe on the evaporation side of subcooling heat
(18) R6T Thermistor (Subcooling heat exchanger. Used to exercise the constant control of superheated degree at the outlet
exchanger gas pipe: Tsh)
of subcooling heat exchanger.
(19) R8T Thermistor Detects compressor surface temperature, this switch is activated at surface
(Compressor body: Ti1) temperature of 120°C or more to stop the compressor operation.
Refrigerant Circuit 21
22
(11)
(18)
(16)
(17) (3)
(13)
Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams)
(2)
(4)
(7)
(10)
(9)
(14)
(5) (8)
(19) (6)
(1)
(15)
(12)
C: 3D111780
Refrigerant Circuit
SiMT341715E
1.1.2 RXQ14A
No. in
Electric
diagram
(1) M1C Inverter compressor Inverter compressor is operated in multi-steps according to Te.
(2) M1F Because the system is an air heat exchange type, the fan is operated at 10-step
Inverter fan rotation speed by using the inverter.
(3) M2F
(4) Y1E Fully open during cooling operation.
(Main)
Electronic expansion valve PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree of subcooling heat
(5) Y2E
Electronic expansion valve Used to control refrigerant charging speed during refrigerant auto charge operation
(6) Y4E
(7) Y3S Solenoid valve (Oil return 1) Used to control the amount of oil from the oil separator to the compressor.
High pressure switch In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when an error occurs, this switch is
(10) S1PH
(For M1C compressor) activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the compressor operation.
(12) — Used to subcooling liquid refrigerant from the electronic expansion valve.
(Subcooling heat exchanger)
Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil separator to the
(13) — Capillary tube
compressor.
Used to detect outdoor air temperature, correct discharge pipe temperature, and
(14) R1T Thermistor (Outdoor air: Ta) others.
Thermistor Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature protection control of
(15) R21T
(Discharge pipe: Tdi1) compressor, and others.
Thermistor (Heat exchanger This detects temperature of liquid pipe between the air heat exchanger and main
(17) R4T electronic expansion valve. Used to make judgements on the recover or discharge
liquid pipe: Tf) refrigerants to the refrigerant regulator.
(18) R5T Thermistor (Subcooling heat This detects temperature of liquid pipe between the main electronic expansion valve
Thermistor (Subcooling heat
(19) R6T exchanger gas pipe: Tsh) exchanger. Used to exercise the constant control of superheated degree at the outlet
Thermistor Detects compressor surface temperature, this switch is activated at surface
(20) R8T
(Compressor body: Ti1) temperature of 120°C or more to stop the compressor operation.
24
(4)
(12)
(19) (17)
(18) (2)
(14)
(5)
(3)
(8)
(11)
(10)
(6)
(15)
(9)
(20) (7)
(1)
(16)
(13)
C: 3D111855
Refrigerant Circuit
SiMT341715E
1.1.3 RXQ16/18/20A
No. in
Electric
diagram
(1) M1C
Inverter compressor Inverter compressor is operated in multi-steps according to Te.
(2) M2C
(3) M1F Because the system is an air heat exchange type, the fan is operated at 10-step
Inverter fan
(4) M2F rotation speed by using the inverter.
(5) Y1E (Main) Fully open during cooling operation.
(6) Y2E Electronic expansion valve PI control is applied to keep the outlet superheated degree of subcooling heat
Electronic expansion valve Used to control refrigerant charging speed during refrigerant auto charge operation
(7) Y4E
(8) Y3S Solenoid valve (Oil return 1)
Used to control the amount of oil from the oil separator to the compressor.
(9) Y4S Solenoid valve (Oil return 2)
High pressure switch
(12) S1PH
(For M1C compressor) In order to prevent the increase of high pressure when an error occurs, this switch is
High pressure switch activated at high pressure of 4.0 MPa or more to stop the compressor operation.
(13) S2PH
(For M2C compressor)
(15) — (Subcooling heat exchanger) Used to subcooling liquid refrigerant from the electronic expansion valve.
(16) — Used to return the refrigerating oil separated through the oil separator to the
Capillary tube compressor.
(17) —
(18) R1T Thermistor (Outdoor air: Ta) Used to detect outdoor air temperature, correct discharge pipe temperature, and
others.
Thermistor
(19) R21T (M1C discharge pipe: Tdi1) Used to detect discharge pipe temperature, make the temperature protection control of
Thermistor compressor, and others.
(20) R22T (M2C discharge pipe: Tdi2)
Thermistor (Heat exchanger This detects temperature of liquid pipe between the air heat exchanger and main
(22) R4T electronic expansion valve. Used to make judgements on the recover or discharge
liquid pipe: Tf) refrigerants to the refrigerant regulator.
Thermistor (Subcooling heat This detects temperature of liquid pipe between the main electronic expansion valve
(23) R5T
Thermistor (Subcooling heat
(24) R6T exchanger gas pipe: Tsh) exchanger. Used to exercise the constant control of superheated degree at the outlet
Thermistor
(25) R8T (M1C Compressor body: Ti1) Detects compressor surface temperature, this switch is activated at surface
Thermistor temperature of 120°C or more to stop the compressor operation.
(26) R9T
(M2C Compressor body: Ti2)
26
(15)
(5)
(24) (22)
(23) (3)
(18)
(6)
(4)
(10)
(14)
(7) (13) (12)
(20) (19)
(11)
(26) (25)
(9) (16) (8)
(2) (1)
(21)
(17)
C: 3D111854
Refrigerant Circuit
SiMT341715E
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

No. in piping Name Electric Applicable model Function
diagram symbol
Y1E All indoor units Used for gas superheated degree
(1) Electronic expansion valve FXVQ400/500N models control while in cooling or subcooled
Y2E only degree control while in heating.
(2) Suction air thermistor R1T All indoor units Used for thermostat control.
Indoor liquid pipe Used for gas superheated degree

(3) thermistor R2T All indoor units control while in cooling or subcooled
degree control while in heating.
Used for gas superheated degree
(4) Indoor gas pipe thermistor R3T All indoor units control while in cooling.
(5) Indoor heat exchanger R4T FXVQ models Used for indoor heat exchanger
outlet thermistor outlet temperature control.
FXFSQ-A, FXFQ-A FXZQ-M

Gas piping Gas piping
connection port connection port
(4)
(4)
Indoor heat exchanger Indoor heat exchanger

(2)
Fan
Fan
(3) (3)
Liquid piping (2)
Liquid piping
connection port connection port
Filter (1) Filter Filter (1) Filter

C: 4D024460P C: 4D040157B
FXUQ-A, FXCQ-M, FXKQ-MA, FXMQ-M, FXHQ-MA, FXEQ-A

FXAQ-P, FXLQ-MA, FXNQ-MA, FXBQ-P, FXBPQ-P
Gas piping Gas piping connection port
connection port
(4) Liquid piping connection port
Indoor heat exchanger
Fan (3)
(3) Filter
(2) Filter (1)
Liquid piping
connection port
(2)
Filter Filter (4) Fan

(1)
C: 4D034245P
C: 4D079708C
Refrigerant Circuit (Piping Diagrams) SiMT341715E
FXDQ-PD, FXDQ-ND, FXSQ-PA, FXMQ-PA FXDQ-SP

Gas piping connection port
Liquid piping connection port

(4)
(3)
Filter (1) Filter
(2)
(3) (2)
(1) (4) Fan
C: 4D104913 C: 4D090514
FXVQ125/200/250N FXVQ400/500N
Gas piping (5)
(5) connection port
(4)
(4)
Indoor heat exchanger Filter (3)
M Capillary
tube
Fan
Distributor
(3) (2)
Solenoid (2)
sv
valve Liquid piping

connection port (1)
Check
valve
(1)
Filter (1) Filter
C: 4D081333C
C: 4D081334C
1.3 Residential Indoor Unit

1.3.1 Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
FDKS25/35EAVMB, FDKS25/35CAVMB, FDKS50/60CVMB
FDKS25/35EVMB4, FDKS25/60CVMB4
FDKS09/12EAVMS, FDKS09/12CAVMS, FDKS18/24CVMS
CDKS25/35/50/60KVM
FDKS25EAVMB
FDKS35EAVMB
FDKS25CAVMB
FDKS35CAVMB FDKS50CVMB
FDKS25EVMB4 FDKS60CVMB
FDKS35EVMB4 FDKS60CVMB4
FDKS25CVMB4 FDKS18CVMS
FDKS09EAVMS FDKS24CVMS
FDKS12EAVMS CDKS50KVM
FDKS09CAVMS CDKS60KVM
FDKS12CAVMS
CDKS25KVM
CDKS35KVM
C: 4D045449X
FDKS35/50CVMB4
FDKS35CVMB4 FDKS50CVMB4
C: 4D069495
1.3.2 Wall Mounted Type

FTKJ25/35NVMW, FTKJ25/35NVMS
FTKJ25/35NVMMW, FTKJ25/35NVMMS
FTKJ25/35NVMVW, FTKJ25/35NVMVS
FTKJ25/35NVM4W, FTKJ25/35NVM4S
FTKJ09/12NV1SW, FTKJ09/12NV1SS
4D090745A
FTKJ50NVMW, FTKJ50NVMS
FTKJ50NVMMW, FTKJ50NVMMS
FTKJ50NVMVW, FTKJ50NVMVS
FTKJ50NVM4W, FTKJ50NVM4S
FTKJ18NV1SW, FTKJ18NV1SS
4D090743A
FTKS25/35DVM, FTKS25/35DVM4 FTKS50BVMA8

FTKS25/35KVM
FTKS09/12DVMS
4D050757E 4D040081Y
FTKS50/60FVM FTKS50/60FVM4
FTKS50/60KVM
FTKS18/24FVMS
4D054932J 4D069445
FTKS71FVM FTKS71FVM4
FTKS71KVM
FTKS28FVMS
4D050919L 4D069446
1.4 BP Unit
No. in
Electric
diagram
EVA-
(1) EVC Electronic expansion valve EVA, EVB, and EVC are the electronic expansion valves for each room.
Electronic expansion valve While in oil return operation, used to adjust the refrigerant circulating rate of the indoor
(2) EVH (Bypass) unit.
DGA- While in cooling operation, used to carry out the indoor unit SH control and cooling gas
(3) DGC Thermistor (Gas pipe) pipe isothermal control.
DLA-
(4) Thermistor (Liquid pipe) While in heating operation, used to carry out the indoor unit SC control.
DLC
Thermistor
(5) R1T Used to detect room air temperature and instruct the capacity supply to the BP unit.
(Room temperature)
Used to detect heat exchanger temperature and carry out various protection functions
(6) R2T Thermistor (Heat exchanger) and controls of capacity.
Thermistor
(7) R1T Used to detect room air temperature and instruct the capacity supply to the BP unit.
(Room temperature)
Thermistor Used to detect heat exchanger temperature and carry out various protection functions
(8) R2T
(Heat exchanger 1) and controls of capacity.
Thermistor Used to detect heat exchanger temperature and carry out various protection functions
(9) R3T
(Heat exchanger 2) and controls of capacity.
R1T (5)
DGA (3) (6)

R2T
DLA (4)
RA indoor unit
R1T (7)
(8)
EVH (2) DGB (3) R2T
(1)
Filter EVA (9)
R3T
Filter DLB (4)
EVB
SA indoor unit
Filter
R1T (7)
EVC DGC (3) (8)

R2T
Filter
(9)
DLC (4) R3T
To
outdoor
unit
Filter SA indoor unit
For 3 ports models only
1.5 Outdoor-Air Processing Unit

Gas pipe
connection port
Heat exchanger
(7)
(6)
(5)
Filter
(3) Capillary
Fan tube
Distributor (4)
(2) Solenoid
valve Liquid pipe
connection port
Check
(1) valve
Filter Filter
Electronic
expansion valve
C: 4D018650D
No. in
piping Electric Name Function
symbol
diagram
Used to control the flow rate of refrigerant, and make the SH
(1) Y1E Electronic expansion valve control (∗1) while in cooling.
(2) Y1S Solenoid valve Closed while in cooling.
(3) — Capillary tube Used to reduce pressure from high to low in bypassing hot gas.
(4) R1T Suction air thermistor Used to turn ON or OFF the thermostat.
Used to control the opening degree of electronic expansion valve
(5) R2T Liquid pipe thermistor under the SC control (∗2).
(6) R3T Gas pipe thermistor Used to control the opening degree of electronic expansion valve
under the SH control.
Used to control the electronic expansion valve opening and
(7) R4T Discharge air thermistor thermostat ON/OFF so as to keep the discharge air temperature
at the set temperature.
Notes: ∗1. SH control: Superheated control of heat exchanger outlet

∗2. SC control: Subcooling control of heat exchanger outlet
Functional Parts Layout SiMT341715E
2. Functional Parts Layout

2.1 RXQ6/8A
Top View
Solenoid Valve
(Oil return 1)
(Y3S)
Electronic expansion
valve (Injection)
(Y2E)
Thermistor
(Subcooling heat
exchanger gas pipe)
(R6T)
Thermistor (Heat
Thermistor
exchanger liquid pipe)
(Subcooling heat
(R4T)
(R5T)
Front View
Inverter fan
(M1F)
High pressure sensor

(S1NPH)
Thermistor Thermistor
High pressure (Compressor body)
switch (Discharge pipe)
(R21T) (R8T)
(S1PH)
Thermistor
(outdoor air) Inverter
(R1T) compressor
(M1C)
Detail
Low pressure
sensor
(S1NPL)
Electronic
expansion valve
(Main)
(Y1E)

Thermistor (Refrigerant auto charge)
(Suction pipe) (Y4E)
(R3T)
C: 1P501658B
SiMT341715E Functional Parts Layout
2.2 RXQ10/12A
Top View
Solenoid valve
(Oil return 1)
(Y3S)
valve (Injection)
(Y2E)
Thermistor
(Subcooling heat
exchanger gas pipe)
(R6T)
Thermistor (Heat Thermistor

exchanger liquid pipe) (Subcooling heat
(R4T) exchanger liquid pipe)
(R5T)
Front View
High pressure sensor
(S1NPH)
Inverter fan
(M1F)
Thermistor
(Discharge
pipe)
(R21T)
High pressure
switch Thermistor
(S1PH) (Compressor
body)
Inverter (R8T)
Thermistor compressor
(Outdoor air) Detail
(M1C)
(R1T)
Low pressure sensor
(S1NPL)
valve (Main)
(Y1E)
valve (Refrigerant
auto charge)
(Y4E)
Thermistor
(Suction pipe)
(R3T)
C: 1P501977A
2.3 RXQ14A
Top View
Solenoid valve
(Oil return 1)
(Y3S)
Low pressure sensor

(S1NPL)
valve (Injection)
(Y2E)
Front View
Inverter fan
Inverter fan
(M2F)
(M1F)
Thermistor High pressure sensor

(Outdoor air) (S1NPH)
(R1T)
Thermistor
High pressure
(Discharge
switch
pipe)
(S1PH)
(R21T)
(Subcooling heat (Compressor
Inverter
exchanger gas pipe) body)
compressor
(R6T) (R8T)
(M1C) Detail
valve (Main)
(Y1E)
Thermistor (Heat
(R4T)
Thermistor
(Subcooling heat
(R5T)
Thermistor (Refrigerant auto charge)
(Suction pipe) (Y4E)
(R3T)
C: 1P502163A
SiMT341715E Functional Parts Layout
2.4 RXQ16/18A
Top View
Solenoid valve (Oil return 2)
(Y4S)
(Y3S)
Low pressure sensor

(S1NPL)
valve (Injection)
(Y2E)
Front View
Inverter fan
(M1F) Thermistor (Outdoor air)
(R1T)
Inverter fan
(M2F)

(S1PH)

High pressure sensor (For M2C compressor)
(S1NPH) (S2PH)
Thermistor
(Subcooling heat
exchanger gas pipe)
(R6T) Thermistor Thermistor
(M2C (M1C
Discharge pipe) Discharge pipe)
(R22T) (R21T)
valve (Main)
(Y1E) Inverter Inverter
compressor compressor
Thermistor (Heat (M2C) (M1C)
exchanger liquid pipe) Thermistor (M2C Thermistor (M1C
(R4T) Compressor body) Compressor body)
Thermistor (R9T) (R8T)
(Subcooling heat
exchanger liquid pipe) Detail
(R5T)
Thermistor (Suction pipe)

Electronic expansion valve (Refrigerant auto charge)
(R3T)
(Y4E)
C: 1P502813A
2.5 RXQ20A
Top View

Low pressure sensor (Y4S)
(S1NPL)
Electronic expansion (Y3S)
valve (Injection)
(Y2E)
Front View
Inverter fan
(M1F)
Thermistor (Outdoor air)

(R1T)
Inverter fan
High pressure sensor (M2F)
(S1NPH)

(S1PH)

(S2PH)
Thermistor
(Subcooling heat
exchanger gas pipe)
(R6T)
(M2C (M1C
Discharge pipe) Discharge pipe)
(R22T) (R21T)
valve (Main) Inverter Inverter
(Y1E) compressor compressor
(M2C) (M1C)
Thermistor (M2C Thermistor (M1C
Thermistor (Heat Compressor body) Compressor body)
(R9T) (R8T)
(R4T)
Detail
Thermistor
(Subcooling heat
(R5T)
Thermistor (Suction pipe) Electronic expansion valve (Refrigerant auto charge)

(R3T) (Y4E)
C: 1P502461F
SiMT341715E Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode
3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode

3.1 RXQ6/8/10/12A
Cooling Operation
High temperature, high pressure, gas
High temperature, high pressure, liquid
Low temperature, low pressure
Indoor unit operation
Fan ON Fan ON
ON Fan OFF OFF ON

Heat exchanger Heat exchanger Heat exchanger
Fan Fan Fan

EV: Normal
control EV: 0 pulse EV: 0 pulse
Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter Filter
Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve Electronic expansion valve
Indoor unit Indoor unit Indoor unit
Thermostat ON Thermostat OFF
Stop valve (With service port on on-site piping side φ7.9mm flare connection)
Double tube
Heat exchanger
R6T Electronic Expansion
valve (main) R4T
Filter R5T (Y1E) Filter

Heat sink PCB
Electronic expansion Fan R1T
valve M Heat exchanger
(Y2E)
M1F
Pressure SENPH
(S1NPH)
regulating High pressure
valve sensor
Check valve
Filter
(S1PH)
High pressure
Separator
switch
Oil
Electronic expansion HPS

Refrigerant valve R21T
Auto charge
port Filter
Filter (Y4E)
(S1NPL) R8T Compressor

Low pressure Solenoid valve (Y3S)
SV
INV
sensor
M1C
SENPL
R3T
Capillary tube
Filter
C: 3D111780
Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode SiMT341715E
Cooling Oil Return Operation

Fan ON Fan OFF Fan ON
ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan

EV: Normal EV: Normal
control EV: 224 pulse control
Double tube
Heat exchanger
valve (main) R4T
Filter R5T (Y1E) Filter

Heat sink PCB
Electronic expansion Fan R1T
valve M Heat exchanger
(Y2E)
M1F
Pressure SENPH
(S1NPH)
regulating High pressure
valve sensor
Check valve
Filter
(S1PH)
High pressure Separator
switch
Oil
Electronic expansion HPS

Refrigerant valve R21T
Auto charge
port Filter
Filter (Y4E)

SV
INV
sensor
M1C
SENPL
R3T
Capillary tube
Filter
C: 3D111780
3.2 RXQ14A
Cooling Operation
Fan ON Fan ON
ON Fan OFF OFF ON

Fan Fan Fan

EV: Normal
Double tube
Heat Exchanger
R6T Electronic expansion
Valve (main)
(Y1E)
R4T
Filter R5T FILTER

FAN
Electronic M1F M R1T
Expansion Heat Exchanger
Heat sink PCB FAN
Valve
(Y2E) M2F M
(S1NPH)
SENPH
Pressure High pressure
Regulating sensor
Valve
Check valve
(S1PH) Filter
Electronic Expansion High pressure
Separator
Valve switch
(Y4E)
Oil
HPS
Refrigerant
Auto charge R21T
port Filter
Filter

SV
INV
sensor
M1C
SENPL
R3T
Capillary tube
Filter
C: 3D111855

Fan ON Fan OFF Fan ON
ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan

Double tube
Heat Exchanger
R6T Electronic expansion
Valve (main)
(Y1E)
R4T
Filter R5T FILTER

FAN
Electronic M1F M R1T
Heat sink PCB FAN
Valve
(Y2E) M2F M
(S1NPH)
SENPH
Pressure High pressure
Regulating sensor
Valve
Check valve
(S1PH) Filter
Electronic Expansion High pressure
Separator
Valve switch
(Y4E)
Oil
HPS
Refrigerant
Auto charge R21T
port Filter
Filter

SV
INV
sensor
M1C
SENPL
R3T
Capillary tube
Filter
C: 3D111855
3.3 RXQ16/18/20A
Cooling Operation
Fan ON Fan ON
ON Fan OFF OFF ON

Fan Fan Fan
EV: Normal

Double tube
Heat Exchanger
Valve (main)
(Y1E)
R4T
Filter R5T FILTER

FAN
Electronic R1T
M1F M
Valve Heat sink PCB
FAN
(Y2E)
M2F M
(S1NPH)
SENPH High pressure
Pressure sensor
Regulating
Valve
Check Valve Check Valve
Filter Filter
Separator
Separator
Electronic Expansion (S2PH) (S1PH)

Oil
Oil
Valve High pressure

Refrigerant (Y4E) High pressure
switch switch
Auto charge HPS HPS
port Filter
Filter
Filter R22T R21T
Solenoid Solenoid
Compressor valve Compressor
sv
valve
sv
R9T (Y4S) (Y3S) R8T

(S1NPL) INV2 INV1
Low pressure M2C Capillary
sensor M1C
tube
SENPL
Capillary
R3T tube
Filter
C: 3D111854


Fan OFF
Fan ON Fan ON
ON OFF ON
Fan Fan Fan


Double tube
Heat Exchanger
Valve (main)
(Y1E)
R4T
Filter R5T FILTER

FAN
Electronic R1T
M1F M
Valve Heat sink PCB
FAN
(Y2E)
M2F M
(S1NPH)
SENPH High pressure
Pressure sensor
Regulating
Valve
Check Valve Check Valve
Filter Filter
Separator
Electronic Expansion (S2PH) Separator

(S1PH)
Oil
Oil
Valve High pressure

(Y4E) High pressure
switch switch
Refrigerant HPS HPS
Auto charge Filter
port Filter
Filter R22T R21T
Solenoid Solenoid
Compressor valve Compressor
sv
valve
sv
R9T (Y4S) (Y3S) R8T

(S1NPL) INV2 INV1
Low pressure M2C Capillary
sensor M1C
tube
SENPL
Capillary
R3T tube
Filter
C: 3D111854
SiMT341715E
Part 3
Remote Controller
1. Applicable Models .................................................................................48
2. Names and Functions ...........................................................................50
2.1 BRC1E62 ...............................................................................................50
2.2 BRC1E63 ...............................................................................................52
2.4 BRC4M, BRC7M Series .........................................................................55
2.5 ARC433A22 ...........................................................................................57
2.6 ARC433B47 ...........................................................................................59
2.7 ARC433B71 ...........................................................................................61
2.8 ARC433B76 ...........................................................................................63
2.9 ARC466A17 ...........................................................................................65
3. Main/Sub Setting...................................................................................67
3.1 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1E62, BRC1E63) ..................................67
3.2 When Wireless Remote Controller is Used Together.............................68
4. Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller...................................69
5. Centralized Control Group No. Setting..................................................72
5.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63 .............................................................................72
5.3 Group No. Setting Example....................................................................73
6. Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu..........................................74
6.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63 .............................................................................74
Remote Controller 47
Applicable Models SiMT341715E
1. Applicable Models
Wired remote controller
Series Wireless remote controller
Navigation
FXFSQ-A BRC7M635F (∗1)
FXFQ-A BRC1E63 (∗1) BRC7M635K (∗1)
FXZQ-M BRC7E531W
FXUQ-A BRC7CB59
FXCQ-M BRC7C67
FXEQ-A BRC4M63
FXKQ-MA BRC4C63
FXDQ-PD
FXDQ-ND BRC4C66
FXDQ-SP
VRV indoor unit FXSQ-PA BRC4C66
BRC1E62
FXMQ-PA BRC1E63 BRC4C66
FXMQ-M BRC4C64
FXHQ-MA BRC7EA66
FXAQ-P BRC7EA619
FXLQ-MA BRC4C64
FXNQ-MA BRC4C64
FXVQ-N —
FXBQ-P BRC4C64
FXBPQ-P BRC4C64
FDKS-E(C) ARC433B76 (∗2)
CDKS-K ARC433B76 (∗2)
FTKJ-N ARC466A17 (∗2)
FTKS25/35D ARC433B47 (∗2)
FTKS25/35K ARC433B47 (∗2)
RA indoor unit —
FTKS09/12D ARC433B47 (∗2)
FTKS50B ARC433A22 (∗2)
FTKS50/60/71F ARC433B71 (∗2)
FTKS50/60/71K ARC433B71 (∗2)
FTKS18/24/28F ARC433B71 (∗2)
Notes: ∗1. Some functions are not available. Refer to page 49 for details.
∗2. Standard accessory
48 Remote Controller
SiMT341715E Applicable Models
Function list
FXFSQ-A FXFQ-A
Category Function
BRC1E63 BRC7M BRC1E63 BRC7M
ON/OFF operation z z z z
Operation mode switching z z z z
Setting temperature z z z z
Swing pattern selection z z z z
Switchable fan speed (Ventilation amount) z z z z
Display switching function z — z —
Basic performance
Backlight function z z z z
Display automatic OFF z — z —
Multilingual correspond z z z z
Timer function (Time schedule display) z — z —
Key lock function z — z —
Contrast adjustment z — z —
Automatic Eco airflow rate z z z z
Eco infrared floor temperature sensor z — — —
Sensing sensor stop mode z — — —
Sensing sensor low mode z — — —
Setpoint range set z — z —
Setback z — z —
Energy saving function Function explanation — — — —
OFF timer (programmed) z — z —
Weekly schedule timer z — z —
ON/OFF timer — z — z
Setting temperature automatic recovery z — z —
VRT smart control z — — —
VRT control z — z —
Active circulation airflow z — z —
Forced cooling ON operation z — z —
Automatic cooling/heating changeover z — z —
Independent up-and-down airflow z — z —
Automatic direct air (when human sensing) z — — —
Airflow block — — — —
Comfortable function Two selectable temperature sensors z — z —
Application for high ceiling z — z —
Service contact display z — z —
Model name display (indoor/outdoor) z — z —
Filter sign/reset z z z z
Operation time accumulation time display z — z —
Operation data display z — z —
z: Available
—: Not available
Names and Functions SiMT341715E
2. Names and Functions

2.1 BRC1E62
(1) Mode Selector button
(11) LCD (with backlight)
(4) Up button
(5) Down button
(6) Right button
(7) Left button
(9) Operation lamp (Green)

(8) ON/OFF button
(3) Menu/Enter button
(10) Cancel button
(2) Airflow Setting button
(1) Mode Selector button (6) Right button

Used to select the operation mode. Used to highlight the next items on the
right-hand side.
(2) Airflow Setting button Display contents are changed to next
Used to indicate the Airflow Rate (Air screen per page.
Volume / Fan Speed) / Airflow Direction
screen. (7) Left button
Used to highlight the next items on the
(3) Menu/Enter button left-hand side.
Used to indicate the Main menu. Display contents are changed to
(For details of Main menu, refer to the previous screen per page.
operation manual.)
Used to enter the selected item. (8) ON/OFF button
Press to start the system.
(4) Up button Press this button again to stop the
Used to increase the set temperature. system.
Used to highlight the item above the
current selection. (9) Operation lamp (Green)
(The highlighted items will be scrolled This lamp lights up during operation. The
through when the button is pressed lamp blinks if an error occurs.
continuously.)
Used to change the selected item. (10) Cancel button
Used to return to the previous screen.
(5) Down button Press and hold this button for 4
Used to decrease the set temperature. seconds or longer to display Service
Used to highlight the item below the Settings menu.
current selection.
(The highlighted items will be scrolled (11) LCD (with backlight)
through when the button is pressed The backlight will be lit for about 30
continuously.) seconds by pressing any button.
Used to change the selected item.
SiMT341715E Names and Functions
Main Menu
• Airflow direction
• Quick start
• Ventilation
• Energy saving options
• Schedule
• Filter auto clean
• Maintenance information
• Configuration
Main Menu screen • Current settings
• Clock & calendar
Basic Screen • Language
• Operation mode changeover
• Temperature setting Press Press the Cancel
• Airflow rate the Menu/Enter button once.
• Airflow direction button once.
• Menu display
• Confirmation of each setting
• On
• Off
• Cancel
• Operation lamp
Press the Cancel button Press the Cancel

for 4 seconds or more. button once.
Basic screen
Press the Cancel

button once.
Press the Cancel button
for 4 seconds or more.
Service Settings screen Maintenance Menu screen
Service Settings Menu Maintenance Menu

• Test operation • Model name
• Maintenance Contract • Operation hours
• Field settings • Indoor unit status
• Min setpoints differential • Outdoor unit status
• Group address • Forced defrost
• Indoor unit Airnet address • Error display
• Outdoor unit Airnet address • Swap unit No.
• Error history • Addressed sensor value
• Indoor unit status
• Outdoor unit status
• Forced fan ON
• Switch main sub controller
• Filter indicator
2.2 BRC1E63
(1) Mode Selector button
(11) LCD (with backlight)
(4) Up button
(5) Down button
(6) Right button
(7) Left button
(9) Operation lamp (Green)

(8) ON/OFF button
(3) Menu/Enter button
(10) Cancel button
(2) Airflow Setting button
(1) Mode Selector button (6) Right button

Used to select the operation mode. Used to highlight the next items on the
right-hand side.
(2) Airflow Setting button Display contents are changed to next
Used to indicate the Airflow Rate (Air screen per page.
Volume / Fan Speed) / Airflow Direction
screen. (7) Left button
Used to highlight the next items on the
(3) Menu/Enter button left-hand side.
Used to indicate the Main menu. Display contents are changed to
(For details of Main menu, refer to the previous screen per page.
operation manual.)
Used to enter the selected item. (8) ON/OFF button
Press to start the system.
(4) Up button Press this button again to stop the
Used to increase the set temperature. system.
Used to highlight the item above the
current selection. (9) Operation lamp (Green)
(The highlighted items will be scrolled This lamp lights up during operation. The
through when the button is pressed lamp blinks if an error occurs.
continuously.)
Used to change the selected item. (10) Cancel button
Used to return to the previous screen.
(5) Down button Press and hold this button for 4
Used to decrease the set temperature. seconds or longer to display Service
Used to highlight the item below the Settings menu.
current selection.
(The highlighted items will be scrolled (11) LCD (with backlight)
through when the button is pressed The backlight will be lit for about 30
continuously.) seconds by pressing any button.
Used to change the selected item.
Main Menu
• Circulation airflow
• Individual air direction
• Quick start
• Ventilation
• Energy saving options
• Schedule
• Filter auto clean
Main Menu screen • Maintenance information
• Configuration
• Current settings
• Clock & Calendar
Press Press Cancel • Language
Menu/Enter button once.
button once.
Basic Screen
• Operation mode changeover
• Temperature setting
• Airflow rate
• Menu display
• Confirmation of each setting
• On
• Off
• Cancel Basic screen
• Operation lamp
Press Cancel button Press Cancel
for 4 seconds or more. button once.
Press Cancel
button once.
Press Cancel button
for 4 seconds or more.
Service Settings screen Maintenance Menu screen
Service Settings Menu Maintenance Menu

• Test Operation • Model name
• Maintenance contact • Operation hours
• Field settings • Indoor unit status
• Demand • Outdoor unit status
• Min setpoints differential • Forced defrost
• Indoor unit Airnet address • Error display
• Outdoor unit Airnet address • Swap unit No.
• Error history • Addressed sensor value
• Indoor unit status
• Outdoor unit status
• Forced fan ON
• Switch main sub controller
• Filter indicator
• Test filter auto clean
• Brush / Filter ind
• Disable filter auto clean
2.3 BRC4C, BRC7C, BRC7E Series

1 ON OFF
8
3 H M L
DOWN 10
C ON OFF
6 UP
TEMP
FAN H M L TIME 11
4 C
hr. UP
9 DOWN
2 hr. FAN
13
RESERVE CANCEL
hr.
5 TIMER 12
hr.
TEST
MODE 15
7
SWING 14
TEST
16
TEST 17
DISPLAY (SIGNAL TRANSMISSION) FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON

1
This lights up when a signal is being transmitted. 9 Press this button to select the fan speed, HIGH or
LOW, of your choice.
DISPLAY (OPERATION MODE)
2 TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
This display shows the current operation mode.
Use this button for setting temperature (Operates
H•L•M 10
DISPLAY (SET TEMPERATURE) with the front cover of the remote controller
˚C
3 closed.)
This display shows the set temperature.
PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON
DISPLAY hr. hr. (PROGRAMMED TIME) Use this button for programming start and/or stop
11
4 This display shows programmed time of the time. (Operates with the front cover of the remote
system start or stop. controller opened.)
5 DISPLAY (AIR FLOW FLAP) 12 TIMER MODE START/STOP BUTTON
13 TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON
DISPLAY (FAN SPEED)
6 14 AIR FLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
The display shows the set fan speed.
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
DISPLAY TEST (INSPECTION/ TEST) 15
Press this button to select operation mode.
7 When the INSPECTION/TEST button is pressed, 16 FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
the display shows the system mode is in.
INSPECTION/TEST BUTTON
ON/OFF BUTTON 17 This button is used only by qualified service
8 Press the button and the system will start. Press persons for maintenance purposes.
the button again and the system will stop.
2.4 BRC4M, BRC7M Series
13
2
1
6
3
7 4
8
5
9
10
11
12
18
17
15
14
16 19
20
Receiver
FXFSQ-A,
FXFQ-A
26
21 25
22
23 24
DISPLAY (SIGNAL TRANSMISSION) PROGRAMMING TIMER BUTTON

1 14 Use this button for programming “START and/
This blinks when a signal is being transmitted.
or STOP” time.
DISPLAY (OPERATION MODE)
15 TIMER MODE ON/OFF BUTTON
2 This display shows the current OPERATION 16 TIMER RESERVE/CANCEL BUTTON
MODE. Operation modes supported depend
on the model that is connected. 17 AIRFLOW DIRECTION ADJUST BUTTON
OPERATION MODE SELECTOR BUTTON
DISPLAY NOT AVAILABLE (displayed when
operation is not supported) Press this button to select OPERATION MODE.
3 When a button for a function that is not 18 (COOLING), (FAN), (PROGRAM
supported on the connected model is pressed, DRY).
this displays for 2 seconds. FILTER SIGN RESET BUTTON
DISPLAY (SET TEMPERATURE) 19 Refer to the section of MAINTENANCE in the
4 operation manual attached to the indoor unit.
This display shows the set temperature.
INSPECTION BUTTON
DISPLAY (PROGRAMMED TIME)
This button is used only by qualified service
5 This display shows PROGRAMMED TIME of 20
persons for maintenance purposes.
the air conditioner start or stop. Do not operate this button during normal use.
6 DISPLAY (AIRFLOW BLADE) EMERGENCY OPERATION SWITCH
DISPLAY (FAN SPEED) 21 This switch is readily used if the remote
7 controller does not work.
The display shows the set fan speed.
RECEIVER
DISPLAY (INSPECTION)
22 This receives the signals from the remote
8 When the INSPECTION BUTTON is pressed, controller.
the display shows the system mode is in.
Do not operate this button during normal use. OPERATING INDICATOR LAMP (Red)
This lamp stays lit while the air conditioner
ON/OFF BUTTON 23
runs. It flashes when the air conditioner is in
9 Press the button and the air conditioner will trouble.
start. Press the button again and the air
conditioner will stop.
TIMER INDICATOR LAMP (Green)
24
This lamp stays lit while the timer is set.
FAN SPEED CONTROL BUTTON
10 AIR FILTER CLEANING TIME INDICATOR
Press this button to select the fan speed.
25 LAMP (Red)
TEMPERATURE SETTING BUTTON
11 Lights up when it is time to clean the air filter.
Use this button for SETTING TEMPERATURE.
DEFROST OPERATION LAMP (Orange)
BACKLIGHT BUTTON
12 26 Lights up when the defrosting operation has
Press this button to turn the backlight on or off.
started.
SIGNAL TRANSMITTER
13
This sends the signals to the indoor unit.
2.5 ARC433A22
Signal transmitter
Display (LCD)
• Displays the current settings.
Receiver (In this illustration, each section is
shown with all its displays on for the
purpose of explanation.)
• To use the remote controller, aim the
transmitter at the indoor unit. If there
is anything to block signals between TEMPERATURE
the unit and the remote controller, adjustment buttons
such as a curtain, the unit will not
operate. • Changes the temperature setting.
• The maximum distance for : DRY Not available
communication is about 7 m.
: COOL 18 ~ 32 ˚C
: FAN Not available
HOME LEAVE button
• Press this button to start HOME
LEAVE operation.
The HOME LEAVE lamp lights up. ON/OFF button
• Press this button once to start
operation.
Press once again to stop it.
• Press the button again to cancel

HOME LEAVE operation.
POWERFUL button
• Starts POWERFUL operation.
Open the Front Cover
Mode button
• Selects the operation mode.
DRY COOL FAN
FAN setting button

QUIET button • Selects the airflow rate setting
every time you press this button.
• Starts OUTDOOR UNIT
QUIET operation.
• OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET Auto Indoor unit quiet Low
operation is not available in
FAN and DRY operation.
• OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
operation and POWERFUL Middle low
operation cannot be used at
the same time. Priority is
given to the function you
pressed last.
High Middle high Middle
• In indoor unit quiet operation,
ON TIMER button operation sound becomes weak.
• Press this button and adjust (The airflow rate also decreases.)
the time with TIMER setting • In DRY operation, the airflow rate
button. setting is not available.
Press this button again to
complete TIMER setting. SWING button
• Adjusts the airflow direction.
OFF TIMER button • When you press the SWING button,
the flap moves up and down, or
• Press this button and adjust
(and) the louver moves right and left.
the time with TIMER setting
button.
SENSOR button The flap (louver) stops when you
(INTELLIGENT EYE pressed the SWING button again.
complete TIMER setting. operation)
• To start INTELLIGENT EYE
TIMER CANCEL button
TIMER Setting button operation, press the SENSOR • Cancels the timer setting.
button.
• It changes the ON/OFF
is displayed on the LCD. CLOCK button
TIMER settings.
• To cancel the INTELLIGENT
EYE operation, press the
SENSOR button again.
disappears from the LCD.
2.6 ARC433B47
Signal transmitter Display (LCD)

(In this illustration, each section is
purpose of explanation.)
Receiver
TEMPERATURE
• To use the remote controller, aim the adjustment buttons
transmitter at the indoor unit. If there • Changes the temperature setting.
is anything to block signals between
the unit and the remote controller, : DRY Not available
such as a curtain, the unit will not : COOL 18 ~ 32 ˚C
operate.
• The maximum distance for : FAN Not available
communication is about 7m.
ECONO button
• Starts ECONO operation. ON/OFF button
operation.
POWERFUL button
Mode button
DRY COOL FAN
FAN setting button

TEMP every time you press this button.
• Starts OUTDOOR UNIT
QUIET operation.
• QUIET operation is not
Auto Indoor unit quiet Low
available in FAN and DRY
operation
• QUIET operation and
POWERFUL operation
Middle low
cannot be used at the same
time. Priority is given to the
function you pressed last.

ON TIMER button • In indoor unit quiet operation,
• Press this button and adjust operation sound becomes weak.
the day and time with the (The airflow rate also decreases.)
TIMER setting button. • In DRY operation, the airflow rate
Press this button again to setting is not available.
complete TIMER setting.
SWING button
OFF TIMER button • Adjusts the airflow direction.
• Press this button and adjust • When you press the SWING
the day and time with the button, the flap moves up and
TIMER setting button. down. The flap stops when you
Press this button again to press the SWING button again.
SENSOR button
MOLD PROOF button (INTELLIGENT EYE operation)
• Press and hold this button for
• To start INTELLIGENT EYE operation,
2 seconds to set MOLD
press the SENSOR button.
PROOF operation.
• Press and hold the button for
TIMER Setting button " " is displayed on the LCD.
• Changes the ON/OFF TIMER • To cancel the INTELLIGENT EYE
2 seconds again to cancel
settings. operation, press the SENSOR
MOLD PROOF operation.
button again.
" " disappears from the LCD.
CLOCK button
TIMER CANCEL button
RESET button • Cancels the timer setting.
• Restarts the unit if it freezes.
• Use a thin object to push.
2.7 ARC433B71
Signal transmitter
Display (LCD)
Receiver purpose of explanation.)
• To use the remote controller, aim the

the unit and the remote controller,
such as a curtain, the unit will not TEMPERATURE
operate.
adjustment buttons
• The maximum distance for
communication is about 7m. • Changes the temperature setting.
: DRY Not available

HOME LEAVE button : COOL 18 ~ 32 ˚C
• Press this button to start HOME : FAN Not available

LEAVE operation.
The HOME LEAVE lamp lights up.
ON/OFF button
operation.
• Press the button again to cancel Press once again to stop it.
POWERFUL button
Mode button
DRY COOL FAN
FAN setting button

• Starts OUTDOOR UNIT every time you press this button.
QUIET operation.
• QUIET operation is not
Auto Indoor unit quiet Low
operation
POWERFUL operation Middle low
ON CANCEL
OFF
TIMER High Middle high Middle
SENSOR button • In indoor unit quiet operation,

operation sound becomes weak.
(INTELLIGENT EYE operation) (The airflow rate also decreases.)
• To start INTELLIGENT EYE • In DRY operation, the airflow rate
operation, press the SENSOR setting is not available.
button.
" " is displayed on the LCD.
• To cancel the INTELLIGENT SWING button
EYE operation, press the
• Adjusts the airflow direction.
SENSOR button again.
" " disappears from the LCD. • When you press the SWING button,
the flap moves up and down, or
(and) the louver moves right and left.
The flap (louver) stops when you
ON TIMER button press the SWING button again.
the day and time with the
TIMER setting button. TIMER CANCEL button
• Cancels the timer setting.
TIMER Setting button RESET button

OFF TIMER button • Changes the ON/OFF TIMER
• Press this button and adjust • Restarts the unit if it freezes.
settings.
the day and time with the • Use a thin object to push.
TIMER setting button.
CLOCK button
2.8 ARC433B76
Display (LCD)
Signal transmitter
• To use the remote controller, aim the (In this illustration, each section is
transmitter at the indoor unit. If there shown with all its displays on for the
is anything to block signals between purpose of explanation.)
operate.
• The maximum distance for
communication is about 7m.
HOME LEAVE button TEMPERATURE

adjustment buttons
• Press this button to start HOME
LEAVE operation. • Changes the temperature setting.
The HOME LEAVE lamp lights up. : DRY Not available
: COOL 18 ~ 32 ˚C
: FAN Not available
ON/OFF button
operation.
HOME LEAVE lamp
POWERFUL button
• Press the button again to cancel

Mode button
DRY COOL FAN
FAN setting button

every time you press this button.
• Start OUTDOOR UNIT
QUIET operation.
• QUIET operation is not Auto Indoor unit quiet Low
operation
POWERFUL operation Middle low
ON TIMER button • In indoor unit quiet operation,

• Press this button and adjust (The airflow rate also decreases.)
the day and time with the • In DRY operation, the airflow rate
TIMER setting button. setting is not available.
TIMER CANCEL button

OFF TIMER button • Cancels the timer setting.
TIMER setting button.
TIMER Setting button RESET button
Press this button again to • Changes the ON/OFF TIMER
• Restarts the unit if it freezes.
complete TIMER setting. settings.
• Use a thin object to push.
CLOCK button
2.9 ARC466A17
Signal transmitter
Receiver
50 cm
Display (LCD)
or more • Displays the current settings.
• To use the remote controller, aim the purpose of explanation.)
operate.
• The maximum distance for Temperature adjustment
communication is about 6 m. button
Make sure that there are no • Changes the temperature setting.
obstacles within 50 cm under the
signal receiver. : DRY Not available
Such obstacles, if any, may have an : COOL 18 ~ 32 °C
adverse influence on the reception
performance of the receiver and the : FAN Not available
reception distance may be shortened.
Fan setting button

• Selects the airflow rate setting.
On/Off button
Auto Indoor unit quiet Low operation.
Middle low
Powerful button
• In indoor unit quiet operation,

(The airflow rate also decreases.)
• In DRY operation, the airflow rate
setting is not available.

Mode button
DRY COOL FAN
Econo / Quiet button

• Every time you press the
Econo/Quiet button, the
setting changes in the
following order.
Lamp brightness
setting button
• Each time you press the ECONO OUTDOOR UNIT
Brightness button, the QUIET
brightness of the indoor unit
display changes to high, low,
or off. Blank
No setting Combination
Comfort/Sensor button • OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET

operation is not available in
(COMFORT AIRFLOW FAN and DRY operation.
Operation / INTELLIGENT • OUTDOOR UNIT QUIET
EYE Operation) operation and POWERFUL
• Every time you press the operation cannot be used at
Comfort/Sensor button, the the same time. Priority is
given to the function you
setting changes in the
pressed last.
following order.
COMFORT INTELLIGENT Swing buttons

AIRFLOW EYE • Adjusts the airflow direction.
• When you press the Swing
button, the flap moves up and
down, or (and) the louver
Blank moves right and left. The flap
No setting Combination (louver) stops when you press
the Swing button again.
Off Timer button

• Press this button and adjust Select button : Weekly button
the day and time with the • Changes the ON/OFF
Select button. TIMER and WEEKLY : Program button
Press this button again to TIMER settings.
complete TIMER setting. : Copy button
: Back button
Timer Cancel button Clock button
: Next button
• Cancels the timer setting.
• It cannot be used for the • WEEKLY TIMER operation.
On Timer button
WEEKLY TIMER operation. • Press this button and adjust
Select button.
SiMT341715E Main/Sub Setting
3. Main/Sub Setting
Main/Sub setting is necessary when 1 indoor unit is controlled by 2 remote controllers. The remote controllers
are set at factory to Main, so you have to change one remote controller from Main to Sub. To change a
remote controller from Main to Sub, proceed as follows:
3.1 Wired Remote Controller (BRC1E62, BRC1E63)

3.1.1 Field Settings
The designation of the main and sub remote controllers can be swapped. Note that this change requires
turning the power OFF and then ON again.
Basic screen
is displayed.
Select Main RC or
Press and hold Sub RC using the
the Cancel Press the
/ (Up/Down)
button for 4 Cancel
buttons, and then
seconds or button
press the
more. once. Select Switch Main Sub
Press the Menu/Enter button.
Controller and press the
Menu/Enter
Service Menu/Enter button.
Item 2 is button. Item 2 is
settings menu displayed. displayed.
Press the Cancel button.
is displayed.
3.1.2 When an error occurred

U5: there are 2 main remote controllers when power is turned ON
ÆChange the setting from Main to Sub on the remote controller you want to be Sub.
U8: there are 2 sub remote controller when power is turned ON
ÆChange the setting from Sub to Main on the remote controller you want to be Main.
How to confirm Main/Sub setting

The Main/Sub setting of the remote controller is displayed on the bottom of the screen while Checking the
connection. Please stand by. is displayed.
Checking the connection.

Please stand by.
Confirm the remote controller
Main/Sub setting after power
Main RC
is turned ON.
How to change Main/Sub setting

You may change the Main/Sub setting of the remote controller while Checking the connection. Please
stand by. is displayed by pressing and holding the Mode Selector button for 4 seconds or longer.
Error Code: U5
Checking the connection. Checking the connection.
Please stand by. Please stand by. Fan
Press and hold for 4 seconds
or longer the Mode Selector
button of sub remote
Main RC Sub RC
controller side.
Main/Sub Setting SiMT341715E
Notes: 1. It is not possible to change the Main/Sub setting from Main to Sub when only one remote
controller is connected.
2. When 2 remote controllers are being used, it is not possible to change the setting from Main
to Sub if one of the remote controllers is already set as Main.
3.2 When Wireless Remote Controller is Used Together

When using both a wired and a wireless remote controller for 1 indoor unit, the wired controller should be set
to Main. Therefore, the Main/Sub switch (SS1) of the signal receiver PCB must be set to Sub.
Main/Sub Main Sub
Main/Sub S S
switch (SS1) M M
The side painted black indicates

the switch knob position.
Transmitter assembly
S
M
2 3
1
SS1
SS2
SiMT341715E Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller
4. Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller

If setting multiple wireless remote controllers to operate in one room, perform address setting for the receiver
and the wireless remote controller.
(This includes an individual remote controller control using the group operation.)
(For the wiring for the group operation, please refer to the installation manual attached to the indoor unit and
technical guide.)
Setting for signal receiver PCB
The address for the receiver is set to 1 at the factory. To change the setting, set the wireless address switch
(SS2) on the signal receiver PCB according to the table below.
Unit No. No. 1 No. 2 No. 3
1
1
Wireless address
2
2
switch (SS2)
3
3
The side painted black indicates
the switch knob position.
Transmitter assembly
S
M
2 3
1
SS1
SS2
Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller SiMT341715E
Setting for wireless remote controller (BRC4C, BRC7C, BRC7E series)

The address for the wireless remote controller is set to 1 at the factory. To change the setting, proceed as
follows:
1. Press FILTER SIGN RESET button and INSPECTION/TEST button at the same time for 4 seconds to
enter field setting mode. (SETTING is indicated on the display.)
2. Press FAN button and select A or b. Each time the button is pressed, the display switches between A and
b.
3. Press UP button or DOWN button to select an address from 1-3 as same as the receiver.
Address can be set from 1-6, but the receiver does not work with addresses 4-6.)
4. Press RESERVE button to confirm the setting.

5. Press INSPECTION/TEST button for 1 second to return to normal mode.
UP button
Field setting mode DOWN button
FAN button
RESERVE button
Address
Multiple setting
FILTER SIGN RESET button
INSPECTION/TEST button
SiMT341715E Address Setting for Wireless Remote Controller
Setting for wireless remote controller (BRC4M, BRC7M series)

The address for the wireless remote controller is factory setting to 1. To change this setting, proceed as
follows:
1. Hold down the FILTER SIGN RESET button and the INSPECTION button for at least 4 seconds to get the
Field Setting mode.
(Indicated in the display area in the figure.)
2. Press the SELECT button and select a multiple setting (A/b). Each time the button is pressed the display
switches between A and b.
3. Press the TEMP buttons to set the address.
Address can be set from 1 to 6, but set it to 1 ~ 3 and to same address as the receiver. (The receiver does
not work with address 4-6.)
4. When the RESERVE button is pressed, the setting is confirmed and the usual display returns.
Address
Multiple setting
2
4
Multiple Settings A/b

The command such as operation mode or temperature setting by this remote controller will be rejected when
the target indoor unit operation is restricted as by an external control such as centralized control.
Since the setting acceptance is hard to discriminate with such circumstances there are two setting options
provided to enable discriminating by a beeping sound according to the operation: “A: Standard” or “b: Multi
System”. Set the setting according to the customer's intention.
Remote Controller Indoor Unit
Multiple setting Display on remote Behavior to the remote controller operation when
controller the functions are restricted as by an external Other than the left
control.
Accepts the functions except restricted. (Sounds Accepts all items transmitted
A: Standard All items displayed. one long beep or three short beeps) (Sounds two short beeps)
(factory set) There may be a difference from the indoor unit The remote controller
status with remote controller display. display agrees with the
indoor unit status.
<When some restricted functions are included
in the transmitted items>
Accepts the functions except restricted. (Sounds
b: Multi Display only items one long beep or three short beeps)
System transmitted for a There may be a difference from the indoor unit
while. status with remote controller display.
<When no restricted function is included>

Accepts all items transmitted (Sounds two short
beeps)
The remote controller display agrees with the
indoor unit status.
Centralized Control Group No. Setting SiMT341715E
5. Centralized Control Group No. Setting

5.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63
Group No. Setting (Group)
Basic screen
is displayed.
Press and hold Press the Cancel
the Cancel button button once.
for 4 seconds or
more. Select Group Address
and then press the
Item 2 is
settings menu Press the Cancel displayed.
is displayed. button once.
Select Group Press the Cancel
Address (Group) button once.
and then press
the Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Select the desired
Group No. using Press the Menu/Enter
the / (Up/Down) button.
buttons, and then
press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Group No. Setting (Unit)

Basic screen
is displayed.
Press and hold Press the Cancel
the Cancel button button once.
for 4 seconds or
more. Select Group Address
and then press the
Item 2 is
settings menu Press the Cancel displayed.
is displayed. button once.
Select Group Press the Cancel
Address (Unit) button once.
and then press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
Select the desired
Group No. using Press the Menu/Enter
the / (Up/Down) button.
buttons, and then
press the
Menu/Enter
button.
Item 2 is
displayed.
SiMT341715E Centralized Control Group No. Setting

Group No. setting by wireless remote controller for centralized control
1. When in the normal mode, press INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds or more to enter field setting
mode.
2. Set mode No. 00 with MODE button.
3. Set the group No. for each group with UP button or DOWN button.
4. Enter the selected group numbers by pressing RESERVE button.
5. Press INSPECTION/TEST button and return to the normal mode.
UP button
Mode No.
RESERVE button
MODE button
Group No.
INSPECTION/TEST
button
5.3 Group No. Setting Example
Centralized Remote
Controller
Indoor/Outside Outside/Outside Indoor/Outside Outside/Outside
F1 F2
F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2 F1 F2
F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2
RC
Group Control by Remote Controller
1-00 Main RC RC Sub RC
(automatic unit address)
1-01 1-02
F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2 F1 F2 P1 P2
No Remote Controller
RC
1-03
1-04
Caution When turning the power supply on, the unit may often not accept any operation while 88 is
displaying after all indications were displayed once for about 1 minute on the liquid crystal
display. This is not an operative fault.
Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu SiMT341715E
6. Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu

6.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63
Operating the remote controller allows service data to be acquired and various services to be set.
Basic
screen is
displayed.
Press and Press the

hold the Press the Cancel Cancel button.
Cancel button button once.
for 4 seconds
or more.
Service
settings menu
is displayed.
Press and
hold the
Cancel button
for 4 seconds
or more. Select the desired item from the
Maintenance menu, and then Select the desired Unit No.
Maintenance press the Menu/Enter button. Item 2 is using the S/T (Up/Down)
menu is displayed. buttons. The corresponding
displayed. Press the Cancel button. data will be displayed.
SiMT341715E Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu
6.1.1 Service Settings Menu

Service settings menu Item 2 Remarks
Test Operation — —
Maintenance Contact None —
Maintenance Contact —, 0 to 9 (in order)
Field Settings Indoor Unit No. —
Mode No. —
First Code No. —
Second Code No. —
Demand Enable/Disable Enable, Disable
Settings 40%, 70%
Start time (by the unit of 30 minutes)
Ending time (by the unit of 30 minutes)
Min setpoints Differential None, Single SP, 0 to 8°C —
Group Address Group Address (Group) Gr Addr. Set
Group Address (Unit) Unit No., Gr Addr. Set
Indoor unit Airnet Address Unit No., Address Set —
Outdoor unit Airnet Unit No., Address Set —
Address
Error History RC Error History Unit No., Error, Date, Time
(Up to 10 errors received by the remote
controller can be displayed.)
Indoor Unit Error History Unit No., Error, Date, Time
(Up to 5 errors from the indoor unit error
record can be displayed.)
Indoor Unit Status Unit No. —
Th1 Suction air thermistor
Th2 Heat exchanger thermistor
Th3 —
Th4 Discharge air thermistor
Th5 —
Th6 —
Outdoor Unit Status Unit No. —
Th1 Outdoor air thermistor
Th2 Heat exchanger thermistor
Th3 Discharge pipe thermistor
Th4 —
Th5 —
Th6 —
Forced Fan ON Unit No. —
Switch Main Sub controller — —
Filter Indicator — —
Test Filter Auto Clean — —
Brush / Filter Ind — —
Disable Filter Auto Clean No, Yes —
6.1.2 Maintenance Menu

Maintenance Menu Item 2 Remarks
Model Name Unit No. Select the unit number you want to check.
Indoor unit The model names are displayed.
Outdoor unit (A model code may be displayed instead,
depending on the particular model.)
R-32 mark display BRC1E63 only
Operation Hours Unit No. Select the unit number you want to check.
Indoor unit operation hours All of these are displayed in hours.
Indoor fan operation hours
Indoor unit energized hours
Outdoor unit operation
hours
Outdoor fan 1 operation
hours
Outdoor fan 2 operation
hours
Outdoor compressor 1
operation hours
Outdoor compressor 2
operation hours
Indoor Unit Status Unit No. Select the unit number you want to check.
FAN Fan tap
Speed Fan speed (rpm)
FLAP Airflow direction
EV Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pulse)
MP Drain pump ON/OFF
EH Electric heater ON/OFF
Hu Humidifier ON/OFF
TBF Anti-freezing control ON/OFF
FLOAT FLOAT SWITCH ON/OFF
T1/T2 T1/T2 input from outside ON/OFF
Th1 Suction air thermistor ∗1
Th2 Indoor liquid pipe thermistor
Th3 Indoor gas pipe thermistor
Th4 Discharge air thermistor ∗2
Th5 Infrared floor sensor ∗3
Th6 Control temperature ∗4
Outdoor Unit Status Unit No. Select the Unit No. you want to check.
FAN step Fan tap
COMP Compressor power supply frequency (Hz)
EV1 Degree that electronic expansion valve is open (pulse)
SV1 Solenoid valve ON/OFF
Pe Low pressure (MPa), BRC1E63 only
Pc High pressure (MPa), BRC1E63 only
Th1 —
Th2 —
Th3 —
Th4 —
Th5 —
Th6 —
Error Display Display error ON Displays the error on the screen.
Display error OFF Displays neither errors nor warnings.
Display warning ON Displays a warning on the screen if an error occurs.
Display warning OFF No warning is displayed.
Swap Unit No. Current Unit No. A unit No. can be transferred to another.
Transfer Unit No.
SiMT341715E Service Settings Menu, Maintenance Menu
Maintenance Menu Item 2 Remarks

Addressed Sensor Value Unit No.: 0 - 15 Select the unit number you want to check.
Code
00: Remote controller thermistor (°C)
01: Suction air thermistor (°C) ∗5
02: Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (°C)
03: Heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (°C)
04: Indoor unit address No.
05: Outdoor unit address No.
06: BS unit address No.
07: Zone control address No.
08: Cooling/Heating batch address No.
09: Demand/low-noise address No.
22: Displays human presence detection rate (%) (see ∗7) in
Area 1 (see ∗6). Display value × 10%. Displays "15" for
units with no sensing type mounted.
26: Infrared sensor (°C) (See ∗8). Displays "–" for units with
no sensing type mounted.
Data The corresponding data will be displayed, based on the
Unit No. and Code selected.
∗1: Displays suction air temperature after correction for all models.
∗2: Displays temperature only for applicable models.
∗3: Displays floor temperature used for control (including correction) when the round flow with sensing is
connected.
∗4: Displays control temperature (temperature near the person when the round flow with sensing is
connected).
∗5: Displays suction air temperature after correction when the round flow with sensing is connected (VRV ).
∗6: Areas mean four areas shown on the below.
∗7: For human presence detection rate (%), human motion is recognized by digital output ranging from 0 to 5 V.
(5 V is output when no human presence is detected, and 0 V is output when human presence is detected.)
4
1 3
2
Detection areas of presence sensor
(Corresponding to the punched mark
80 cm above the floor on the inner frame of the panel:
~)
Reference
(1) 0% detection rate: Human presence is not detected at all.
(2) 25% detection rate: Human presence is detected, but the sensor does not recognize human presence.
(3) 50% detection rate: The sensor recognizes human presence (small human motion).
(4) 75% detection rate: The sensor recognized human presence (large human motion).
(5) 100% detection rate: The sensor constantly outputs 0 V. Continuing this condition will display an error.
∗8: Directly displays a measured value sent from the adaptor PCB.
Mode number
UP button
DOWN button
RESERVE button
MODE button
1. Press INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds during normal mode to enter field setting mode.
2. Press INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds to enter service mode.
3. Press MODE buttons to select a desired mode number. (43, 44, 45)
4. Carry out the necessary setting for each mode with UP button or DOWN button.
5. Press RESERVE button to confirm the setting.
6. Press INSPECTION/TEST button to return to normal mode.
Mode No. Function Content and Operation Method Example of Remote Controller Display
43 Forced Fan ON Turns the fan ON for each unit
individually.
44 Individual Setting Sets fan speed and airflow direction for

each unit individually when using group
control.
Settings are made using the airflow
direction adjustment and fan speed
adjustment buttons.
45 Unit No. Change Changes unit No.

Set the unit No. after changing with the
programming time up-down button.
SiMT341715E
Part 4
Functions and Control
1. Operation Flowchart..............................................................................80
2. Stop Control ..........................................................................................81
2.1 Abnormal Shutdown ...............................................................................81
2.2 Slave Unit Stops during Master Unit Operation......................................81
3. Standby Control ....................................................................................82
3.1 Restart Standby......................................................................................82
4. Startup Control ......................................................................................83
4.1 Cooling Startup Control ..........................................................................83
5. Normal Operation..................................................................................84
5.1 List of Functions in Normal Operation ....................................................84
5.2 Compressor Control ...............................................................................84
5.3 Compressor Capacity Control ................................................................85
5.4 Operating Priority and Rotation of Compressors....................................86
5.5 Compressor Step Control.......................................................................87
5.6 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .......................................................87
5.7 Step Control of Outdoor Fans ................................................................87
6. Protection Control .................................................................................88
6.1 High Pressure Protection Control...........................................................88
6.2 Low Pressure Protection Control............................................................88
6.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control .........................................................89
6.4 Compressor Body Protection Control.....................................................89
6.5 Inverter Protection Control .....................................................................90
7. Special Control......................................................................................92
7.1 Outdoor Unit Rotation.............................................................................92
7.2 Oil Return Operation ..............................................................................93
7.3 Inverter Pre-Heat Operation ...................................................................94
8. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) .............................................................95
8.1 Set Temperature and Control Target Temperature................................95
8.2 Thermostat Control.................................................................................95
8.3 Automatic Airflow Rate Control ..............................................................97
8.4 Airflow Direction Control.........................................................................98
8.5 Auto Draft Reducing Control (FXFSQ only) ...........................................99
8.6 Eco Full Automatic Control (FXFSQ only)..............................................99
8.7 Drain Pump Control..............................................................................100
8.8 Freeze-up Prevention Control ..............................................................102
8.9 Dew Condensation Prevention Control ................................................103
8.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Control .....................................................104
8.11 Circulation Airflow (FXFSQ, FXFQ only) ..............................................105
Functions and Control 79

Operation Flowchart SiMT341715E
1. Operation Flowchart
For detailed description of each function in the flow, refer to the details on related function on the following
pages.
Stop control
(1) Abnormal shutdown
(2) Slave unit stops during master unit operation
Special control
Standby control
(1) Restart standby
Thermostat ON
Thermostat OFF
Thermostat
(1) Outdoor unit rotation
Startup control ON
(including pressure equalization before startup)
(1) Cooling startup control
Thermostat OFF
Abnormality
End of
startup
control
Normal operation
(1) List of functions in normal operation
(2) Compressor capacity control
(3) Operating priority and rotation of
compressors
(4) Compressor step control Conditions met for oil return
(5) Electronic expansion valve control (2) Oil return operation (note 1)
(6) Step control of outdoor fans
Protection control
(1) High pressure protection control
(2) Low pressure protection control
(3) Discharge pipe protection control (3) Inverter pre-heat operation
(4) Compressor body protection control
(5) Inverter protection control
Note: 1. In the event indoor unit stops or the thermostat turns OFF while in oil return operation, pump
down residual operation is performed on completion of the oil return operation.
80 Functions and Control

SiMT341715E Stop Control
2. Stop Control
2.1 Abnormal Shutdown
If abnormal situation occurs to protect the compressor, initial thermostat OFF stops the outdoor unit.
Outdoor control will perform a retry start.
When the retry attempts reach a certain number, system will stop and error code is displayed on the
remote control.
BRC1E series remote controller stores the last 10 error codes for remote controller and the last 5 error
codes for indoor unit. You can check the Error History in Service Settings.
Consult the troubleshooting chart on the displayed error code to define cause of abnormal stop.
2.2 Slave Unit Stops during Master Unit Operation

When slave unit is stopped (because of low demand), conditions for this units are set same as system stop.
System stop till this unit is required to operate (increase of load).

Standby Control SiMT341715E
3. Standby Control
3.1 Restart Standby
Used to forcedly stop the compressor for a period of 5 minutes, in order to prevent the frequent ON/OFF of
the compressor and equalize the pressure within the refrigerant system.
In addition, the outdoor fan carry out the residual operation for a while to accelerate pressure equalizing and
to suppress melting of the refrigerant to the evaporator.

SiMT341715E Startup Control
4. Startup Control
Before starting the compressor:
The capacitor is charged in the DC circuit of the inverter circuit, and
“Pre-pressure equalization” is performed to reducing the starting current of the compressor.
Pc : High pressure sensor detection value
Pe : Low pressure sensor detection value
Ta : Outdoor air temperature
Te : Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature
ON 120 seconds
Thermostat
signal OFF
Approx. 550 V
DC circuit
0V
capacitors Step 4
Fan motor(s) OFF
M1F: RXQ6-12A
M1F + M2F: RXQ14-20A
ON
Solenoid Valve
Oil return OFF
4.1 Cooling Startup Control

Frequency step up
5 sec. interval
Inverter compressor 1 0 Hz
(M1C)
Inverter compressor 2 0 Hz
(M2C)
∗ RXQ16-20A only 3,000 pulse (fully open)
Electronic expansion 0 pulse

valve (Main)
(Y1E)
Electronic expansion 0 pulse

valve (Injection)
(Y2E) Ta < 20˚C: OFF +1step/15 sec. (Pc > 2.16 MPa)
Step4 Ta ≥ 20˚C: Step4 –1step/15 sec. (Pc < 1.77 MPa)
Inverter fan
M1F: RXQ6-12A
M1F + M2F: RXQ14-20A
Pc – Pe > 0.21 MPa

& Te < 10˚C
Te < Th2(∗) – 10
∗ Th2 in "Pre-pressure
equalization"

Normal Operation SiMT341715E
5. Normal Operation
5.1 List of Functions in Normal Operation
Pc : High pressure sensor detection value
Pe : Low pressure sensor detection value
Part Name Electric RXQ6-12A RXQ14A RXQ16-20A Function of Functional Part
Symbol
Inverter compressor 1 M1C z z z
PI control by Te target.
Inverter compressor 2 M2C — — z
Inverter fan 1 M1F z z z Fan speed 10 steps to keep
Inverter fan 2 M2F — z z minimum Tc target 34°C.
Electronic expansion valve 0 pulse: Closed (Thermostat OFF)
(Main) Y1E z z z 3,000 pulse: Open (Thermostat ON)
Electronic expansion valve Y2E z z z 0-480 pulse at compressor on
(Injection)
(Refrigerant auto charge) Y4E z z z 480 pulse
Solenoid valve (Oil return 1) Y3S z z z Only close if Pc – Pe < 0.3 MPa
Solenoid valve (Oil return 2) Y4S — — z (when compressor off)
z: equipped
—: not equipped
5.2 Compressor Control

In order to provide a steady capacity, the compressor capacity is controlled to achieve temperature Te during
cooling operation.
During cooling operation
The compressor capacity is controlled so Te approaches TeS (target value of temperature).
1. VRTsmart Control
When all the connected indoor units are VRTsmart control applicable models
∗ Applicable models: FXFSQ, FXFQ, FXDQ, FXSQ, FXMQ
The required capacity is calculated based on the operation condition of each individual indoor unit and this
data is transmitted to the outdoor unit. The outdoor unit adjusts the refrigerant temperature of the whole
system to an adequate value according to the indoor unit that needs the most capacity.
In case of target evaporation temperature adjustment, first the capacity is adjusted by changing the indoor
unit airflow to L tap. If the capacity is still too much, the target evaporation temperature is elevated further
to adjust.
2. VRT Control
When one or more of the connected indoor units are not VRTsmart control applicable models
If the required capacity becomes low in all indoor units (Room temperature Th1 - set temperature), the
target evaporation temperature is elevated further to adjust. In the outdoor unit, the difference of
temperature (∆T) in all indoor units is checked and the set temperature is changed. Unlike VRTsmart
control, there is no airflow control of the indoor units.
3. Te fix Control
The target evaporation temperature is not changed.
Te value (Set in mode 2-8)
Standard High
(Factory setting)
6 7 8 9 10 11
Te: Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature (°C)
TeS: Te target value (varies according to Te setting, compressor operation frequency, etc.)

SiMT341715E Normal Operation
5.3 Compressor Capacity Control

Capacity steps
The compressor rotation speed is changed according to the control pressure.
Cooling: suction pressure sensor value is converted into evaporation saturated temperature (relation
between pressure and evaporating temperature based on characteristics of refrigerant R-410A). For
detailed explanation refer to chapter field settings (Description field settings (mode 2: m2) on outdoor unit
main PCB on page 142 and installation manual outdoor chapter Energy saving and optimum operation).
Initial selection is made between Automatic, Fixed or High sensible.
During operation, the outdoor target evaporating temperature can be changed based on the selected
sub function, taking indoor load into account.
The initial target saturated temperature can be changed. For details refer to Description field settings
(mode 2: m2) on outdoor unit main PCB on page 142: for Cooling: Te set based on field setting 2-8.
During operation, outdoor control will take into account the pressure drop so that at indoor units, the pre-
set target temperature is reached (average). The estimated pressure drop is calculated based on:
Pressure drop characteristics found during test-operation outdoor (step 7). At several evaporating
temperature, outdoor control stores difference between outdoor evaporating temperature and average
of indoor heat exchanger (indoor evaporating temperature).
To have judgement of gas speed in main suction pipe, control takes the capacity step of the outdoor
unit into account. In function of pressure drop characteristics at the different compressor capacity
steps, control concludes the category of system pipe lay out (long, medium, short).
Target Te outdoor (cooling) = Te set – estimated pressure drop – A.
Correction factor A depends on the absolute value of the difference between indoor air inlet temperature
and a set temperature after startup period.

Normal Operation SiMT341715E
5.4 Operating Priority and Rotation of Compressors

Each compressor operates in the following order of priority.
In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, each compressor operates in any of Pattern 1 through Pattern 3
according to the rotation of outdoor units.
M1C: Inverter compressor 1

M2C: Inverter compressor 2
Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3
Single Outdoor Unit

VRV A SERIES: RXQ6-14A VRV A SERIES: RXQ16-20A
No. 1 No. 1 No. 2
M1C M1C M2C
Double Outdoor Units

VRV A SERIES: RXQ18-26AM VRV A SERIES: RXQ28-32AM VRV A SERIES: RXQ34-40AM
No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 1 No. 3 No. 2 No. 4

No. 2 No. 1 No. 2 No. 1 No. 3 No. 2 No. 4 No. 1 No. 3
M1C M1C M1C M1C M2C M1C M2C M1C M2C
Triple Outdoor Units
VRV A SERIES: RXQ42-46AM VRV A SERIES: RXQ48-50AM VRV A SERIES: RXQ52-60AM
No. 1 No. 2 No. 3 No. 4 No. 1 No. 2 No. 4 No. 3 No. 5 No. 1 No. 4 No. 2 No. 5 No. 3 No. 6
M1C M1C M1C M2C M1C M1C M2C M1C M2C M1C M2C M1C M2C M1C M2C
Notes: 1. In the case of combination of 3 outdoor units, the above diagram shows master unit, slave
unit 1, and slave unit 2 from left to right.
2. Compressors may operate in any pattern other than those mentioned above according to the
operating status.

SiMT341715E Normal Operation
5.5 Compressor Step Control

The actual rotation speed per second of the compressor (rps) depends on the type of compressor:
VRV A SERIES
Model name
Actual rotation
Compressor speed RXQ-A
(rps) 6/8 10/12/14 16/18 20
JT1GUVDYR frequency/2 M1C – M1C, M2C M1C
JT16KCVDYR frequency/3 – M1C – M2C
The change of compressor capacity step corresponds to 1 rps / step.
The control can skip an number of steps to reach faster the target saturation temperature.
5.6 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

Electronic expansion valve Y1E
Cooling: electronic expansion valve is used only at fully closed or fully open condition:
Compressor(s) OFF: fully closed (0 pulses).
Compressor ON:
Fully open (3,000 pulses): if level difference outdoor above indoor units within 50 m (field setting 2-
49-0).
Limited open: if level difference outdoor maximum 90 m above indoor units (field setting 2-49-1).
Inverter
compressor
0 Hz
Main 3,000
Y1E pulses
0
5.7 Step Control of Outdoor Fans

Used to control the revolutions of outdoor fans in the steps listed in table below, according to condition
changes.
VRV A SERIES
Fan revolutions (rpm)
STEP RXQ14A RXQ16A RXQ18A RXQ20A
No. RXQ6A RXQ8/10A RXQ12A
M1F M2F M1F M2F M1F M2F M1F M2F
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 350 350 350 380 0 380 0 380 0 380 0
2 360 370 370 470 0 470 0 470 0 470 0
3 370 400 400 570 0 570 0 570 0 570 0
4 400 460 460 380 380 380 380 380 380 380 380
5 430 560 560 550 520 550 520 550 520 550 520
6 490 710 710 865 665 865 665 865 665 865 665
7Y 520 750 775 940 910 940 910 940 910 940 910
7X 550 796 870 1,055 1,025 1,055 1,025 1,055 1,025 1,136 1,106
8 565 835 890 1,097 1,067 1,097 1,067 1,097 1,067 1,360 1,180
Note: 1. Figures listed above are all those controlled while in standard mode, which vary when the
system is set to high static pressure or capacity priority mode.

Protection Control SiMT341715E
6. Protection Control
6.1 High Pressure Protection Control
This high pressure protection control is used to prevent the activation of protection devices due to abnormal
increase of high pressure and to protect compressors against the transient increase of high pressure.
Cooling
The following control is performed in the entire system.
Normal operation
Pc: High pressure sensor detection
Pc > 3.55 MPa Pc < 3.04 MPa value for each outdoor unit.
Reduce compressor capacity step
Pc > 3.72 MPa

When occurring 3 times within 40
minutes, high pressure switch is
High pressure standby activated without high pressure standby,
thus outputting the error code E3.
6.2 Low Pressure Protection Control

This low pressure protection control is used to protect compressors against the transient decrease of low
pressure.
Cooling
Because of common low pressure, the following control is performed in the system.
Normal operation
Pe < 0.35 MPa Pe > 0.40 MPa Pe: Low pressure sensor detection
value for master unit.
Pe < 0.07 MPa

Low pressure standby
minutes, the error code E4 is output.

SiMT341715E Protection Control
6.3 Discharge Pipe Protection Control

This discharge pipe protection control is used to protect the compressor internal temperature against an error
or transient increase of discharge pipe temperature.
The following control is performed for each compressor of single unit as well as multi units.
Inverter compressor
Normal operation
Discharge pipe Discharge pipe

temperature > 108˚C temperature < 95˚C
Discharge pipe temperature > 135˚C

Discharge pipe temperature standby minutes, the error code F3 is output.
(Sub code - 01, 02, 03)
6.4 Compressor Body Protection Control

This compressor body protection control is used to protect the compressor internal temperature against an
error or transient increase of compressor body temperature.
The following control is performed for each compressor of single unit as well as multi units.
Inverter compressor
Normal operation
Compressor body
temperature > 108˚C
Compressor body
temperature > 135˚C
Compressor body temperature standby minutes, the error code F3 is output.
(Sub code - 20, 21, 22)

Protection Control SiMT341715E
6.5 Inverter Protection Control

Inverter current protection control and radiation fin temperature control are performed to prevent tripping due
to an error, or transient inverter overcurrent, and fin temperature increase.
In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, each inverter compressor performs these controls in the following
sequence.
Inverter overcurrent protection control

Perform the following control of integrated as well as multi units for each inverter compressor.
Normal operation
A B
Reduce compressor capacity

Inverter current standby minutes, the error code L8 is
output.
RXQ6/8A RXQ10-14A RXQ16/18A RXQ20A

Condition
M1C M1C M1C M2C M1C M2C
A more than 17.0 A more than 27.5 A more than 17.0 A more than 17.0 A more than 17.0 A more than 27.5 A
B less than 17.0 A less than 27.5 A less than 17.0 A less than 17.0 A less than 17.0 A less than 27.5 A
C more than 17.6 A more than 27.5 A more than 17.6 A more than 17.6 A more than 17.6 A more than 27.5 A

SiMT341715E Protection Control
Radiation fin temperature control

Perform the following control of integrated as well as multi units for each inverter compressor.
Normal operation
A B
Reduce compressor capacity

Fin temperature standby minutes, the error code L4 is output.
Condition All inverter compressors

A more than 110 °C
B less than 107 °C
C more than 114 °C

Special Control SiMT341715E
7. Special Control
7.1 Outdoor Unit Rotation
In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, this outdoor unit rotation is used to prevent the compressor from
breaking down due to unbalanced oil level between outdoor units.
Details of outdoor unit rotation

In the case of multi-outdoor-unit system, each outdoor unit is given an operating priority for the control.
Outdoor unit rotation makes it possible to change the operating priority of outdoor units.
Thus, the system becomes free of compressors that stop over an extended period of time at the time of partial
loading, preventing unbalanced oil level.
Timing of outdoor unit rotation
• After oil return operation

• At the beginning of the startup control
OR • There are outdoor units that stop operation.
• Low pressure of all outdoor units in operation is less than 0.25 MPa.
Example) The following diagram shows outdoor unit rotation in combination of 3 outdoor units.
Startup
control Oil return
Normal operation operation Normal operation
Master Slave 1 Slave 2 Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Outdoor unit Priority Priority Priority Outdoor unit Priority Priority Priority
rotation 1 2 3 rotation 3 1 2
Cooling ·There are outdoor

units that stop
operation.
OR
·Low pressure of all
outdoor units in
operation < 0.25 MPa.
Normal operation Normal operation
Master Slave 1 Slave 2 Master Slave 1 Slave 2
Priority Priority Priority Outdoor unit Priority Priority Priority

2 3 1 rotation 1 2 3
Note: 1. “Master unit”, “slave unit 1” and “slave unit 2” in this section are the names for installation.
They are determined in installation work, and not changed thereafter. (These names are
different from “master unit” and “slave unit” for control.)
The outdoor unit connected the control wires (F1 and F2) for the indoor unit should be
designated as master unit.
Consequently, The LED display on the main PCB for “master unit”, “slave unit 1” and “slave
unit 2” do not change.

SiMT341715E Special Control
7.2 Oil Return Operation

In order to prevent the compressor from running out of oil, the oil return operation is conducted to recover oil
that has flowed out from the compressor to the system side.
Tc : High pressure equivalent saturation temperature
Ts: Suction pipe temperature detected by thermistor R3T
Starting conditions
Referring to the set conditions for the following items, start the oil return operation in cooling.
• Cumulative oil feed rate
• Timer setting (Make this setting so as to start the oil return operation when the initial cumulative operating
time reaches 2 hours after power supply is turned ON and then every 8 hours.)
Furthermore, the cumulative oil feed rate is computed from Tc, Te, and compressor loads.
Part Name Electric RXQ6-12A RXQ14A RXQ16-20A Function of Functional Part

Symbol
Inverter compressor 1 M1C z z z
Capacity step PI control
Inverter compressor 2 M2C — — z
Inverter fan 1 M1F z z z
TC control
Inverter fan 2 M2F — z z
Electronic expansion valve (Main) Y1E z z z 3,000 pulse
Electronic expansion valve Y2E z z z 0 pulse
(Injection)
(Refrigerant auto charge) Y4E z z z 480 pulse
Solenoid valve (Oil return 1) Y3S z z z

ON
Solenoid valve (Oil return 2) Y4S — — z
· A lapse of 3 minutes.
& · Ts1–Te < 3˚C
OR · A lapse of 6
Ending conditions minutes while
the frequency is
more than that
of oil return
operation.
Indoor unit actuator Cooling oil return operation

Thermostat ON unit Remote controller setting
Fan Stopping unit OFF
Thermostat OFF unit Remote controller setting
Thermostat ON unit Normal control
Electronic expansion valve Stopping unit 224 pulse

Normal control with forced thermostat
Thermostat OFF unit ON

Special Control SiMT341715E
7.3 Inverter Pre-Heat Operation

Inverter pre-heat function is performed by each compressor on its own.
HTdi : Value of inverter compressor discharge pipe temperature (Tdi) compensated with outdoor air
temperature
Ta : Outdoor air temperature
Teg : Low pressure equivalent saturation temperature (°C)
Tfin : Fin thermistor temperature
1) System is stopped (all compressors are stopped)

Power supply ON
Pre-heat OFF
· Elapsing time after · Elapsing time after

power supply ON < 6 hours power supply ON ≥ 6 hours
OR &
· Own compressor HTdi < Teg + 15 · Own compressor HTdi > Teg + 20
& · Ta ≤ 25˚C OR · Ta > 26˚C
Pre-heat ON
· Own Tfin ≥ 95˚C · Own Tfin ≤ 85˚C
Pre-heat OFF
2) System is operating (at least one compressor is operating)

Pre-heat OFF
· Compressor is stopped (∗) · Compressor is operating (∗)

& OR
· Own compressor HTdi < Teg + 15 · Each compressor HTdi > Teg + 20
Pre-heat ON
· Own Tfin ≥ 78˚C · Own Tfin ≤ 68˚C
Pre-heat OFF
∗ Represents the operating state of each compressor.

SiMT341715E Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)
8. Outline of Control (Indoor Unit)

8.1 Set Temperature and Control Target Temperature
The relationship between remote controller set temperature and control target temperature is described
below.
Temperature ˚C
Remote controller set temperature

Cooling
Control target temperature
Examples are given to illustrate a control target temperature that satisfies the remote controller set
temperature.
Regarding control target temperature

When using the infrared floor sensor, the temperature around people will be treated as the control target
temperature for operation.
What is the temperature around people?

The temperature around people refers to the temperature of the living space, obtained from the temperature
around the ceiling and the temperature underfoot. The temperature is calculated using the detected values of
the suction air thermistor and the infrared floor sensor.
It is difficult to use only suction air temperature control for underfoot air conditioning.
8.2 Thermostat Control

8.2.1 Without the Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor
The thermostat ON/OFF condition is determined by the difference between the remote controller set
temperature and the actual detected room temperature (∗1).
• Normal operation
· Cooling operation
∆T ≤ –1.0˚C
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
(Thermostat ON)
∆T ≥ +1.0˚C
• Dry operation
· When Tro < 24.5°C
Tr < Tro – 1.0˚C
Dry operation Thermostat OFF
Tr > Tro + 1.0˚C
· When Tro ≥ 24.5°C

Tr < Tro – 1.5˚C
Tr > Tro + 0.5˚C
∗1: Field setting of the thermistor for room temperature detection is described below.
1. Factory setting → Suction air thermistor in the indoor unit
2. When set to the remote → Suction air thermistor in the indoor unit
controller thermistor and remote controller thermistor
∗2: Description of symbols
∆T = Detected room temperature – Remote controller set temperature
Tro = Detected room temperature at the start of dry operation
Tr = Determined by the room temperature detected by the thermistor

Outline of Control (Indoor Unit) SiMT341715E
8.2.2 With the Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor

The thermostat ON/OFF condition is determined by the difference between the remote controller set
temperature and the detected temperature around people.
• Normal operation
· Cooling operation
∆T ≤ –1.0˚C
Normal operation
Thermostat OFF
(Thermostat ON)
∆T ≥ +1.0˚C
• Dry operation
· When Tro ≤ 24.5°C
Tr < Tro – 1.0˚C
Tr > Tro + 1.0˚C
· When Tro > 24.5°C
Tr < Tro – 1.5˚C
Tr > Tro + 0.5˚C
∗: Description of symbols
∆T = Detected room temperature – Remote controller set temperature
Tro = Detected room temperature at the start of dry operation
Tr = Determined by the room temperature detected by the thermistor
Control range of temperature around people

When the floor temperature is very low, operation using the temperature around people may cause the
suction air temperature to operate outside of use range.
To avoid the above condition, a limit based on the suction air temperature is set for the use range of the
temperature around people.
• Cooling operation
· When the floor temperature is lower than suction air thermistor detection temperature (R1T), R1T will be
treated as the control target temperature for operation.
· When the temperature around people is 15°C or lower, R1T will be treated as the control temperature for
operation.

8.3 Automatic Airflow Rate Control

The automatic airflow rate control (Five steps from H to L) is based on the difference between
control target temperature and set temperature.
When airflow rate is set Automatic airflow rate
The fan tap is determined
Thermostat ON Set by the difference between
control target temperature
Cooling and set temperature.
The fan keeps rotating at
Thermostat OFF Set (∗1) the speed as just before
the thermostat off (∗1)
Thermostat ON L L
Program dry
Thermostat OFF OFF OFF
Fan Set M
Stop OFF OFF
∗1. LL airflow for FXFSQ and FXFQ
Fan tap <Change in airflow rate under

automatic airflow rate control>
Except for FXFSQ and

FXFQ, HM and ML taps
appear only during the
H auto airflow rate control
HM operation.
M (For FXFSQ and FXFQ,
HM and ML taps can be
ML
L manually set with
remote controller.)
Small ← Difference between control target → Large

temperature and set temperature

8.4 Airflow Direction Control

8.4.1 Without Optional Infrared Floor Sensor
Refer to the table below for controlling the horizontal flap (or the vertical flap) for airflow direction adjustment.
FXFQ, FXZQ, FXUQ, FXCQ, FXEQ, FXKQ, FXHQ, FXAQ
Thermostat ON Set
Direction set
Thermostat OFF Set
Cooling
Thermostat ON Swing
Swing set
Thermostat OFF Swing
Thermostat ON Set
Direction set
Thermostat OFF Set
Program dry
Thermostat ON Swing
Swing set
Thermostat OFF Swing
Direction set Set
Fan
Swing set Swing
8.4.2 With Optional Infrared Floor Sensor

The model can control airflow direction automatically by the difference between suction air temperature and
floor temperature.
FXFSQ
When airflow direction is set Automatic airflow rate and

eco full automatic control
Thermostat ON Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Direction set
Thermostat OFF Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Cooling
Thermostat ON Swing —
Swing set
Thermostat OFF Swing —
Thermostat ON Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Direction set
Thermostat OFF Set Automatic (P0 or P1)
Program dry
Thermostat ON Swing —
Swing set
Thermostat OFF Swing —
Direction set Set Horizontal (P0)
Fan
Swing set Swing —
Operation in auto airflow direction control when cooling
The difference between suction air

and floor temperatures is large.
P0 (Horizontal) P1
The difference between suction air
and floor temperatures is small.
Indoor unit
P0
P1
P2
P4 P3
Flap position AIR

(Horizontal view)

8.5 Auto Draft Reducing Control (FXFSQ only)

In the case where both this control is activated and auto airflow direction control (eco full automatic control) is
set, when human presence is detected, the airflow direction is automatically set to horizontal (P0) to reduce
discomfort by direct airflow.
This control works for each airflow outlet individually.
Note: This function is inoperative for the airflow outlet where an individual airflow direction is set.
Absence continues for 5 mins

Airflow direction by auto airflow direction
P0 (horizontal)
Cooling: P0 or P1
When presence is detected
8.6 Eco Full Automatic Control (FXFSQ only)

This is a generic term for the setting where both fan speed and airflow direction are set to "Auto." For detailed
control contents, refer to Automatic airflow rate control and Airflow direction control.

8.7 Drain Pump Control

8.7.1 Normal Operation
OFF
Float switch
ON
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min.
The float switch is ON in normal operation.

When cooling operation starts (thermostat ON), the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
After the thermostat turns OFF, the drain pump continues to operate for another 5 minutes.
The aim of residual operation after thermostat OFF is to eliminate the dew that condenses on the indoor
heat exchanger during cooling operation.
8.7.2 If the Float Switch is OFF with the Thermostat ON in Cooling

Operation
∗1 ∗2 ∗3
OFF
Float switch
ON
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec. 5 min. 5 sec.

When the float switch turns OFF, the thermostat turns OFF simultaneously.
After the thermostat turns OFF, the drain pump continues to operate for another 5 minutes.
∗1: If the float switch turns ON again during the residual operation of the drain pump, cooling operation also
turns on again (thermostat ON).
∗2: If the float switch remains OFF even after the residual operation of the drain pump has ended, the error
code A3 is displayed on the remote controller.
The drain pump turns OFF once residual operation has ended, then turns ON again after 5 seconds.
∗3: After A3 is displayed and the unit comes to an abnormal stop, the thermostat will remain OFF even if the
float switch turns ON again.

8.7.3 If the Float Switch is OFF with the Thermostat OFF in Cooling
Operation
OFF
Float switch
ON
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 sec.
When the float switch turns OFF, the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
If the float switch remains OFF even after residual operation of the drain pump has ended, the error code
A3 is displayed on the remote controller.
The drain pump turns OFF once residual operation has ended, then turns ON again after 5 seconds.
8.7.4 If the Float Switch Turns OFF and ON Continuously, or the Float
Switch Turns OFF While AF Displayed
∗1 ∗2 ∗3
} }
OFF
Float switch
ON
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th
Thermostat ON
(running)
OFF
AF A3
ON
Error display
OFF
ON
Drain pump
OFF
5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 min. 5 sec.
When the float switch turns OFF, the drain pump turns ON simultaneously.
∗1: If the float switch continues to turn OFF and ON 5 times consecutively, it is judged as a drain system error
and the error code AF is displayed on the remote controller.
∗2: The drain pump continues to turn ON/OFF in accordance with the float switch ON/OFF even after AF is
displayed on the remote controller.
∗3: While the error code AF is displayed, if the float switch remains OFF even after the residual operation of
the drain pump has ended, the error code A3 will be displayed on the remote controller.

8.8 Freeze-up Prevention Control

Freeze-up Prevention by Off Cycle (Indoor Unit Individual Control)
When the temperature detected by liquid pipe temperature thermistor of the indoor heat exchanger drops too
low, the unit enters freeze-up prevention control in accordance with the following conditions, and is also set in
accordance with the conditions given below. (Thermostat OFF)
When freeze-up prevention is activated, the airflow rate is fixed to L tap. When the following conditions for
cancelling are satisfied, it will reset.
Conditions for starting:

Liquid pipe temperature ≤ – 1°C (for total of 40 minutes)
or
Liquid pipe temperature ≤ – 5°C (for total of 10 minutes)
Condition for cancelling:

Liquid pipe temperature ≥ +7°C (for 10 minutes continuously)
Liquid pipe 10 min.

temperature
+7ºC
0ºC
–5ºC
Freeze-up prevention control
Forced OFF by thermostat Normal operation
10 min.
Start Cancel
The idea of freeze-up prevention control

Difficult to carry out freeze-up prevention operation
· For comfort, suppression of frequent thermostat ON/OFF is necessary.
· Suppressing the switching frequency of the compressor is required to ensure reliability.
After freeze-up prevention operation is carried out, the compressor can be defrosted properly.
· Water leakage prevention must be effective.
When the indoor unit is a round flow or multi flow type, if the air outlet is set as dual-directional or tri-
Note: directional, the starting conditions will be changed as follows.
Liquid pipe temperature ≤ 1°C (for total of 15 minutes)
or
Liquid pipe temperature ≤ 0°C (for 1 minute continuously)
During freeze-up prevention operation, the airflow rate is fixed to LL.
(The cancelling conditions are same as the standard.)

8.9 Dew Condensation Prevention Control

8.9.1 FXHQ, FXAQ, FXUQ Models
In cooling and dry operation, the following control is carried out in order to prevent dew condensation when
the horizontal blade blows air downward.
Note:
For FXHQ, this control is carried out when the field setting 13(23)-4 is set to 03.
Starting condition
• Horizontal blade is set to downward flow (Position A)
&
• Cooling operation (compressor operation) continues for B minutes.
Dew condensation prevention control

Dry operation with horizontal airflow (Position C) is carried out for 1 hour.
FXHQ, FXUQ FXAQ

Position A P3 or P4 P4
B (minutes) 30 20
Position C P2 P3
Note:
When there is any change to fan operation, airflow direction and operation ON/OFF state during dew
condensation prevention control, this control is canceled.
8.9.2 FXFSQ, FXFQ, FXCQ, FXKQ Models

Indoor operation under a certain condition will limit the swing range of the flaps.
Position P0 continues
Dew condensation for 30 minutes.
Dew condensation
prevention control OFF prevention control in action
Thermostat OFF
Refer to the table below for flap action under this control.
Dew condensation prevention control
Indoor unit Flap setting OFF In action
P0 P0 P1
P0
P1 P1 P1
P1
P2 P2 P2 P2
P4 P3
P3 P3 P3
Flap position AIR
(Observed horizontally) P4 P4 P4
Swing P0 – P4 P1 – P4

8.10 Electronic Expansion Valve Control

Electronic expansion valves in indoor units have the functions of conducting superheated degree control in
cooling operation. However, if the indoor units receive any control command such as a protection control
command or a special control command from the outdoor unit, the units will give a priority to the control
command.
• Superheated degree control in cooling operation

This function is used to adjust the opening of the electronic expansion valve so that superheated degree
(SH), which is calculated from the detection temperature (Tg) of the gas pipe thermistor (R3T) and the
detection temperature (Tl) of the liquid temperature thermistor (R2T) of the indoor unit, will come close to a
target superheated degree (SHS).
At that time, correction to the superheated degree is made according to the differences (∆T) between set
temperature and suction air temperature.
SH = Tg – Tl SH: Evaporator outlet superheated degree (°C)

Tg: Indoor unit gas pipe temperature (R3T)
Tl: Indoor unit liquid pipe temperature (R2T)
SHS (Target superheated degree)
• Normally 5°C.
• As ∆T (Remote controller set temp. – Suction air temp.) becomes larger, SHS becomes lower.
• As ∆T (Remote controller set temp. – Suction air temp.) becomes lower, SHS becomes larger.

8.11 Circulation Airflow (FXFSQ, FXFQ only)

Unevenness of room temperature and the start-up time are improved by repeating 2-direction horizontal blow-
off and swing alternately.
8.11.1 Initiation Conditions of Circulation Operation

When operation starts (in the start-up state)
Circulation airflow operation is performed.
During normal operation

The unit automatically determines operation based on the room temperature condition and time to switch
circulation airflow operation and the normal auto airflow rate and direction (eco full automatic control).
Circulation airflow operation continues for up to 90 minutes
Circulation airflow Auto airflow rate and direction Circulation airflow

Room temp.
Set temp.
Target temp. ∆t
Time
8.11.2 Operational Concept (Standard Panel)

Cooling
Movement Pattern Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4
Appearance 01 120 600 120 600

Time 02 120 600 0 0
(sec.)
03 0 0 120 600
13 (23)-14 04 120 600 120 600
: Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (the flap is inverted).
8.11.3 Operational Concept (Designer Panel)

Cooling
Appearance 01 120 600 120 600

Time 02 120 600 0 0
(sec.)
03 0 0 120 600
13 (23)-14 04 120 600 120 600
: Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (the flap is inverted).

SiMT341715E
Part 5
Field Settings and
Test Operation
1. Field Settings for Indoor Unit...............................................................107
1.1 Field Settings from Remote Controller .................................................107
1.2 List of Field Settings for Indoor Unit .....................................................112
1.3 Details of Field Settings for Indoor Unit................................................114
1.4 List of Field Settings for Outdoor-air Processing Unit ..........................125
1.5 Operation Control Mode .......................................................................126
2. Field Settings for Outdoor Unit............................................................128
2.1 Function Setting ...................................................................................128
2.2 Settings by DIP Switches .....................................................................129
2.3 Settings by BS Buttons.........................................................................131
2.4 Normal Mode........................................................................................133
2.5 Monitor Mode (Mode 1) ........................................................................134
2.6 Setting Mode (Mode 2).........................................................................138
2.7 Eco Mode Setting .................................................................................149
2.8 Setting of Night-Time Low Noise Operation and
Demand Operation ...............................................................................150
3. Test Operation ....................................................................................154
3.1 Checks before Test Operation .............................................................154
3.2 Checkpoints..........................................................................................154
3.3 Test Operation Procedure ....................................................................155
3.4 Turn Power ON ....................................................................................156
106 Field Settings and Test Operation

SiMT341715E Field Settings for Indoor Unit
1. Field Settings for Indoor Unit

1.1 Field Settings from Remote Controller
Individual function of indoor unit can be changed from the remote controller. At the time of installation or after
service inspection / repair, make the field setting in accordance with the following description.
Wrong setting may cause error.
(When optional accessory is mounted on the indoor unit, setting for the indoor unit may be required to
change. Refer to information in the option handbook.)
1.1.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63
Basic screen
(1) 1 Press and hold Cancel button for 4

seconds or more.
Service settings menu is displayed.
2 Select Field settings in the service

settings menu, and press Menu/Enter
button.
Field settings screen is displayed.
3 Highlight the mode, and select desired

mode No. by using (Up/Down)
button.
Service settings menu screen
4 In the case of setting per indoor unit
(2) during group control (When Mode No.
such as 20, 21, 22, 23, 25 are
selected), highlight the unit No. and
select indoor unit No. to be set by
using (Up/Down) button. (In the
case of group total setting, this
operation is not needed.)
In the case of individual setting per
indoor unit, current settings are
displayed. And, second code No.
“ - ” means no function.
Press Menu/Enter button.
5 Highlight second code No. of the first
Field settings screen code No. to be changed, and select
desired second code No. by using
In the case of individual In the case of group total (Up/Down) button. Multiple identical
setting per indoor unit setting
mode number settings are available.
(3) (3) In the case of group total setting, all
(4) (5) of second code No. which may be
(5) set are displayed as “ ∗ ”.
“ ∗ ” is changed to second code No.
to be set. And, second code No. “ - ”
means no function.
Second code No.
First code No.
Field Settings and Test Operation 107

Field Settings for Indoor Unit SiMT341715E
6 Press Menu/Enter button. Setting

Setting confirmation screen confirmation screen is displayed.
(6)
(7) 7 Select Yes and press Menu/Enter
button. Setting details are determined
and field settings screen returns.
8 In the case of multiple setting

changes, repeat “(3)” to “(7)”.
9 After all setting changes are

completed, press Cancel button twice.

10 Backlight goes out, and Connection
under check. Please wait for a
moment is displayed for initialization.
After the initialization, the basic screen
Setting confirmed
returns.
CAUTION
z When an optional accessory is installed on the indoor unit, settings of the indoor
unit may be changed. See the manual of the optional accessory.
z For field setting details of the outdoor unit, see installation manual attached to the
outdoor unit.

1.1.2 BRC4C, BRC7C, BRC7E Series
UP button
Mode No.
RESERVE button
First code No.
MODE button
Second code No.
INSPECTION/TEST
button
Setting
To set the field settings, you have to change:
Mode No.
First code No.
Second code No.
To change the field settings, proceed as follows:

1. Press the INSPECTION/TEST button for 4 seconds during normal mode to enter the field setting mode.
2. Press the MODE button to select the desired mode No.
3. Press the UP button to select the first code No.
4. Press the DOWN button to select the second code No.
5. Press the RESERVE button to confirm the setting.
6. Press the INSPECTION/TEST button to return to the normal mode.

1.1.3 BRC4M, BRC7M Series
Mode No.
First code Second

No. code No.
4
3
5
1,6
Setting
To set the field settings, you have to change:
Mode No.
First code No.
Second code No.
To change the field settings, proceed as follows:

1. Hold down the INSPECTION button for at least 4 seconds during normal mode to enter the field setting mode.
2. Press the MODE button to select the desired mode No.
3. Press the FAN or BACK LIGHT button to select the first code No.
4. Press the TEMP button to select the second code No.
5. Press the RESERVE button to set the present settings.
6. Press the INSPECTION button to return to the normal mode.

1.1.4 Simplified Remote Controller
Mode No.
First code
No.
Unit No.
Second
code No.
(3)
(3)
(2)(8) (7) (4) (5) (6)
1. Remove the upper part of remote controller.

2. When in the normal mode, press the BS6 button (2) (field setting) to enter the field setting mode.
3. Select the desired MODE No. with the BS2 button (3) (temperature setting V) and the BS3 button (3)
(temperature setting W).
4. During group control, when setting by each indoor unit (mode No. 20, 22, and 23 have been selected),
press the BS8 (4) button (unit No.) and select the indoor unit No. to be set. (This operation is unnecessary
when setting by group.)
5. Press the BS9 button (5) (set A) and select first code No.
6. Press the BS10 button (6) (set B) and select second code No.
7. Press the BS7 button (7) (set/cancel) once and the present settings are confirmed.
8. Press the BS6 button (8) (field setting) to return to the normal mode.

1.2 List of Field Settings for Indoor Unit

: Factory setting
Mode First Second Code No. Details
No. code Description
(∗2) No. 01 02 03 04 No.
Ultra Approx. Approx.
long life 10,000 5,000
filter hrs. hrs.
Approx. Approx.
0 Filter cleaning sign interval Long life Light
2,500
Heavy
1,250 — — (1)
filter hrs. hrs.
Standard Approx. Approx.
filter 200 hrs. 100 hrs.
1 Filter type Long life filter Ultra long life filter — — (2)
Remote
controller Only suction air Only remote
2 Remote controller thermistor thermistor+
thermistor
controller — (3)
suction air thermistor
10 (20) thermistor
3 Filter cleaning sign Displayed Not displayed — — (4)
Remote controller thermistor control during
6
group control
Not permitted Permitted — — (5)
7 Time for absence area detection (∗6) 30 minutes 60 minutes — — (6)
Continuous
(not
10 Dry operation time during Eco mode (∗7) 30 minutes 60 minutes 90 minutes returning to (7)
cooling)
Low airflow setting when thermostat OFF

11 during Eco mode Disabled Enabled — — (8)
Infrared
Standard presence
6 Setting the rate of human detection (∗6) High sensitivity Low sensitivity
sensitivity sensor (9)
disabled
Completion of Start of
11 (21) 7 Airflow adjustment OFF airflow airflow — (10)
adjustment adjustment
Priority given on Priority given
Compensating the temperature around people Suction air
8 (∗6) temperature only the suction air Standard on the floor (11)
temperature temperature
Optional accessories output selection (field Indoor unit Operation

0 selection of output for adaptor for wiring) turned ON by — output Error output (12)
thermostat
External
External ON/OFF input (Set when ON/OFF is
1
to be controlled from outside.)
Forced OFF ON/OFF control protection — (13)
device input
12 (22) Thermostat differential changeover
2
(Set when remote sensor is to be used.)
1°C 0.5°C — — (14)
5 Auto restart after power failure reset Not equipped Equipped — — (15)
6 Airflow setting when cooling thermostat is OFF LL tap Set fan speed — — (16)
11 Compensating the floor temperature (∗6) 4°C 2°C 0°C –2°C (17)

: Factory setting
Mode First Second Code No. Details
No. code Description
(∗2) No. 01 02 03 04 No.
0 Ceiling Height Setting, Setting of normal airflow Standard High ceiling (1) High ceiling (2) — (18)
Airflow direction setting W
1
(Set when a sealing material kit has been installed.)
F (4 directions) T (3 directions)
(2 directions)
— (19)
All direction
2 Swing pattern settings (∗6) synchronized — Facing swing — (20)
swing
3 Operation of downward flow flap Equipped Not equipped — — (21)
4 Airflow direction adjustment range Refer to page 122. (22)
13 (23) High static
5 Setting of static pressure selection Standard
pressure
— — (23)
6 External static pressure settings Refer to page 122. (24)

Setting of swing patterns when cooling
7
thermostat is OFF
Refer to page 123. (25)
13 Setting of circulation airflow Disabled Enabled — — (26)

14 Circulation airflow patterns Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 (27)
15 Switching panel type (∗8) Standard panel Designer panel — — (28)
Direct duct connection
2 (when the indoor unit and Heat Reclaim Not equipped Equipped — — (29)
Ventilator are connected by duct directly.) (∗5)
15 (25) 3 Drain pump and humidifier interlock selection Not interlocked Interlocked — — (30)
Selection for individual ventilation setting by
5 remote controller — (Normal) Individual — — (31)
3 Display of contact center Displayed Not displayed — — (32)

Four-digit
4 Display of error codes on the remote controller — Two-digit display — display (33)
No menu
1b No operation No operation operation is No menu
allowed (Cancel allowed (Cancel allowed operation is
12 Key-lock pattern settings procedure is procedure is not (Cancel allowed any (34)
displayed.) displayed.) procedure is time.
displayed.)
14 Setting restricted/permitted of airflow block Refer to page 125. (35)
1c 0 Room temperature display Not displayed Displayed — — (36)
Notes: 1. Settings are made simultaneously for the entire group, however, if you select the mode No.
inside parentheses, you can also set by each individual unit. Setting changes however
cannot be checked except in the individual mode for those in parentheses.
∗2. The mode numbers inside parentheses cannot be used by wireless remote controllers, so
they cannot be set individually. Setting changes also cannot be checked.
3. Do not make settings other than those described above. Nothing is displayed for functions
the indoor unit is not equipped with.
4. 88 may be displayed to indicate the remote controller is resetting when returning to the
normal mode.
∗5. If the setting mode to “Equipped”, heat reclaim ventilation fan conducts the fan residual
operation by linking to indoor unit.
∗6. Available for setting when option with the built-in human detection and floor temperature
detection functions is mounted.
∗7. Factory setting for round flow type is 04.
∗8. Available only for round flow with sensing type and round flow type.

1.3 Details of Field Settings for Indoor Unit

(1) (2) Filter Cleaning Sign Interval, Filter Type
When the setting 10(20)-3 is set to 01 (Displayed), filter cleaning sign is displayed on the remote controller
after a certain period of operation time. This setting is used to change the display interval of filter cleaning
sign when the filter contamination is heavy.
The filter cleaning sign interval is determined as follows depending on the combination of Mode No. 10(20)-0
and 10(20)-1.
Filter cleaning sign interval

10(20)-1 01 02
Setting Filter contamination heavy/light Light Heavy Light Heavy
10(20)-0 01 02 01 02
FXFSQ, FXFQ
FXZQ
FXUQ
FXCQ
FXKQ
2,500 hrs. 1,250 hrs. 10,000 hrs. 5,000 hrs.
Model FXSQ
FXMQ
FXHQ
FXLQ, FXNQ
FXVQ
FXAQ 200 hrs. 100 hrs. 200 hrs. 100 hrs.
(3) (5) (11) Selecting of Thermistor

Select a thermistor to control the room temperature.
When the unit is not equipped with an infrared floor sensor:
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Contents
01 Remote controller thermistor and suction air

thermistor in indoor unit
10 (20) 2
02 Suction air thermistor in indoor unit
03 Remote controller thermistor
36
34 In cooling
32
Set temperature (˚C)
Suction air Remote controller Suction air

30 thermistor thermistor thermistor
Suction air Remote controller Suction air
28 thermistor thermistor thermistor
26
24
22
20
17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37
Suction air temperature (˚C)

When the unit is equipped with an infrared floor sensor:
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No.
10 (20) 2 01 02 02 02 02 03
11 (21) 8 01 01 02 03 04 01
The thermistor to be used
Remote controller thermistor z — — — — z
Suction air thermistor z z z z z —
Infrared floor sensor — — z z z —
The infrared floor Priority given to Priority given to the

sensor is not used the suction air floor temperature (∗)
temperature (∗)
Only the remote
Only the suction air Standard setting controller thermistor
thermistor is used (Factory setting) is used
∗ Refer to "(11) Compensating the temperature around people."
Note that the control is automatically switched to the one performed only by the suction air thermistor for
indoor unit when the Second code No. is 01 during the group control.
To use the remote controller thermistor during the group control, select the Second code No. 02 in First code
No. 6.
01 Remote controller thermistor control is not permitted

during group control
10 (20) 6
02 Remote controller thermistor control is permitted
during group control
(4) Filter Cleaning Sign

Whether or not to display the sign after operation of certain duration can be selected.
01 Displayed
10 (20) 3
02 Not displayed
∗ "Filter Cleaning" is not displayed when an Auto-clean Panel is connected.

(6) Time for Absence Area Detection

(For units with an Infrared Presence Sensor only)
By selecting the energy-saving operation mode in the absence, the target temperature is shifted to the
energy-saving end by 1°C (maximum 2°C) after the state of absence continues for a certain period of time.
Absent time defined for detection can be selected as follows:
01 30 minutes
10 (20) 7
02 60 minutes
Human detection
Set temperature (˚C)

State of absence
31
30
29
28
27 Cooling (at 28˚C)
26
30 (60)∗ 60 (120)∗
Elapsed time of absence (min.)
∗ The values in parentheses represent the time
when Second code No. is 02.
• The set temperature displayed on the remote controller remains same even if the target temperature is
shifted.
• As soon as people is detected while the temperature is shifted, this control will be cancelled (reset).
(7) Switching Dry Operation Time when Eco Mode is Set

• If you switch the operation mode to "Dry" while the eco mode is enabled, the mode will automatically switch
to "Cooling" after a certain period of time is elapsed.
If you want to increase the duration of dry operation, change the Second code No. as indicated in the
following table.
Note 1) Increasing duration of dry operation degrades the energy efficiency.
01 30 minutes
02 60 minutes
10 (20) 10
03 90 minutes
04 Continuous (not returning to cooling)
Note 2) When group control is enabled, all indoor units in the same group have a same set value for duration
of dry operation.
Note 3) For FXFQ-A, the Second code No. is factory set to 04.
(8) Setting for Interlocking Cooling Thermostat OFF and Eco Airflow Volume
This setting changes the airflow volume to LL in coordination with the eco mode when cooling thermostat
OFF is set. Also, the airflow direction is changed to horizontal.
When disabled: 12 (22)-6 (the airflow volume setting when cooling thermostat OFF is enabled)
13 (23)-7 (the swing setting when cooling thermostat OFF is enabled) is as set
When enabled: LL when Te ≥ 7°C
01 Disabled
10 (20) 11
02 Enabled

(9) Setting the Rate of Human Detection

(For units with the infrared presence sensor only)
Set the sensitivity of the infrared presence sensor.
• The infrared presence sensor can be disabled by selecting the Second code No. 04.
(Note) When the infrared presence sensor is disabled, the remote controller menu does not display some
functions such as the automatic draft reduction, energy-saving operation in absence and halt in
absence.
01 High sensitivity
02 Low sensitivity
11 (21) 6
03 Standard sensitivity
04 Infrared presence sensor disabled
(10) Airflow Adjustment (AUTO) (FXMQ-PA only)

The volume of blow-off air is automatically adjusted to the rated quantity.
Make settings before performing the test operation of the outdoor unit.
Setting procedure
(1) Make sure that electric wiring and duct construction have been completed.
In particular, if the closing damper is installed on the way of the duct, make sure that it is open. In addition,
make sure that a field-supplied air filter is installed within the air passageway on the suction port side.
(2) If there are multiple blow-off and suction ports, adjust the throttle part so that the airflow volume ratio of
each suction/blow-off port conforms to the designed airflow volume ratio. In that case, operate the unit
with the operation mode "fan." When you want to change the airflow rate, adjust it by pressing the airflow
rate control button to select High, Middle or Low.
(3) Make settings to adjust the airflow rate automatically.
After setting the operation mode to "fan," enter the field setting mode while operation is stopped and then
select the Mode No. "(21) (11 for batch setting)," set the First Code No. to 7 and the Second Code No. to
03. After setting, return to the basic screen (to the normal mode in the case of a wireless remote
controller) and press the ON/OFF button. Fan operation for automatic airflow adjustment will start with the
operation lamp turned ON. Do not adjust the throttle part of the suction and blow-off ports during
automatic adjustment. After operation for approximately one to fifteen minutes, airflow adjustment
automatically stops with the operation lamp turned OFF.
(4) After operation stopped, make sure that the Second Code No. is set to 02 as in the following table by
indoor unit with the Mode No. of (21). If operation does not stop automatically or the Second Code No. is
not set to 02, return to the step (3) above to make settings again.
01 OFF
11 (21) 7 02 Completion of airflow adjustment
03 Start of airflow adjustment
Notes:
1. Make sure that the external static pressure is within the range of specifications before making settings. If it
is outside the range, automatic adjustment fails, which may cause an insufficient airflow volume or
leakage of water.
2. If the air passageway including duct or blow-off ports is changed after automatic adjustment, make sure to
perform automatic airflow adjustment again.

(11) Compensating the Temperature around People

(When the unit is equipped with an infrared floor sensor)
Change the ratio between the suction air temperature and floor temperature used to calculate the
temperature around people.
The temperature around people is calculated using the values of the suction air thermistor and the infrared
floor sensor. The factory setting is "Normal" (the average value of the suction air temperature and the floor
temperature is applied). However, the rate at which the suction air thermistor and the infrared floor sensor
affect the temperature around people can be changed with this setting.
• To reflect the effect of the temperature around the ceiling, select the "Priorities given on the suction air
temperature" (the Second code No. 02).
• To reflect the effect of the temperature around the floor, select the "Priorities given on the floor temperature"
(the Second code No. 04).
• The infrared floor sensor can be disabled by selecting "Suction air temperature only" (the Second code No.
01).
01 Suction air temperature only
02 Priority given on the suction air temperature
11 (21) 8
03 Standard
04 Priority given on the floor temperature
(12) Optional Accessories Output Selection

Using this setting, "operation output signal" and "abnormal output signal" can be provided. Output signal is
output between terminals X1 and X2 of "adaptor for wiring", an optional accessory.
01 Indoor unit thermostat ON/OFF signal is provided.
02 —
12 (22) 0 03 Output linked with ON/OFF of remote controller is
provided.
In case of Error Display appears on the remote
04 controller, output is provided.
(13) External ON/OFF Input

This input is used for "ON/OFF operation" and "Protection device input" from the outside. The input is
performed from the T1-T2 terminal of the operation terminal block in the electrical component box.
F2 T1 T2
Forced OFF
Input A

ON: Forced OFF (prohibition of using the remote
01 controller)
OFF: Permission of using the remote controller
OFF → ON: Operation
02 ON → OFF: Stop
12 (22) 1
ON: Operation
OFF: The system stops, then the applicable unit
03
indicates A0. The other indoor units indicate
U9.
(14) Thermostat Differential Changeover

Differential value during thermostat ON/OFF control can be changed.
01 1ºC
12 (22) 2
02 0.5ºC

(15) Auto Restart after Power Failure Reset

01 Not equipped
12 (22) 5
02 Equipped
For the air conditioners with no setting for the function, the units will be left in the stop condition when the
power supply is reset automatically after power failure reset or the main power supply is turned ON again
after once turned OFF. However, for the air conditioners with the setting (same as factory setting), the units
may start automatically after power failure reset or the main power supply turned ON again (return to the
same operation condition as that of before power failure).
For the above reasons, when the unit is set enabling to utilize “Auto restart function after power failure reset”,
utmost care should be paid for the occurrence of the following situation.
Caution The air conditioner starts operation suddenly after power failure reset or
when the main power supply is turned ON again. Consequently, the user
might be surprised and wonder why this has happened. In service work, for
example, turning off the main power switch while the unit is in operation,
and turning on the switch again after the work is completed start the unit
operation (the fan rotates).
(16) Airflow Setting when Cooling Thermostat is OFF

This is used to set airflow to "LL airflow" when cooling thermostat is OFF.
01 LL tap
12 (22) 6
02 Set fan speed
(17) Compensating the Floor Temperature (Cooling)

(For units with the infrared presence/floor sensor only)
Offset the detected value of the infrared floor sensor with a certain temperature. This setting should be used
to have the actual floor temperature detected when, for example, the unit is installed close to a wall.
01 4°C
02 2°C
12 (22) 11
03 0°C
04 –2°C
[Specific usage of this setting]

There is no problem with the standard setting in the usual condition. Change the setting in the cases indicated
in the following table.
Environment Operation Mode Problem Contents
- Installed against a wall/window
- High heat capacity of floor such as concrete Insufficient cooling –2°C
- Many heat sources including PC Cooling
- Floor heating or other heat source exist Excessive cooling 2°C or 4°C
Note:
This setting is available only in cooling operation.

(18) Ceiling Height Setting, Setting of Normal Airflow

Make the following setting according to the ceiling height. The second code No. is set to 01 at the factory.
FXFSQ25-80, FXFQ25-80
Mode First Second Ceiling Height

No. Code Code Setting
No. No. All round outlet 4-way Outlets 3-way Outlets 2-way Outlets
01 Standard Lower than 2.7 m Lower than 3.1 m Lower than 3.0 m Lower than 3.5 m
13
(23) 0 02 High Ceiling Lower than 3.0 m Lower than 3.4 m Lower than 3.3 m Lower than 3.8 m
03 Higher Ceiling Lower than 3.5 m Lower than 4.0 m Lower than 3.5 m —
FXFSQ100-140, FXFQ100-140
First Second Ceiling Height
Mode Code Code Setting
No. No. No. All round outlet 4-way Outlets 3-way Outlets 2-way Outlets
01 Standard Lower than 3.2 m Lower than 3.4 m Lower than 3.6 m Lower than 4.2 m
13 0 02 High Ceiling Lower than 3.6 m Lower than 3.9 m Lower than 4.0 m Lower than 4.2 m
(23)
03 Higher Ceiling Lower than 4.2 m Lower than 4.5 m Lower than 4.2 m —
Notes:
1. The Second Code No. is factory set to Standard/All-direction airflow. For High ceiling (1) or (2), initial
setting by remote controller is required.
2. A closing member kit (optional) is required for 4-, 3-, or 2-direction airflow.
FXFSQ, FXFQ with Designer panel

FXFSQ25-80 FXFSQ100-140
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Contents FXFQ25-80 FXFQ100-140
(All round outlet) (All round outlet)
01 Standard Lower than Lower than

2.4 m 3.2 m
Lower than Lower than
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (1) 2.7 m 3.6 m
03 High Ceiling (2) Lower than Lower than

3.2 m 4.2 m
FXZQ
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Contents Ceiling Height
01 Standard Lower than 2.7 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (1) Lower than 3.0 m
03 High Ceiling (2) Lower than 3.5 m
FXCQ20-80
0 01 Standard Lower than 2.7 m
5 01 Standard Lower than 2.7 m
0 02 High Ceiling (1) Lower than 3.0 m
13 (23)
FXKQ25-63
Ceiling Height
FXKQ25/32 FXKQ40/63
13 (23) 0 Lower than
02 High Ceiling — 4.3 m

FXHQ32/63
13 (23) 0
FXHQ100
13 (23) 0
FXAQ
01 Standard
13 (23) 0 02 Slightly higher
03 High
FXUQ
Ceiling Height
FXUQ71 FXUQ100
01 Standard 2.7 m 3.2 m
13 (23) 0 02 High Ceiling (1) Lower than Lower than
3.0 m 3.6 m
03 High Ceiling (2) 3.5 m 4.0 m
(19) Airflow Direction Setting

Set the airflow direction of indoor units as given in the table below. (Set when sealing material kit of air
discharge outlet has been installed.) The second code No. is factory set to 01.
01 F: 4-direction airflow
13 (23) 1 02 T: 3-direction airflow
03 W: 2-direction airflow
(20) Swing Pattern Settings

(In case of an infrared floor sensor is installed)
Set the flap operation in swing mode.
With the factory swing, flaps facing each other are synchronized to operate, and flaps placed side by side are
set to swing in an opposite direction to agitate airflow to reduce temperature irregularity.
Conventional swing operation (all direction synchronized swing) can be set onsite.
01 All direction synchronized swing
13 (23) 2 02 —
03 Facing swing
(21) Operation of Downward Flow Flap

Only the model FXKQ has the function.
When only the front-flow is used, sets yes/no of the swing flap operation of down-flow.
01 Equipped
13 (23) 3
02 Not equipped

(22) Airflow Direction Adjustment Range

Make the following airflow direction setting according to the respective purpose.
FXFSQ, FXFQ, FXZQ, FXCQ, FXKQ, FXAQ

01 Draft prevention (upward)
13 (23) 4 02 Standard
03 Ceiling soiling prevention (downward)
FXHQ, FXUQ
01 Draft prevention (upward)
13 (23) 4 02 Dew condensation prevention (upward)
03 Standard (downward)
Notes:
1. Some indoor unit models are not equipped with draft prevention (upward) function.
2. When the model FXFSQ or FXFQ is attached with a closing member kit, set the Second Code No. to 02 or
03.
(23) Setting of the Static Pressure Selection

FXCQ20-80
Refer to page 120.
FXDQ20-32PD
Model No. First Code No. Second Code No. Contents
01 Standard (10 Pa)
13 (23) 5
02 High static pressure (30 Pa)
FXDQ40-63ND
01 Standard (15 Pa)
13 (23) 5
02 High static pressure (44 Pa)
(24) External Static Pressure Settings

FXMQ
01 30 Pa (∗3) (∗4)
02 50 Pa
03 60 Pa
04 70 Pa
05 80 Pa
06 90 Pa
07 100 Pa
13 (23) 6 08 110 Pa (∗1)
09 120 Pa (∗1)
10 130 Pa (∗1)
11 140 Pa (∗1)
12 150 Pa (∗1) (∗4)
13 160 Pa (∗1) (∗4)
14 180 Pa (∗1) (∗2) (∗4)
15 200 Pa (∗1) (∗2) (∗4)
The Second code No. is set to 02 (50 Pa) for FXMQ20-32 and 07 (100 Pa) for FXMQ40-140 at factory setting.
∗1 FXMQ20/25/32 cannot be set to 110-200 Pa.
∗2 FXMQ40 cannot be set to 180 or 200 Pa.
∗3 FXMQ50/63/80/100/125 cannot be set to 30 Pa.
∗4 FXMQ140 cannot be set to 30 Pa and 150-200 Pa.

FXSQ
03 30 Pa (∗1)
04 40 Pa (∗1)
05 50 Pa
06 60 Pa
07 70 Pa
08 80 Pa
13 (23) 6 09 90 Pa
10 100 Pa
11 110 Pa
12 120 Pa
13 130 Pa
14 140 Pa
15 150 Pa (∗2)
∗1 FXSQ50/63/80/125/140 cannot be set to 30 or 40 Pa.
∗2 FXSQ140 cannot be set to 150 Pa.
(25) Setting of Swing Patterns when Cooling Thermostat is OFF

In cooling operation, when the airflow direction is set to swing, flaps usually swing even when the thermostat
is OFF. This setting allows to change the airflow direction when the thermostat is OFF.
Mode No. First Code No. Second Code No. Fixed Swing
01 Set Position Swing
02 Set Position P0
03 P0 P0
13 (23) 7 04 Set Position Swing
05 Set Position P2
06 P2 P2
07 Set Position Swing
(26) Setting of Circulation Airflow

This is to set whether the circulation airflow function is enabled or disabled.
01 Disabled
13 (23) 13
02 Enabled
(27) Circulation Airflow Patterns

This setting is to change the appearance pattern of the circulation airflow direction depending on the
installation environment of the indoor unit.
Cooling
01 120 600 120 600

Appearance Time
(sec.) 02 120 600 0 0
03 0 0 120 600
13 (23)-14
04 120 600 120 600
: Indicates the horizontal flap is in the position of reducing airflow volume (where the flap is reversed ).

(28) Switching Panel Type (FXFSQ-A and FXFQ-A only)

Change this setting depending on the type of the panel connected.
01 Standard panel
13 (23) 15
02 Designer panel
(29) Direct Duct Connection

This is used when "fresh air intake kit equipped with fan" is connected. The indoor fan carries out residual
operation for 1 minute after the thermostat is stopped. (For the purpose of preventing dust on the air filter from
falling off.)
01 Not equipped
15 (25) 2
02 Equipped
(30) Drain Pump and Humidifier Interlock Selection

This is used to interlock the humidifier with the drain pump. When water is drained out of the unit, this setting
is unnecessary.
01 Not interlocked
15 (25) 3
02 Interlocked
(31) Selection for Individual Ventilation Setting by Remote Controller

This is set to perform individual operation of heat reclaim ventilation using the remote controller/central unit
when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.
(Switch only when heat reclaim ventilation is built in.)
01 — (Normal)
15 (25) 5
02 Individual
(32) Display of Contact Center

(For BRC1E series only)
You can turn OFF the display of "DAIKIN Contact Center" as "Contact for Service Display."
01 Displayed
1b 3
02 Not displayed
(33) Display of Error Codes on the Remote Controller

Error code (four digits) is displayed for limited products.
Select two-digit display if four-digit display is not preferred.
01 —
02 Two-digit display
1b 4
03 —
04 Four-digit display

(34) Key-lock Pattern Settings

Setting of key-lock pattern for the remote controller
No operation allowed
01 (Cancel procedure is displayed.)
02 No operation allowed
1b 12 (Cancel procedure is not displayed.)
03 No menu operation is allowed.
04 No menu operation is allowed any time.
∗ When the Second code No. is set to 04, no menu operation is allowed without key-lock by pressing and
holding the menu button. Set the Second code No. to other than 04 to cancel it.
(35) Setting Restricted / Permitted of Airflow Block

(For Sensing flow type only)
Due to possibility of dew condensation, the airflow block function cannot be enabled when closure material
kit, fresh air intake kit, natural / separately installed evaporation humidifier, or branch air duct.
This setting will prevent the airflow block is advertently set to ON.
Ensure that this setting is "Disable airflow block" when using together with options listed above.
01 Airflow block permitted
02 —
1b 14 03 —
04 —
05 Airflow block restricted
(36) Room Temperature Display

A "Detailed display screen" can be selected as the display screen. This setting is used if you do not want to
display "Room temperature display" on the "Detailed display screen."
01 Not displayed
1c 0
02 Displayed
1.4 List of Field Settings for Outdoor-air Processing Unit

: Factory setting
Mode First Setting Second Code No.
Code
No. No. Contents 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15
Filter
0 contamination 2500 hr 1250 hr — — — — — — — — — — — — —
10 Display time
(20) to clean air Display No
3 — — — — — — — — — — — — —
filter display
calculation
External
1 ON/OFF Forced ON/OFF — — — — — — — — — — — — —
input OFF control
12
(22) Power
5 failure Not Equipped — — — — — — — — — — — — —
automatic equipped
reset
Discharge
14 pipe
(24) 3 temperature 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 25
(cooling) (°C) + + +
+: The same value continues.

1.5 Operation Control Mode

The operation control mode is compatible with a variety of controls and operations by limiting the functions of
the operation remote controller. Furthermore, operations such as remote controller ON/OFF can be limited in
accordance with the combination conditions. (Refer to information on the next page.)
Central remote controller is normally available for operations. (Except when centralized monitor is connected)
Contents of Control Modes

20 modes consisting of combinations of the following 5 operation modes with temperature and operation
mode setting by remote controller can be set and displayed by operation modes 0 through 19.
ON/OFF control impossible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by central remote controller only.
(Cannot be turned ON/OFF by remote controller.)
OFF control only possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON by central remote controller only, and OFF by remote controller only.
Centralized
Used when you want to turn ON by central remote controller only, and turn ON/OFF freely by remote
controller during set time.
Individual
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by both central remote controller and remote controller.
Timer operation possible by remote controller
Used when you want to turn ON/OFF by remote controller during set time and you do not want to start
operation by central remote controller when time of system start is programmed.

How to Select Operation Mode

Whether operation by remote controller will be possible or not for turning ON/OFF, controlling temperature or
setting operation mode is selected and decided by the operation mode given on the right edge of the table
below.
Example
ON by remote OFF by remote
Temperature Operation mode
controller controller OFF by Control
control by setting by
(Unified ON by (Unified OFF by remote mode is "1".
remote controller remote controller
central remote central remote controller
controller) controller)
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Rejection Rejection Rejection Acceptance Acceptance
: Factory setting
Control by remote controller

Operation
Unified operation, Unified OFF,
Control mode individual operation Temperature Operation Control mode
individual stop by OFF
by central remote central remote control mode setting
controller, or controller, or timer
operation controlled stop
by timer
Acceptance 0
Rejection
ON/OFF control Rejection 10
Rejection
impossible by (Example) Acceptance
remote controller Acceptance 1 (Example)
(Example)
(Example)
Rejection (Example) Rejection 11
Acceptance 2
Rejection
OFF control only Rejection 12
possible by Rejection (Example)
remote controller Acceptance 3
Acceptance
Rejection 13
Acceptance 4
Rejection
Rejection 14
Centralized
Acceptance 5
Acceptance
Rejection 15
Acceptance Acceptance
Acceptance 6
Rejection
Rejection 16
Individual Acceptance
Acceptance 7
Acceptance
Rejection 17
Acceptance 8
Rejection
Timer operation Acceptance Rejection Rejection 18
possible by (During timer at ON (During timer at OFF
remote controller position only) position only) Acceptance 9
Acceptance
Rejection 19
Do not select “timer operation possible by remote controller” if not using a remote controller.
Operation by timer is impossible in this case.
BRC1E62, BRC1E63
Local remote controllers cannot set
temperature or operation mode when
the system is under centralized control
and CENTRAL CONTROL is displayed
on the screen.

Field Settings for Outdoor Unit SiMT341715E
2. Field Settings for Outdoor Unit

This section shows a list of field setting items possible to set at time of initial startup. For details of DIP switch
setting, setting mode ("mode 2") and monitoring mode ("mode 1"), refer to information on the following pages.
2.1 Function Setting

Following setting may be required to set to comply to specific application requirements.
Setting item Contents and objective of setting Overview of setting procedure
Setting of low A. To reduce operation noise level through Use the optional board DTA104A61 (*1).
noise operation reduction of the upper limit of the fan using Set mode 2 No. 12-1.
(∗2) external input (use outdoor fan step 8 for Choose level by mode 2 No. 25.
normal operation). If required, set the Capacity priority setting
1. Level 1: fan step 7Y or less. to ON, by mode 2 No. 29-1.
2. Level 2: fan step 6 or less.
B. To perform automatic night-time low noise Select required level by mode 2-22.
operation. Select start time with mode 2-26.
Start time: selectable from 8:00 PM to 12:00 Select end time with mode 2-27.
AM (step by 2 hours). Select capacity priority setting if required by
End time: selectable from 6:00 AM to 8:00 mode 2-29-1.
AM (step by 1 hour).
(Note that the set time is estimated
according to outdoor air temperature.)
Setting of 1. Demand 1 Level 1: 60% of rated capacity or less Use the optional board DTA104A61.
demand 2. Demand 1 Level 2: 65% of rated capacity or less Wire external signal(s) to the optional
operation (∗2) 3. Demand 1 Level 3: 70% of rated capacity or less adaptor DTA104A61.
4. Demand 1 Level 4: 75% of rated capacity or less
5. Demand 1 Level 5: 80% of rated capacity or less Activate input optional board DTA104A61
6. Demand 1 Level 6: 85% of rated capacity or less mode 2 No. 12-1.
7. Demand 1 Level 7: 90% of rated capacity or less Select level of demand 1 by mode 2-30.
8. Demand 1 Level 8: 95% of rated capacity or less Select level of demand 2 by mode 2-31.
9. Demand 2 Level 1: 40% of rated capacity or less If fixed demand control is required (without
10. Demand 2 Level 2: 50% of rated capacity or less adaptor DTA104A61), set level by mode 2-
11. Demand 2 Level 3: 55% of rated capacity or less 32.
12. Demand 3 : Forced thermostat off
Setting of Make AIRNET address when it is connected Set AIRNET address with mode 2-13.
AIRNET address to AIRNET monitoring, or to view detail in
the map on Service Checker type III.
High level Required setting when level difference Set mode 2 No. 49 to 1 if outdoor is more
difference between outdoor and indoor units of same than 50 m above indoor unit.
outdoor to indoor refrigerant exceeds standard level.
Setting of high Set high static pressure in order to operate Set mode 2 No. 18 to 1 (ON).
static pressure the system with duct to the outdoor unit
(used at concealed installation on floors or
balconies).
Evaporating Setting to choose the reaction time of Set mode 2 No. 8 to choose cooling capacity
temperature outdoor control on change of outdoor and control logic between fixed, automatic or
setting (cooling cooling indoor load. high sensible.
performance) Set mode 2 No. 81 to choose Te adjustment
at start up between Powerful, Quick, Mild or
Eco.
Eco mode invalid Eco mode may be deemed unavailable. Set mode 2-23.
setting 0: Valid
1: Invalid
When this configuration is set, it is not
possible to turn this control ON/OFF using
the external control adaptor.
Eco level setting You may set the Eco level of Eco mode to You need an external control adaptor.
for Eco mode by Standard/Low or make it unavailable. Using mode 2-11, define if Eco level will be
external control Depending on the settings, low noise set by the external control adaptor low noise
adaptor operation or demand operation may not be level or demand level. If you short-circuit the
performed using the external control terminal (TeS1), Eco level can be set to
adaptor. Standard/Low. In case of open circuit, the
setting will be unavailable.
For detailed description about each setting, refer to Description field settings (mode 2: m2) on outdoor
unit main PCB on page 142.
Notes: ∗1. External control adaptor for outdoor unit.

∗2. These functions are available when setting mode 2 No.11 to 0.

SiMT341715E Field Settings for Outdoor Unit
2.2 Settings by DIP Switches

For factory mounted board only.
DIP switch
Setting item Description
No. Setting
DS1-1 ON
~DS1-4 Not used Do not change the factory settings.
OFF (Factory setting)
2.2.1 DIP Switch Setting Mounting a Spare PCB

Caution:
After replacement with spare PCB, be sure to make settings shown in the table below.
The procedure for making settings of spare PCB is different from that used for factory settings described
above. Be sure to refer to the table on the following page in order to make settings of spare PCB after
replacement.
Enforce a re-initialization of communication: hold press button BS3 “RETURN” for minimum 5 seconds.
After initialization, a test operation is required from outdoor unit (hold BS2 “SET” till indication “t01” appears).
(3) BS button (BS1~BS3) (2) Segment display (SEG1~SEG3)
(4)
DIP switch
(DS1-1~4)
(DS2-1~4)
(1)
Microcomputer
normal monitor
(HAP)
Connection terminal
for transmission use
Initial position ON ON
of DIP switches Position
OFF 1 2 3 4 OFF 1 2 3 4 Set switch
DS1 DS2
(1) Microcomputer normal monitor

This monitor blinks while in normal operation, and turns ON or OFF when an error occurs.
(2) 7 segment display
· Used to check the transmission.
· Used to display the transmission state between indoor and outdoor units.
· Used to display the contents of error.
· Used to display the contents of field setting.
(3) BS button
Used to change mode.
(4) DIP switch
Used to make field settings.

The figure below shows the required position of the DIP switches on spare PCB for RXQ-A. Change DIP
switches at time of power disconnected.
Application model The setting method (represents the position of switches)
ON
RXQ6A Set DS1-2, DS1-3, DS1-4 and DS2-2 to ON.
RXQ8A OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON
RXQ10A Set DS1-2, DS1-3, DS1-4, DS2-1 and DS2-2 to ON.
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON
RXQ16A
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
ON
OFF
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4

2.3 Settings by BS Buttons

The following settings can be made using the BS buttons on the PCB.
In case of a multi outdoor system, make these settings with the master outdoor unit (settings made with a
slave unit are disabled).
BS buttons
BS1 BS2 BS3 7 segment display (SEG1-3)
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
MODE SET RETURN
(TEST) (RESET)
Normal mode
Used to make Used to make

setting mode field settings. Setting mode
changes.
Monitor mode
Normal mode:
Blank: If no abnormality is detected and initialization of communication was completed.
Flashing combination of letter and number (4 digits): Error code detected by outdoor control or trouble
by communication.
Setting mode: Used to make changes to operating status, performance settings or address setting.
Monitor mode: Used to verify contents of settings, quantity of units, current value of some parameters
during operation of outdoor unit.
Mode changing procedure can be selected using the BS1 (MODE) button as shown below:
Press and hold the
BS1 (MODE) for 5
seconds or more Press the BS1 (MODE) once
Setting mode Normal mode Monitor mode
Press the BS1 (MODE) once
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3 SEG1 SEG2 SEG3

Selection between normal mode, monitor mode (Mode 1) and setting mode (Mode 2).
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Press BS1 (MODE) for more than 5 sec. Normal mode Press BS1 (MODE) once.
(Initial condition)
Setting mode (Mode 2) Monitor mode (Mode 1)
Setting item selection Check item selection

(SET) (SET)
Press BS3 Press BS3
(RETURN) once. (RETURN) once.
Setting condition
Contents display
selection (SET)
Press BS3 Press BS3
(RETURN) once. (RETURN) once.
Setting condition
(Contents) display
Press BS3
(RETURN) once. Press BS1
(MODE)
once.
Press BS1
(MODE) once.

2.4 Normal Mode

1. Indoor/outdoor transmission status: Used to check for the initial status of indoor/outdoor transmission.
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Blinking
Initializing
ON
OFF
Initializing completed
2. Error contents: Used to display an error content.

SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Normal
Example: E3-01
Error Error main code

Switching
every
second
Error sub code

2.5 Monitor Mode (Mode 1)

In the monitor mode, information can be retrieved about settings related to performance, addresses, number
of units and actual operation data.
2.5.1 Retrieve data by using BS button outdoor unit main PCB
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Normal
To enter "monitor mode", press the
MODE (BS1) button while in BS1
"normal mode".
MODE
Selecting monitoring item
Press the SET (BS2) button to set BS2

the 7 segment display to any of the
monitoring items listed in the table below. SET
BS3
Checking for description of data
Press the RETURN (BS3) button.

RETURN
Data on the monitoring item selected will
appear on the 7 segment display.
BS3
RETURN
Press the RETURN (BS3) button to
set "Monitoring mode" to the initial state.
BS1
MODE
Press the MODE (BS1) button will Normal
return the mode to "normal mode".
∗ If you lose setting in progress,

press the MODE (BS1) button.
You should return to "normal mode".
Legend Segment : OFF : ON : BLINKS : hold 5 seconds

2.5.2 Overview of Monitor Mode (Mode 1)

Item Contents
No. Display Display
∗1 Description Description
SEG 1 SEG 2 SEG 3 SEG 1 SEG 2 SEG 3
Undefined -
0 Master/slave outdoor unit 1. 0 0 Master unit 0
Slave 1 unit 1
Slave 2 unit 2
Low noise operation state In normal operation 0
1 display 1. 0 1 In low noise operation 1
2 Demand operation state 1. 0 2 In normal operation 0

display In demand operation 1
Automatic backup operation OFF 0
3 setting 1. 0 3 ON 1
Normal 6°C 2
High sensible 7°C 3
5 Te setting 1. 0 5 High sensible 8°C 4
0
8 Low noise/demand address 1. 0 8 Possible 0-31 3 1
0
9 AIRNET address 1. 0 9 Possible 0-63
6 3
Number of connected indoor 0
10 1. 1 0 Possible 0-63
units (refer to ∗2) 6 3
Number of outdoor units 0
13 1. 1 3 Possible 0-63
(refer to ∗3) 6 3
0
15 Number of units in zone 1. 1 5 Possible 0-63
6 3
Number of all indoor units of
several systems if “F1F2 0
16 1. 1 6 Possible 0-128
OUT/D is wired between 1 2 8
systems (refer to ∗4)
17 Description of error (latest) 1. 1 7
Description of error
18 1. 1 8 Refer to information in Check for Descriptions of
(1 cycle before)
Errors/Retries on page 137.
Description of error
19 1. 1 9
(2 cycles before)
∗1: Numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the BS button.
∗2: Number of indoor units connected: represents the number of indoor units connected to a single outdoor
system.
∗3: Number of outdoor units: represents the number of outdoor units connected to a single DIII-NET that is a
communication line.
∗4: Number of terminal units: represents the number of indoor units connected to a single DIII-NET that is a
communication line.

Item Contents
No.
∗1 Display Display
Description Description
SEG 1 SEG 2 SEG 3 SEG 1 SEG 2 SEG 3
23 Description of retry (latest) 1. 2 3
Description of retry
24 1. 2 4 Refer to information in Check for Descriptions of
(1 cycle before)
Errors/Retries on page 137.
Description of retry
25 1. 2 5
(2 cycles before)
Number of outdoor units 0
28 1. 2 8 Possible 0-63
connected in a multi system 6 3
0: judgement in process 0
32 Outdoor unit PCB status 1. 3 2 1: normal 1
judgement 2: abnormal 2
33 Number of abnormal status 1. 3 3 Possible 0-15 0

judgement outdoor unit PCB 1 5
Number of connected RA 0
38 indoor (through BP unit) 1. 3 8 Possible 0-63 6 3
40 Cooling comfort setting 1. 4 0 Possible 0-3 0

(see mode 2-81) 3
0. 1 0
42 High pressure (MPa) 1. 4 2 Possible 0.1-9.99 9. 9 9
43 Low pressure (MPa) 1. 4 3 Possible 0.1-9.99 0. 1 0

9. 9 9
44 Compressor total frequency 1. 4 4 0-999 0 0 0

(Hz) 9 9 9
Opening pulses of main
45 electronic expansion valve 1. 4 5 0-999 0 0 0
(Y1E) (pulses/10) 9 9 9
46 Discharge pipe temperature 1. 4 6 –99-999 - 9 9

(°C) (Tdi1) 9 9 9
Discharge pipe temperature - 9 9
47 (°C) (Tdi2) 1. 4 7 –99-999 9 9 9
48 Compressor body 1. 4 8 –99-999 - 9 9

temperature (°C) (Ti1) 9 9 9
Compressor body - 9 9
49 temperature (°C) (Ti2) 1. 4 9 –99-999 9 9 9
50 Outdoor air temperature (°C) 1. 5 0 –99-999 - 9 9

(Ta) 9 9 9
Compressor suction - 9 9
51 temperature (°C) (Ts) 1. 5 1 –99-999 9 9 9
Subcooling heat exchanger - 9 9
52 gas pipe temperature (°C) 1. 5 2 –99-999 9 9 9
(Tsh)
Compressor operation 0 0 0
54 (hours/100) 1. 5 4 0-999 9 9 9
∗1: Numbers in the "No." column represent the number of times to press the BS button.

2.5.3 Check for descriptions of errors/retries

Follow the procedure described below. This procedure is different than indicated in previous “Monitor mode”.
The error codes for forced stop outdoor or retry are item:
17, 18, 19: description of error (outdoor system stopped operation).
23, 24, 25: description of retry.
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
Normal
To enter "monitor mode", press the
MODE (BS1) button while in BS1
"normal mode".
MODE
Selecting error/retry item
Press the SET (BS2) button to set BS2

the 7 segment display to any of the
error or retry items listed in the table
below. SET
Displaying check 1
Press the RETURN (BS3) button. BS3

Error (Retry) codes will appear on the
7 segment display.
RETURN
BS2 Press
SET(BS2)
button. Displaying check 2
SET
Press the SET (BS2) button. BS2
Detailed error (retry) codes will appear on
the 7 segment display. SET
BS3
Press the RETURN (BS3) button to set RETURN

"Monitoring mode" to the initial state.
BS1
Pressing the MODE (BS1) button will MODE

return the mode to "normal mode".
Normal
The tables on next pages show a full list of possible error codes displayed on the 3 digit 7 segment display
of the outdoor unit. The error code contains an upper and lower digit. To scroll between upper and lower
error digit, use the “Set” button BS2 when the select number in the monitoring mode is chosen:
No. 17-19 for error: System operation stopped.
No. 23-25 for retry: System attempts to keep operation.
The errors cover problems detected in the outdoor unit or the communication.
Errors detected on the indoor unit are not shown on the outdoor display. For inspecting error code on
indoor unit, please consult:
Display of the remote controller connected to the indoor units.
If there are no remote controllers, there should be a central control device set up. Prior to start up,
make the necessary group number settings on each indoor unit.
Refer to page 171 for Error Codes and Descriptions.

2.6 Setting Mode (Mode 2)
Press and hold the MODE (BS1) SEG1 SEG2 SEG3

button for 5 seconds or more and
set to “Setting mode”.
Normal
BS1
Selection of setting items MODE

Press the SET (BS2) button and set
the 7 segment display to a setting
item shown in the table below.
↓
Press the RETURN (BS3) button
and decide the item. (The present BS2
setting condition is blinked.)
SET
BS3
RETURN
Selection of setting conditions
Default
Press the SET (BS2) button and set
to the setting condition you want.
↓
and decide the condition. BS2
SET
BS3
RETURN
and set to the initial status of
“Setting mode”.
BS3
RETURN
BS1
Press the MODE (BS1) button to MODE

return to “Normal mode”.
Normal
∗ If you become unsure of how to
proceed, press the MODE (BS1)
button and return to “Normal mode”.

2.6.1 Overview of Setting Mode (Mode 2)

This overview shows the available settings by using the press buttons on the outdoor unit PCB.
Item Contents
Display Display
No.
Description SEG SEG SEG Description SEG SEG SEG
1 2 3 1 2 3
0 Do not change contents. 2. 0 0 — — — —
2 Low noise/ Used to make address setting for low 0 0
demand noise/demand address. 2. 0 2 Address :
address 31 3 1
5 Indoor fan Used to force the fan of indoor unit to H tap. Normal operation 0
forced H 2. 0 5 Indoor fan H 1
6 Forced Used to force all indoor units to operate 2. 0 6 Normal operation 0
thermostat ON forced thermostat ON. Forced thermostat ON 1
8 Te setting Used to make setting of targeted Standard: 6°C 2
evaporating temperature for cooling High sensible: 7°C 3
operation.
2. 0 8 High sensible: 8°C 4
High sensible: 9°C 5
Eco setting is available from an external input.
When this configuration is set, it is not possible to turn the Eco Unavailable 0
refrigerant control ON/OFF using the remote controller. Also, Eco setting by low noise
11 depending on the settings, low noise operation or demand 2. 1 1 level input 1
operation may not be performed using the external control Eco setting by demand 2
adaptor. input
12 External low Used to receive external low noise or

noise/demand demand signal. 2. 1 2 Input LNO/DE : OFF 0
setting : ON 1
13 AIRNET Used to set address of AIRNET 0 0
address 2. 1 3 Address :
63 6 3
18 High EST for High external static pressure setting for OFF 0
outdoor fan outdoor fan 2. 1 8 ON 1
21 Refrigerant Used to set the system to refrigerant Refrigerant recovery
recovery/ recovery mode (without compressor run). 2. 2 1 OFF 0
vacuuming ON 1
22 Automatic night- Automatic night-time low noise operation. OFF 0
time low noise Time for the operation is subject to the start Level 1 1
operation and end time settings. 2. 2 2 Level 2 2
Level 3 3
Level 4 4
23 Used to set Eco mode invalid.
When this configuration is set, it is not possible to turn the Eco 2. 2 3 Valid 0
mode ON/OFF using the external control adaptor. Invalid 1

Item Contents
No. Display Display

1 2 3 1 2 3
25 External night- Low noise level when the external low Level 1 1
time low noise noise signal is input at option DTA104A61. 2. 2 5 Level 2 2
operation level Level 3 3
Level 4 4
26 Automatic night- Time to start automatic “night-time low About 8:00 PM 1
time low noise noise” operation. (“Night-time low noise” 2. 2 6 About 10:00 PM 2
operation start level setting should also be made.) About 12:00 AM 3
27 Automatic night- Time to stop automatic “night-time low About 6:00 AM 1
time low noise noise” operation. (“Night-time low noise” 2. 2 7 About 7:00 AM 2
operation stop level setting should also be made.) About 8:00 AM 3
28 Power transistor Used to troubleshoot DC compressor.
check Inverter waveforms are output without wire
connections to the compressor. It is useful OFF 0
to determine whether the relevant trouble 2. 2 8 ON (10 Hz) 1
has resulted from the compressor or
inverter PCB.
29 Capacity priority Cancel the low noise level control if
capacity is required while low noise OFF 0
operation or night-time low noise operation 2. 2 9 ON 1
is in progress.
30 Demand 1 Used to make a change to the targeted Level 1 (60%) 1
setting power consumption level when the Level 2 (65%) 2
demand 1 control signal is inputted. Level 3 (70%) 3
Level 4 (75%) 4
2. 3 0 Level 5 (80%) 5
Level 6 (85%) 6
Level 7 (90%) 7
Level 8 (95%) 8
31 Demand 2 Used to use a targeted power current level
setting when the demand 2 control signal is Level 1 (40%) 1
inputted. 2. 3 1 Level 2 (50%) 2
Level 3 (55%) 3
32 Constant Used to set constant demand 1 or 2 control

demand setting without inputting any external signal. OFF 0
2. 3 2 Demand 1 (2-30) 1
Demand 2 (2-31) 2

38 Emergency To prohibit a compressor or complete in OFF 0
operation “Master”. Since module is permanent Master M1C OFF 1
(master) disabled, immediately replace the 2. 3 8
Master M2C OFF 2
defective component(s). Master unit OFF 3
39 Emergency To prohibit a compressor or complete OFF 0
operation “Slave 1”. Since module is permanent Slave 1 M1C OFF 1
(slave 1) disabled, immediately replace the 2. 3 9
Slave 1 M2C OFF 2
defective component(s). Slave 1 unit OFF 3
40 Emergency To prohibit a compressor or complete OFF 0
operation “Slave 2”. Since module is permanent
2. 4 0 Slave 2 M1C OFF 1
(slave 2) disabled, immediately replace the Slave 2 M2C OFF 2
defective component(s). Slave 2 unit OFF 3

Item Contents
No. Display Display

1 2 3 1 2 3
49 Outdoor > 50 m Height difference setting max. 90 m. Off (max. 50 m) 0
above indoor 2. 4 9
On (max. 90 m) 1
51 Sequence multi Sequence addressing between master and Automatic 0
outdoor slave units. Forced master 1
2. 5 1 Forded slave 1 2
Forced slave 2 3
76 VRTsmart Used to change upper limit of target Low 1 0
control evaporation temperature in VRTsmart Low 2 1
Te upper limit control. Low 3 2
2. 7 6 Low 4 3
Low 5 4
Low 6 5
Standard 6
High 7
78 VRT control Used to change upper limit of target Standard 0
Te upper limit evaporation temperature in VRT control. 2. 7 8
High 4
81 Cooling comfort Cooling comfort setting ECO 0
setting 2. 8 1 Mild 1
Quick 2
Powerful 3
83 Master remote control setting when mix combination VRV indoor 0
2. 8 3 RA indoor — — 1
90 Indoor unit Possible for operate system when some Disabled 0
without power indoor units are temporary without power 2. 9 0 Enabled 1
supply.
95 Eco level setting for VRT Smart Standard 0
2. 9 5 Middle 1
High 2
∗ : Setting does not return to factory setting when exit mode 2. To cancel the function, change setting
manually to factory setting.
∗ : Once function is activated “t01” appears. To stop current function, press once BS3 “Return” button.
For detailed description about each setting, refer to Detais of Setting Mode (m2) on page 142.
Indication bold means factory setting.

2.6.2 Details of Setting Mode (m2)

m2-2: Low noise/demand address: address for low noise/demand operation.
1 or more systems (maximum 10 systems wired by “F1F2 OUT/D”) can operate use the LNO (Low
Noise Operation) or/and the DE (Demand Control) by instruction of field supplied input to optional
board DTA104A61/62.
To link the system to the corresponding DTA104A61/62, set the address same as the DIP switches
position on the related optional board DTA104A61/62.
Ensure that also field setting 2-12-1 is set to enable input from optional board DTA104A61/62.
m2-5: Cross wiring check.

Default value: 0. Not active.
Set 1: force all connected indoor units (except VKM) to operate the indoor fan on high speed. This
setting can be made to check which units are missing in the communication if the number of indoor
units do not correspond to the system lay out. Ensure that after cross wiring check was confirmed, to
return setting to default 2-5-0. Once setting 2-5-1 is active, it is not automatically returning to default
when exit mode 2.
m2-6: Forced thermostat ON command all connected indoor units.

Set 1: force all connected indoor units to operate under “Test” (forced thermostat ON command to
outdoor). Ensure that when the forced thermostat ON needs to be ended, to return setting to default 2-
6-0. Once setting 2-6-1 is active, it is not automatically returning to default when exit mode 2.
m2-8: Te target temperature for cooling operation. Change the setting in function of required operation
method during cooling.
Default value: 2 (Te target: 6°C). The refrigerant temperature is fixed to average indoor evaporating
temperature of 6°C, independent from the situation. It corresponds to the standard operation which is
known and can be expected from/under previous VRV systems.
Set 3-7: High Sensible. The refrigerant temperature is set higher/lower in cooling compared to basic
operation. The focus under high sensible mode is comfort feeling for the customer. The selection
method of indoor units is important and has to be considered as the available capacity is not the same
as under basic operation. Activate this setting under cooling operation.
set 2-8 Te target
2 6°C (default)
3 7°C
4 8°C
5 9°C
6 10°C
7 11°C
m2-12: Enable input “DTA104A61”: enable the low noise function and/or power consumption limitation.
If the system needs to be running under low noise operation or under power consumption limitation conditions
when an external signal is sent to the unit, this setting should be changed. This setting will only be effective
when the optional external control adaptor for outdoor unit (DTA104A61/62) is installed and the address set
by DIP switches on DTA104A61/62 corresponds to the address set on the outdoor unit(s) – set 2-.
Default value: 0.
To enable input from DTA104A61/62 change to 2-12-1.

m2-13: AIRNET address.

When an AIRNET system will be used, outdoor unit needs an AIRNET address.
Also to facilitate the recognition of a system in the map lay out of the service checker type III, set each
system a unique address between 1 and 63.
When duplicating of AIRNET address, UC error code will appear on central control.
m2-21: Refrigerant recovery / vacuuming.

Default value: 0. Recovery mode not active.
Set 1: outdoor and indoor electronic expansion valves are opened fully (except EV3 for PCM vessel).
Compressor(s) do not operate.
All controllers show “Test” and LED operation-ON, but indoor and outdoor fan do not operate.
Outdoor segment display indicates t 01.
By opening indoor and outdoor electronic expansion valves there is a free pathway to reclaim
remaining refrigerant out by using a refrigerant recovery unit to a refrigerant recovery bottle.
Prior to launch the recovery mode, ensure:
To vacuum all lines between service hoses – refrigerant recovery unit and recovery bottle.
Weight the refrigerant recovery bottle to know recovered amount when refrigerant recovery
function is terminated.
To end the refrigerant recovery mode, press BS3 button once. The 7 segment display returns to
normal (all off).
m2-22: Selection automatic night-time low noise operation level. The outdoor can switch
automatically to a pre-set night-time low noise operation level during night time judgement.
Default value: 0. Auto night-time low noise operation not active.
Set 1: use level 1.
Set 2: use level 2.
Set 3: use level 3.
Set 4: use level 4.
Set period: refer to set 2-26 for start time and 2-27 for end time.
m2-25: Night-time low noise operation level when using external input to optional board DTA104A61/62.
If the system needs to be running under low noise operation conditions when an external signal is sent
to the unit, this setting defines the level of low noise that will be applied.
This setting will only be effective when the optional external control adaptor for outdoor unit
DTA104A61/62 is installed and the setting is enabled (mode 2-12-1).
When night-time low noise operation is actually performed, conditions if visible in mode 1 – code 1.
The night-time low noise operation will not be performed in one of following conditions:
Startup of system, or
During oil return, or
30 minutes after external input opened, or
Capacity priority setting is active (refer to mode 2-29-1) and limit condition is met.
Default value: 2 (level 2)
Night-time low noise operation level can be selected to 1, 2, 3 or 4 (field setting 2-25-1, 2, 3, 4).

m2-26: Start time automatic night-time low noise operation. When the auto night-time low noise
operation is active (refer to field setting 2-22) outdoor will start when start time is reached time is reached.
The time judgement is taken from outdoor air tendency.
*When the outdoor air temperature becomes highest,
Capability%
the unit is sensed as 2:00 PM
100
50
Load%
0
Night mode
ends
58
Max.8 dB reduced
sound dB
Operation
(10 HP)
50
8:00 AM 12:00 PM 4:00 PM 8:00 PM 12:00 AM 4:00 AM 8:00 AM
Night mode
starts
Default value: 2 (10:00 PM)

Field setting 1: 8:00 PM, 3: 12:00 AM (midnight).
m2-27: Stop time automatic night-time low noise operation. When the auto night-time low noise
operation is active (refer to field setting 2-22), outdoor unit will stop the night-time low noise operation level
automatically when stop time is reached.
Default value: 3 (8:00 AM)
Field setting 1: 6:00 AM, 2: 7:00 AM
m2-28: Power transistor check mode. To evaluate the output of the power transistors. Use this function
in case error code is displayed related to defective inverter PCB or inverter compressor is locked.
Default value: 0. Power transistor check mode is not active.
Field setting 1: Power transistor check mode is active.
Function:
Inverter PCB gives output of 10 Hz in sequence by all 6 transistors. Remove the U/V/W
terminals of the inverter compressor, and connect to the inverter checker module. If all 6 LEDs
blink, the transistors switch correctly.
When the power transistor check mode is interrupted, after internal power circuit is
disconnected on the inverter PCB, 2 LEDs will light up to indicate discharge of the DC voltage.
Wait till the LEDs are OFF before returning fasten terminals back to the compressor terminals.
Minimum requirements to refer to the result on the inverter checker module:
All 3 phases and neutral are available, and
Inverter PCB control is active. Check if the green LED “HAP” on the inverter PCBs are blinking
normal (approx. 1/ second). If LEDs are OFF, need to exit the “standby mode” of the inverter:
Disconnect and reconnect power supply control PCB, or
Forced thermostat ON condition, or
Make shortly set 2-6-1 (forced thermostat ON indoor), or
2-20-1 (manual refrigerant charge).
Once the LED is blinking on the inverter PCB, change related setting immediately back to
set 0 to deactivate related function.
Diode module generates the required 500 VDC.

Cautions:
In case there is more than 1 compressor in a system (outdoor is 14 HP or larger, or multi
outdoor configuration) all compressor inverter PCBs will perform the power transistor check. In
such case, disconnect U/V/W fasten terminals on all compressors. Avoid accidental touch of
fasten terminals to short-circuit or earth leak to casing.
To stop the power transistor check mode, change setting to default 2-28-0.
Output to U/V/W will also stop when outdoor unit main PCB decides standby mode of inverter
circuit.
Next time graph shows the different steps during the power transistor check mode.
Switching sequence during power transistor check mode:
Power transistor check mode RXQ-A

disconnect fasten U/V/W from compressor!
step1: Voltage Check 4 step 2:

mode 2 Magn. output mode 2 - code 28
code 28 sw. U-V-W set 02 01+"Return
K1M Frequency: 10 Hz
set 01 02 2x OR exit mode 2
"Return" 2x on ("mode" button)
±100
VAC
note*
Check Check Check ±6 sec ±3 sec
1 2 3
Voltage
output Check 5
U-V-W
Magn.sw. Frequency: 240 Hz
K1M off ±170
VAC
note* ±60 VAC
±3 sec note*
±30 sec
Check 1 : AC power input (connector X10A on A2P: inverter compressor) 380-415 V
unbalance max.2%.
Check 2 : relay "K1M" on inverter PCB switches: check DC voltage on P&N increase to
±500 VDC.
Check 3 : DC = 1.42 x VAC power supply L1-L3: check at connector X3A (8-12 HP), or
X5,6A (14-20 HP).
Check 4 : AC UVW 10 Hz intermediate: check difference within 10 V (at fasten U/V/W)
Check 5 : AC UVW 240 Hz continuous output while voltage drop (discharge capacitors DC)
check difference between UVW within 10 V. 2 LEDs (V phase) brightness reduce
till of.
*Note: Actual voltage value depends on meter characteristics
m2-29: Capacity priority. When the night-time low noise operation is in use, performance of system
might drop because airflow rate of outdoor unit is reduced.
Default value: 0. Capacity priority cannot be used.
Field setting 1: capacity priority can temporary cancel the night-time low noise operation. Capacity
priority can be initiated when certain operation parameters approach the safety setting:
Raise in high pressure during cooling.
Raise of discharge pipe temperature.
Raise of inverter current.
Raise of fin temperature inverter PCB.

When operation parameters return to normal range, the capacity priority is switched OFF, enable to
reduce airflow rate depending on night-time low noise operation is still required (end time for low night
noise operation is not reached or external input night-time low noise operation is still closed).
If capacity priority is set in

Operation capacity priority setting, the fan
sound speed will be increased Time set with night-time low
Time set with night-time low according to the load of air noise operation end setting
noise operation start setting conditioning when load is heavier.
Rated
∗Night-time
Level 1
∗Low noise
Level 2
∗Operation sound mode mode instructing
set with night-time low
noise operation setting
Level 3 Low noise mode ∗Operation sound set with
instructing external low noise setting
Operation sound set with
external low noise setting
8:00 PM 10:00 PM 12:00 AM 6:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00 AM
Set with night-time low noise operation start Set with night-time low noise operation end
setting. (Factory setting is 10:00 PM.) setting. (Factory setting is 8:00 AM.)
m2-30: Power consumption limitation level 1. If the system needs to be running under power
consumption limitation conditions via the external control adaptor for outdoor unit DTA104A61/62. This
setting defines the level power consumption limitation that will be applied for level 1. The level is according
the table.
Default: 3 (70%)
Field setting:
set 2-30 current limit set (%)
1 60
2 65
3 70 (default)
4 75
5 80
6 85
7 90
8 95
m2-31: Power consumption limitation level 2. If the system needs to be running under power
consumption limitation conditions via the external control adaptor for outdoor unit DTA104A61/62. This
setting defines the level power consumption limitation that will be applied for level 2. The level is according
the table.
Default: 1 (40%)
Field setting:
set 2-31 current limit set (%)
1 40 (default)
2 50
3 55
m2-38: Emergency operation “Master”. To disable permanent compressor operation: in case of single
module or “Master” unit of a multi outdoor system, this setting allows:
Default value: 0. Compressor operation enabled.
Field setting:
Set 1: inverter 1 compressor is disabled.
Set 2: inverter 2 compressor is disabled. Only to make in case of 16-20 HP.
Note that compressor 2 is left side located.
Set 3: all compressors in this master module are disabled permanent.

m2-39: Emergency operation “Slave 1”. To disable permanent compressor operation of “Slave 1” unit of
a multi outdoor system (RXQ-A):
Field set:
Set 1: Inverter 1 compressor is disabled.
Set 2: Inverter 2 compressor is disabled. Only to make in case of 16-20 HP. Note that compressor 2
is left side located.
Set 3: All compressors in this master module are disabled permanent.
m2-40: Emergency operation “Slave 2”. To disable permanent compressor operation of “Slave 2” unit of
a multi outdoor system (RXQ-A):
Field setting:
Set 1: Inverter 1 compressor is disabled.
Set 2: Inverter 2 compressor is disabled. Only to make in case of 16-20 HP. Note that compressor 2
is left side located.
Set 3: All compressors in this master module are disabled permanent.
Combination table setting 2-38, 2-39 and 2-40:

Master/
disable individual Slave 1 Slave 2
compressor 1 2-38-1 2-39-1 2-40-1

compressor 2 2-38-2 2-39-2 2-40-2
module 2-38-3 2-39-3 2-40-3
m2-51: Master/Slave setting Multi. When 2 or 3 modules are installed as a multi-outdoor (by common
refrigerant piping and wiring by terminals Q1Q2) configuration is automatically detected. In certain cases,
the sequence of the slave units need to be set manually (in case of AIRNET monitoring).
Default value: 0. Automatic detection.
Field setting: ensure that the modules in a multi are set different status. Even some modules in a multi
are set manually to same status, U7 error will appear.
1: Forced Master (F1F2/Ind terminals should be connected to indoor units).
2: Forced Slave 1 (only Q1Q2 terminals should be wired to Master module).
3: Forced Slave 2 (only Q1Q2 terminals should be wired to Master module).
m2-81: Cooling comfort setting. The comfort level is related to the timing and the effort (power
consumption) which is put in achieving a certain room temperature by changing temporally the refrigerant
temperature to different values in order to achieve requested conditions more quickly.
Default value: 1 (Mild). Undershoot during cooling operation is allowed compared to the requested
refrigerant temperature, in order to achieve the required room temperature very fast. The undershoot is
not allowed from the startup moment. The startup occurs under the condition which is defined by the
operation mode. In case of cooling operation the evaporating temperature is allowed to go down to 6°C
on temporary base depending on the situation. When the request from the indoor units becomes more
moderate, the system will eventually go to the steady state condition which is defined by the operation
method above. The startup condition is different from the powerful and quick comfort setting.
Field setting:
0: Eco. The original refrigerant temperature target, which is defined by the Te setting (field setting
2-8) in cooling mode, is kept without any correction, unless for protection control.
2: Quick. Undershoot during cooling operation is allowed compared to the requested refrigerant
temperature, in order to achieve the required room temperature very fast. The overshoot is allowed
from the start up moment. In case of cooling operation the evaporating temperature is allowed to go
down to 6°C on temporary base depending on the situation. When the request from the indoor units
becomes more moderate, the system will eventually go to the steady state condition which is
defined by the operation method above.
3: Powerful. Undershoot during cooling operation is allowed compared to the requested refrigerant
temperature, in order to achieve the required room temperature very fast. The overshoot is allowed
from the start up moment. In case of cooling operation the evaporating temperature is allowed to go
down to 3°C on temporary base depending on the situation. This setting is used in conjunction with
setting 2-8.

The graph below shows the different patterns of target Te according to setting 2-81 “cooling comfort
setting”.
Refrigerant temperature
Target Powerful mode
Te
Quick mode
Mild mode
Te 6˚C
Te 3˚C
time
m2-90: Indoor unit without power U4 error generation. In case an indoor unit needs maintenance or
repair on the electric side, it is possible to keep the rest of the VRV DX indoor units operating without
power supply to some indoor unit(s).
Field setting 1: Possible to operate system when some indoor units are temporary without power
supply. The following conditions must be fulfilled:
Maximum equivalent piping length of the farthest indoor less than 120 m.
Index indoor units power simultaneously less than 30% of the nominal outdoor.
Total capacity is less than 30% of the nominal one of the outdoor unit.
Operation time is limited to 24 hours period.
It is recommended to shut down connected indoor units at the same floor.
Not possible to use service mode operation (e.g. recovery mode).
Backup operation has priority over this special feature.
Not possible to use when the indoor unit electronic expansion valve is defective.
Not possible to use with systems that include BP units.
It is necessary to wait for 10 min. before shutting down the connected indoor units after indoor units
operation is stopped.

2.7 Eco Mode Setting

By connecting an external contact input in the input of mode configuration and external control adaptor (sold
separately), you may control Eco mode setting, limiting compressor operation load and power consumption.
When Eco mode is set as unavailable (Outdoor unit external control adaptor is unnecessary)
Eco mode control is unavailable during cooling operation.
When the Eco level of Eco mode control is set as Standard/Low or Eco mode control is set as
unavailable by external control adaptor
Setting description Setting mode
Item Condition Description External control Outdoor unit PCB
adaptor
Eco level Standard Eco level set as Standard by Short-circuit the low Set mode 2-11 to
low noise level noise level terminal in Eco setting by low
the terminal TeS1 noise level input
Eco level set as Standard by Short-circuit the
demand control demand input
terminal 3 – C in the
terminal TeS1 Set mode 2-11 to
Eco setting by
Low Eco level set as Low by Short-circuit the demand input
demand control demand input
terminal 2 – C in the
terminal TeS1
Eco control unavailable Eco control set as Open the low noise Set mode 2-11 to
unavailable by low noise level level terminal in the Eco setting by low
terminal TeS1 noise level input
Eco control set as Open the demand Set mode 2-11 to
unavailable by demand input terminal in the Eco setting by
control terminal TeS1 demand input
1. Connect the external control adaptor and short-circuit the input terminal TeS1 if necessary.
2. Set mode 2-11 (External Eco Setting) to Eco setting by low noise level input or Eco setting by demand
input according to the short-circuited terminal.
About Eco Level Setting

The upper limit of target evaporation temperature is changed based on the Eco level.
In case of VRTsmart control
Target evaporation temperature

Eco level Standard 15°C
Low 9°C
The lowest temperature between the above and mode 2-76 VRTsmart control Te upper limit is set.
In case of VRT control
Target evaporation temperature

Mode 2-78: VRT control Te upper limit
Standard High
Eco level Standard 12°C 17°C
Low 8°C 10°C
The priority of each setting is as follows:

1. Mode 2-23 (Eco Control Unavailable Setting)
2. Mode 2-11 (External Eco Setting) and external control adaptor input
3. Eco mode setting

2.8 Setting of Night-Time Low Noise Operation and Demand

Operation
Setting of Night-time Low Noise Operation
By connecting the external contact input to the low noise input of the outdoor unit external control adaptor
(optional), you can lower operating noise by 2-3 dB.
Setting Content
Level 1 Set the outdoor fan to Step 7 or lower.
A. When night-time low noise operation is carried out by external contact (with the use of the external
control adaptor for outdoor unit)
1. Connect external control adaptor for outdoor unit and short circuit terminal of night-time low noise
operation (Refer below figure).
If carrying out demand or low noise input, connect the adaptor’s terminals as shown below.
F1 X
F2 X
P3 X
P4 X
External control Demand Low

adaptor for 1 2 3 C noise
outdoor unit X X X X X X
Host computer Outside wiring indicated

monitor panel by dotted line
or demand
controller
2. While in setting mode 2, set the item 2-12 (External low noise or demand setting) to ON.
3. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select an external low noise level for the item 2-25.
4. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, set the item 2-29 (Capacity priority setting) to ON.
(If the condition is set to ON, when the air conditioning load reaches a high level, the low noise operation
command will be ignored to put the system into normal operation mode.)
When night-time low noise operation is carried out automatically (External control adaptor for
outdoor unit is not required)
1. While in setting mode 2, select a night-time low noise operation level for the item 2-22.
2. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select a starting time of night-time low noise operation (i.e., 8:00 PM,
10:00 PM, or 12:00 AM) for the item 2-26.
(Use the starting time as a guide since it is estimated according to outdoor temperatures.)
3. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select an ending time of night-time low noise operation (i.e., 06:00
AM, 07:00 AM, or 08:00 AM) for the item 2-27.
(Use the ending time as a guide since it is estimated according to outdoor air temperatures.)
4. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, set the item 2-29 (Capacity priority setting) to ON.
(If the condition is set to ON, when the air conditioning load reaches a high level, the system will be put
into normal operation mode even during night-time.)

Image of operation in the case of A
Operation If capacity priority is set in

sound Capacity priority setting, the fan
speed will be increased according
to the load of air conditioning
when load is heavier.
Rated Operation sound
during low noise
Low noise mode instructing mode can be set with
Level 1 Approx. 55 db (target) External low noise
level setting (Factory
(The power consumption may
setting is level 2.)
be increased by about 10%.)
Level 2 Approx. 50 db (target)
Level 3 Approx. 45 db (target)
Operation sound level set with External low noise setting
Note1: Above values are reference only (measured in silent room)

Note2: Above values are for 1 module only.
Image of operation in the case of B

Operation Capacity priority setting, the fan
sound speed will be increased
Time set with night-time low noise according to the load of air Time set with night-time low
operation start setting conditioning when load is heavier. noise operation end setting
Rated
Operation sound during
night-time low noise
Night-time operation mode can be set
Level 1 with night-time low noise
operation level setting.
(Factory setting is OFF.)
Level 2
Level 3
Operation sound level set with
night-time low noise operation
setting
8:00 PM 10:00 PM 12:00 AM 6:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00 AM

Set with night-time low noise operation start setting. Set with night-time low noise operation end setting.
(Factory setting is 10:00 PM.) (Factory setting is 8:00 AM.)
Image of operation in the case of A and B

Operation Capacity priority setting, the fan
sound speed will be increased Time set with night-time low noise
Time set with night-time low noise according to the load of air operation end setting
operation start setting conditioning when load is heavier. Operation sound during
Rated low noise mode can be
set with External quiet
operation level setting. (Factory
∗Night-time setting is level 2.)
Level 1
Operation sound during night-
time low noise operation mode
∗Low noise can be set with night-time low
Level 2 noise operation level setting.
∗Operation sound level set mode instructing
with night-time low noise (Factory setting is OFF.)
operation setting When external low noise
Level 3 instruction is received during
Low noise mode ∗Operation sound set with
instructing External low noise setting the operation with night-time
Operation sound set with low noise operation mode.
External low noise setting Level 2 precedes level 1 and
level 3 precedes level 2.
8:00 PM 10:00 PM 12:00 AM 6:00 AM 7:00 AM 8:00 AM
Set with night-time low noise operation start setting. Set with night-time low noise operation end setting.
(Factory setting is 10:00 PM.) (Factory setting is 8:00 AM.)

Setting of Demand Operation

By connecting the external contact input to the demand input of the external control adaptor for outdoor unit
(optional), the power consumption of unit operation can be saved suppressing the compressor operating
condition.
Setting content Setting method

External control
Set item Condition Content adaptor for outdoor Outdoor unit PCB
unit
Level 1 The compressor operates at Set the item 2-32 to Demand 1,
60% or less of rating. and the item 2-30 to Level 1.
75% or less of rating. Short circuit "1" and and the item 2-30 to Level 4.
Demand 1 "C" on the terminal
Level 5 The compressor operates at strip (TeS1). Set the item 2-32 to Demand 1,
Demand 2 Level 2 The compressor operates at Short circuit "2" and "C". Set the item 2-32 to Demand 2,
Demand 3 — Forced thermostat OFF Short circuit "3" and "C". —
∗: However the demand operation does not occur in the following operation modes.
(1) Startup control (2) Oil return operation
(3) Defrost operation (4) Pump down residual operation
If carrying out demand or low noise input, connect the adaptor’s terminals as shown below.
F1 X
F2 X
P3 X
P4 X
External control Demand Low

adaptor for 1 2 3 C noise
outdoor unit X X X X X X
Host computer Outside wiring indicated

monitor panel by dotted line
or demand
controller
A. When the demand operation is carried out by external contact (with the use of the external control
adaptor for outdoor unit).
1. Connect external control adaptor for outdoor unit and short circuit terminals as required (Refer to the
figure above).
2. While in setting mode 2, set the item 2-12 (External low noise or demand setting) to ON.
3. If necessary, while in setting mode 2, select a demand 1 level for the item 2-30.
B. When the constant demand operation is carried out. (Use of the external control adaptor for
outdoor unit is not required.)
1. While in setting mode 2, set the item 2-32 (Constant demand setting) to Level 1.
While in setting mode 2, select a demand 1 level for the item 2-30.

Image of operation in the case of A

Power consumption
Rated
The power
Demand level 1 Demand level 2 Demand level 3 consumption
80 % instructing instructing instructing during the
demand level 1
70 % instructing can be
60 % set with the
Power consumption set by "Demand 1 level
"Demand 1 level setting". setting".
40 % ("70 % of rated
power
consumption" has
been set at
Forced thermostat OFF factory.)
(Fan operation)
Image of operation in the case of B
Power consumption When the

"Normal demand
setting" is set to
ON ("OFF" has
been set at
Rated factory.) , the
power
consumption can
80 % be set with the
70 % "Demand 1 level
setting". ("70 % of
60 % rated power
The power consumption set with "Demand 1 level setting".
consumption" has
been set at
factory.)
Image of operation in the case of A and B
Power consumption The power

consumption can
be set with the
"Demand 1 level
setting". ("70 % of
rated power
Rated consumption" has
been set at
80 % factory.)
70 %
60 %
The power consumption set with
"Demand 1 level setting". +Demand level +Demand level
40 % 2 instructing 3 instructing
+During constant demand
operation, when the
Forced thermostat OFF external demand
(Fan operation) instruction is received, the
instruction with higher
demand level has the
precedence.

Test Operation SiMT341715E
3. Test Operation
3.1 Checks before Test Operation
Before carrying out a test operation, proceed as follows:
Step Action
1 Make sure the voltage at the primary side of the safety breaker is:
415 V ± 10% for 3-phase units
2 Fully open the liquid and the gas stop valve.
3.2 Checkpoints
To carry out a test operation, check the following:
Check that the temperature setting of the remote controller is at the lowest level in cooling mode or use
test mode.
Go through the following checklist:
Checkpoints Cautions or warnings
Are all units securely installed? z Dangerous for turning over during storm
z Possible damage to pipe connections
Is the earth wire installed according to the applicable local Dangerous if electric leakage occurs
standard?
Are all air inlets and outlets of the indoor and outdoor units z Poor cooling
unobstructed?
Does the drain flow out smoothly? Water leakage
Is piping adequately heat-insulated? Water leakage
Have the connections been checked for gas leakage? z Poor cooling
z Stop
Is the supply voltage conform to the specifications on the Incorrect operation
name plate?
Are the cable sizes as specified and according to local Damage of cables
regulations?
Are the remote controller signals received by the unit? No operation

SiMT341715E Test Operation
3.3 Test Operation Procedure

The procedure below describes the test operation of the complete system. This operation checks and judges
following items:
• Check of wrong wiring (communication check with indoor units).
• Check of the stop valves opening.
• Judgement of piping length.
On top of this system test operation, indoor units operation should also be checked separately.
• Make sure to carry out the system test operation after the first installation. Otherwise, the error code U3 will be
displayed on the user interface and normal operation or individual indoor unit test run cannot be carried out.
• Abnormalities on indoor units cannot be checked for each unit separately. After the test operation is
finished, check the indoor units one by one by performing a normal operation using the user interface.
Refer to the indoor unit installation manual for more details concerning the individual test run.
INFORMATION
• It may take 10 minutes to achieve a uniform refrigerant state before the compressor starts.
• During the test operation, the refrigerant running sound or the magnetic sound of a solenoid valve may
become loud and the display indication may change. These are not malfunctions.
Procedure
1. Close all front panels in order to not let it be the cause of misjudgement (except the electrical component
box inspection opening service cover).
2. Make sure all field settings you want are set.
3. Turn ON the power to the outdoor unit and the connected indoor units.
NOTICE
Be sure to turn on the power 6 hours before operation in order to protect the compressor.
4. Make sure the default (idle) situation is existing. Push BS2 for 5 seconds or more. The unit will start test
operation.
• The test operation is automatically carried out, the outdoor unit display will indicate "t01" and the
indication "Test operation" and "Under centralized control" will display on the user interface of indoor
units.
Steps during the automatic system test run procedure:
- "t01": control before start up (pressure equalization)
- "t02": cooling start up control
- "t03": cooling stable condition
- "t04": communication check
- "t05": stop valve check
- "t06": pipe length check
- "t09": pump down operation
- " t10 ": unit stop
• During the test operation, it is not possible to stop the unit operation from a user interface. To abort the
operation, press BS3. The unit will stop after ±30 seconds.
5. Check the test operation results on the outdoor unit segment display.
- Normal completion: no indication on the segment display (idle)
- Abnormal completion: indication of error code on the segment display
Take actions for correcting the abnormality. When the test operation is fully completed, normal
operation will be possible after 5 minutes.

Test Operation SiMT341715E
3.4 Turn Power ON

Turn outdoor unit and indoor • Be sure to turn the power ON 6 hours before starting operation to protect
unit power ON. compressors.
Check the 7 segment display of • Check to be sure the transmission is normal.

the outdoor unit PCB. In a normal condition, the 7-segment display is OFF. Please refer to the
following figure for other states.
OFF
Light up
SEG1 SEG2 SEG3

Blinking
Power switched ON
initial check
Normal Abnormal
Initialization in
progress
Main error code Switching

alternative
1 second
Initialization
terminated
(normal)
Sub error code
(∗) The master unit is the outdoor unit to which the transmission wiring for
the indoor units is connected.
The other outdoor units are slave units.
• Make field settings if needed.

Make field settings with outdoor
(For the setting procedure, refer to information in "Field Settings for
unit PCB.
Outdoor Unit" on page 128 onward.)
For the outdoor-multi system, make field settings with the master unit.
(Field settings made with the slave unit will be all invalid.)
Conduct check operations. The check operations shown below will be automatically initiated.
• Check for erroneous wirings
• Check for failure to open stop valves
• Check for excessive refrigerant refilling
• Automatic judgement of piping length
• Before starting the normal operation after the completion of check

Check for normal operation.
operations, make sure indoor and outdoor units normally operate.

SiMT341715E
Part 6
Service Diagnosis
1. Servicing Items to be Confirmed .........................................................159
1.1 Troubleshooting....................................................................................159
1.2 Precautions for Maintenance................................................................159
1.3 Refrigerant Properties (R-410A)...........................................................161
2. Symptom-based Troubleshooting .......................................................162
2.1 With the Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor...............................165
2.2 For All Outdoor Units............................................................................166
3. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller ...............................................167
3.1 Wired Remote Controller......................................................................167
3.2 BRC4C, BRC7C, BRC7E Series..........................................................168
3.3 BRC4M, BRC7M Series .......................................................................170
3.4 Error Codes and Descriptions ..............................................................171
3.5 Error Codes (Sub Codes).....................................................................173
4. Troubleshooting by Error Code ...........................................................184
4.1 External Protection Device Abnormality ...............................................184
4.3 Drain Level Control System Abnormality..............................................186
4.4 Indoor Fan Motor Lock, Overload.........................................................188
4.5 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality..............................................................190
4.8 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality, Dust Clogging ..............199
4.9 Humidifier System Abnormality ............................................................201
4.10 Auto Grille Unit Error ............................................................................202
4.11 Capacity Determination Device Abnormality ........................................203
4.12 Transmission Abnormality
4.13 Transmission Error ...............................................................................206
(between indoor unit PCB and Auto Grille Control PCB) .....................207
4.16 Combination Abnormality
4.17 Capacity Setting Abnormality ...............................................................211
4.19 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error ..................................................213
4.20 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality ..........................................218
4.21 Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality....................................................219
4.22 Current Leakage Detection ..................................................................220
4.23 Missing of Leakage Detection Core .....................................................221
4.24 Actuation of High Pressure Switch .......................................................222
4.25 Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor .......................................................224
4.26 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock..........................................................226
4.27 Outdoor Fan Motor Abnormality ...........................................................228
4.28 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality.......................................231
Service Diagnosis 157

SiMT341715E
4.29 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality ...........................................233

4.30 Wet Alarm.............................................................................................235
4.31 Refrigerant Overcharged......................................................................236
4.32 Harness Abnormality
(between Outdoor Unit Main PCB and Inverter PCB) ..........................237
4.33 Outdoor Fan PCB Abnormality.............................................................238
4.35 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality ......................................................241
4.36 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality .......................................................242
4.37 Inverter PCB Abnormality.....................................................................243
4.38 Momentary Power Failure during Test Operation ................................245
4.39 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality .........................246
4.40 Inverter Compressor Instantaneous Overcurrent .................................248
4.41 Inverter Compressor Overcurrent.........................................................250
4.42 Inverter Compressor Startup Abnormality ............................................252
4.43 Transmission Error between Inverter PCB and
Outdoor Unit Main PCB........................................................................255
4.44 Power Supply Voltage Imbalance ........................................................257
4.45 Reactor Temperature Abnormality .......................................................259
4.46 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality .................................260
4.47 Field Setting after Replacing Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality or
Combination of PCB Abnormality.........................................................262
4.48 Refrigerant Shortage Warning..............................................................263
4.49 Open Phase .........................................................................................264
4.50 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Abnormality .....................265
4.51 Check Operation Not Executed............................................................267
4.52 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor Units..............268
4.53 Transmission Error between Remote Controller and Indoor Unit.........271
4.54 Transmission Error between Outdoor Units .........................................272
4.55 Transmission Error between Main and Sub Remote Controllers .........277
4.56 Other Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit Abnormality................................278
Indoor Unit and Remote Controller.......................................................279
4.58 Address Duplication of Centralized Controller......................................282
Indoor Unit............................................................................................283
4.60 System Not Set Yet ..............................................................................285
4.61 System Abnormality, Refrigerant System Address Undefined .............286
5. Check ..................................................................................................288
5.1 High Pressure Check ...........................................................................288
5.2 Low Pressure Check ............................................................................289
5.3 Superheat Operation Check.................................................................290
5.4 Power Transistor Check .......................................................................291
5.5 Refrigerant Overcharge Check.............................................................292
5.6 Refrigerant Shortage Check.................................................................293
5.7 Vacuuming and Dehydration Procedure ..............................................294
5.8 Thermistor Check .................................................................................295
5.9 Pressure Sensor Check .......................................................................298
5.10 Broken Wire Check of the Relay Wires ................................................299
5.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable) ............................300
158 Service Diagnosis

SiMT341715E Servicing Items to be Confirmed
1. Servicing Items to be Confirmed

1.1 Troubleshooting
(1) Initial verification and troubleshooting
1. Properly understand the end user's needs and issues.
2. Check the cause of errors according to the description provided by the end user.
3. Check if the remote controller displays any error codes.
(Or use the outdoor unit monitoring mode to check for errors).
↓
4. If there is no display of error codes, refer to Symptom-based Troubleshooting on page 162 for diagnosis.
If an error code is displayed, refer to troubleshooting flow chart for diagnosis.
(2) Take appropriate measures.

1. Repair the defect or replace the parts according to the troubleshooting results.
2. Turn off the power supply for 10 minutes before disassembling.
3. The refrigerant has to be collected before refrigerant system components are replaced.
(3) Verification after taking appropriate measures

1. Run the unit after repairing the defect to confirm normal unit operation.
2. Record the check results and inform the client.
1.2 Precautions for Maintenance

Pay attention to the following matters in servicing.
(1) Precaution for maintenance

Touch the paint-free metal part of the product (electrical box lid of the standard model; tap bolts of electrical box of
anti-corrosion and heavy anti-corrosion models) to release static electricity before starting work.
(2) Precautions for maintaining the service cover

After maintenance, make sure to close the service cover.
(Otherwise, leakage of water or contamination by foreign matter may cause defects)
(3) Precautions for maintaining the electrical box

1. Turn off the power for 10 minutes before opening the cover of the electrical box.
2. After opening the cover, use the tester to measure the terminal voltage of the power supply terminal to make sure
that the power has been cut.
Then check if the circuit capacitor voltage is under 50 VDC.
3. To avoid PCB defects, touch the earth terminal of the electrical box with your hand when unplugging the
connector to release static electricity.
4. Unplug the connectors X106A (3/4/5/6 HP), X107A (6 HP), X1A/X2A (8/9 HP) of the outdoor fan motor.
When unplugging the connectors, do not touch the live parts.
(When the outdoor fan is rotating because of strong wind, there is a risk of electric shock due to main circuit board
capacitor power storage.)
5. After maintenance, reconnect the connectors of the outdoor fan in their original positions.
· Otherwise, the remote controller will display error code E7, preventing normal operation.

Servicing Items to be Confirmed SiMT341715E
(4) Precautions for outdoor unit multi system

All the settings should be made in the master unit. Settings in the slave units are deemed unavailable.
Differentiation of Master/Slave Units

1. The outdoor unit master unit is the unit which has the connecting wires to the indoor unit. All the other units are
slave units.
2. You may also differentiate the master/slave units by the 7-segment display.
7-segment display
In normal mode, press the BS1 button once, and in the SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
confirmation mode, check if the 7-segment display shows 1. 0 0
the code on the right.
Press the confirmation button Master 0
(BS3) to check for the master/slave
units Slave 1 1
Slave 2 2
(5) Precautions for piping work and refrigerant charging:

This unit uses R-410A refrigerant. Pay attention to the following conditions.
1. The charging pipe and the manifold tube use R-410A products for pressure maintenance and avoiding
contamination by impurities (SUNISO oil, etc.).
2. Be sure to purge with nitrogen when brazing.
· Properly perform airtightness test and vacuum drying. (Airtight test pressure: 4.0 MPa)
· Charge refrigerant in liquid state.
(6) Precautions for operating in servicing mode (field setting):

When a test operation is interrupted or after exiting service mode, please wait for at least one minute before entering
service mode again. In case of continuous execution, the outdoor unit PCB may sometimes display an error code. If
any error codes are displayed, press the RETURN button (BS3). If performing the above operation still does not
eliminate the error, reconnect the unit to the power supply.

SiMT341715E Servicing Items to be Confirmed
1.3 Refrigerant Properties (R-410A)

4.00 3.90
3.80 3.70
3.60 3.50
3.40 3.30
3.20 3.10
3.00 2.90
2.80 2.70
2.60 2.50
Pressure gauge value (MPa G)

Absolute pressure (MPa)
2.40 2.30
2.20 2.10
2.00 1.90
1.80 1.70
1.60 1.50
1.40 1.30
1.20 1.10
1.00 0.90
0.80 0.70
0.60 0.50
0.40 0.30
0.20 0.10
0.00 –0.10
–50 –40 –30 –20 –10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Temperature ˚C
Temperature Absolute Temperature Absolute Temperature Absolute Temperature Absolute

(°C) Pressure (°C) Pressure (°C) Pressure (°C) Pressure
(MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (MPa)
–50 0.11 –20 0.40 10 1.09 40 2.42
–48 0.12 –18 0.43 12 1.15 42 2.54
–46 0.13 –16 0.46 14 1.22 44 2.67
–44 0.15 –14 0.50 16 1.29 46 2.80
–42 0.16 –12 0.54 18 1.37 48 2.93
–40 0.18 –10 0.57 20 1.45 50 3.07
–38 0.19 –8 0.61 22 1.53 52 3.21
–36 0.21 –6 0.66 24 1.61 54 3.36
–34 0.23 –4 0.70 26 1.70 56 3.51
–32 0.25 –2 0.75 28 1.79 58 3.64
–30 0.27 0 0.80 30 1.89 60 3.83
–28 0.29 2 0.85 32 1.99 62 4.00
–26 0.32 4 0.91 34 2.09 64 4.17
–24 0.34 6 0.96 36 2.20
–22 0.37 8 1.02 38 2.31

Symptom-based Troubleshooting SiMT341715E
2. Symptom-based Troubleshooting
Symptom Supposed Cause Countermeasure
1 The system does not start operation at all. Blowout of fuse(s) Turn Off the power supply and
then replace the fuse(s).
Cutout of breaker(s) • If the knob of any breaker is in
its OFF position, turn ON the
power supply.
• If the knob of any circuit
breaker is in its tripped position,
do not turn ON the power
supply.
ON
Knob
Tripped
OFF
Circuit breaker
Power failure After the power failure is reset,

restart the system.
The connector loose or not fully Turn off the power supply to verify
plugged in the connection of the connector.
2 The system starts operation but makes an Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
immediate stop. or outdoor unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
3 The system does not cool or heat air well. Blocked air inlet or outlet of indoor Remove obstacle(s).
or outdoor unit
Clogged air filter(s) Clean the air filter(s).
Enclosed outdoor unit(s) Remove the enclosure.
Improper set temperature Set the temperature to a proper
degree.
Airflow rate set to LOW Set it to a proper airflow rate.
Improper direction of air diffusion Set it to a proper direction.
Open window(s) or door(s) Shut it tightly.
[In cooling] Direct sunlight received Hang curtains or shades on
windows.
[In cooling] Too many people staying in a The model must be selected to
room match the air conditioning load.
[In cooling] Too many heat sources (e.g. OA
equipment) located in a room
4 The system does The system stops and If the operation lamp on the Normal operation. The system will
not operate. immediately restarts operation. remote controller turns ON, the automatically start operation after
Pressing the temperature system will be normal. These a lapse of five minutes.
symptoms indicate that the
setting button immediately system is controlled so as not to
resets the system. put unreasonable loads on the
system.
The remote controller displays The system is controlled with Operate the system using the
UNDER CENTRALIZED centralized controller. Blinking COOL/HEAT centralized remote
CONTROL, which blinks for a display indicates that the system controller.
period of several seconds cannot be operated using the
when the OPERATION button remote controller.
is depressed.
The system stops immediately The system is in preparation Wait for a period of approximately
after turning ON the power mode of micro computer one minute.
supply. operation.
5 The system The remote controller displays The system stops due to an Remove causes of electrical
makes error codes U4 or U5, and the interruption in communication noises.
intermittent system stops but restarts afterbetween units caused by If these causes are removed, the
stops. a lapse of several minutes. electrical noises coming from system will automatically restart
equipment other than air operation.
conditioners.
6 COOL/HEAT The remote controller displays This remote controller has no Use a remote controller with
selection is UNDER CENTRALIZED option to select cooling operation. option to select cooling operation.
disabled. CONTROL.
The remote controller displays COOL/HEAT selection is made Use the COOL/HEAT selection
UNDER CENTRALIZED using the COOL/HEAT selection remote controller to select cool or
CONTROL, and the COOL/ remote controller. heat.
HEAT selection remote
controller is provided.

SiMT341715E Symptom-based Troubleshooting

7 The system This symptom occurs The system is in preparation Wait for a period of approximately
conducts fan immediately after turning ON mode of operation. 10 minutes.
operation but not the power supply.
cooling or The remote controller displays In thermal storage operation, the Normal operation.
heating UNDER CENTRALIZED unit is set to fan operation in
operation. CONTROL; no cooling or cooling or heating operation, and
heating operation is performed. the remote controller shows
Switch to fan operation. CENTRALIZED CONTROL.
8 The airflow rate Even pressing the airflow rate In heating operation, when the Normal operation.
is not setting button makes no room temperature reaches the set
reproduced changes to the airflow rate. degree, the outdoor unit will stop
according to the while the indoor unit is brought to
setting. fan LL operation so that no one
gets cold air.
Furthermore, if fan operation
mode is selected when other
indoor unit is in heating operation,
the system will be brought to fan
LL operation.
9 The airflow The airflow direction is not Automatic control Normal operation.
direction is not corresponding to that
reproduced displayed on the remote
according to the controller.
setting. The flap does not swing.
10 A white mist Indoor unit Uneven temperature distribution Clean the inside of the indoor unit.
comes out from In cooling operation, the due to heavy stain of the inside of
the system. ambient humidity is high. the indoor unit
(This indoor unit is installed in
a place with much oil or dust.)
Indoor unit Hot gas (refrigerant) flown in the Normal operation.
Immediately after cooling indoor unit results to be vapor
operation stopping, the from the unit.
ambient temperature and
humidity are low.
Indoor and outdoor units Defrosted moisture turns to be Normal operation.
After the completion of defrost vapor and comes out from the
operation, the system is units.
switched to heating operation.
11 The system Indoor unit These are operating sounds of Normal operation.
produces Immediately after turning ON the electronic expansion valve of This sound becomes low after a
sounds. the power supply, indoor unit the indoor unit. lapse of approximately one
produces ringing sounds. minute.
Indoor and outdoor units These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Hissing sounds are gas (refrigerant) flowing
continuously produced while in respectively through the indoor
cooling or defrosting operation. and outdoor units.
Indoor and outdoor units These sounds are produced Normal operation.
Hissing sounds are produced when the gas (refrigerant) stops
immediately after the startup or or changes flowing.
stop of the system, or the
startup or stop of defrosting
operation.
Indoor unit These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Faint sounds are continuously the drain discharge device in
produced while in cooling operation.
operation or after stopping the
operation.
Indoor unit These sounds are produced from Normal operation.
Creaking sounds are produced resin parts expanding and
while in heating operation or contracting with temperature
after stopping the operation. changes.
Indoor unit On VRV systems, these sounds Normal operation.
Sounds like trickling or the like are produced when other indoor
are produced from indoor units units in operation. The reason is
in the stopped state. that the system runs in order to
prevent oil or refrigerant from
dwelling.
Outdoor unit The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
Pitch of operating sounds changes the operating frequency.
changes.


12 Dust comes out Dust comes out from the Dust, which has deposited on the Normal operation.
from the system. system when it restarts after inside of indoor unit, is blown out
the stop for an extended period from the system.
of time.
13 Odors come out In operation Odors of room, cigarettes or else The inside of the indoor unit
from the system. adsorbed to the inside of indoor should be cleaned.
unit are blown out.
14 Outdoor unit fan In operation The reason is that fan revolutions Normal operation.
does not rotate. are controlled to put the operation
to the optimum state.
15 LCD display 88 Immediately after turning ON The reason is that the system is Normal operation.
appears on the the power supply checking to be sure the remote This code is displayed for a period
remote controller is normal. of approximately one minute at
controller. maximum.
16 The outdoor unit After stopping operation It stops in order to prevent oil or Normal operation.
compressor or refrigerant from dwelling. It stops after a lapse of
the outdoor unit approximately 5 to 10 minutes.
fan does not
stop.
17 The outdoor gets While stopping operation The reason is that the compressor Normal operation.
hot. is warmed up to provide smooth
startup of the system.
18 Hot air comes Hot air is felt while the system On VRV systems, small quantity Normal operation.
out from the stops. of refrigerant is fed to indoor units
system even in the stopped state when other
though it stops. indoor units are in operation.
19 The system does The system is in dry operation. The reason is that the dry Change the system to cooling
not cool air well. operation serves not to reduce operation.
the room temperature where
possible.

SiMT341715E Symptom-based Troubleshooting
2.1 With the Optional Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor

Problem Measure
1 "Louver operation different from setting" or "No downward Refer to the flowchart below.
airflow in heating operation"
2 Individual airflow direction setting different from the actual · Check the "Louver operation different from setting" error
airflow direction diagnosis.
3 When in stop mode, the louver does not close completely. Turn off the circuit breaker and then turn it on again.
The remote controller menu does not display energy saving
operating mode for when people are not present.
The remote controller menu does not display the stop Please check "Infrared presence/infrared floor sensor error
4 function for when people are not present. (CE)" in troubleshooting.
The remote controller menu does not display the automatic
draft prevention function.
No defect.
5 The menu does not display the eco-friendly display function. Set the clock.
During cooling and dry operation, the louver automatically No defect.

6 switches from horizontal (P0) to one-level downward (P1). When relative ambient humidity is higher, automatic louver
control will be activated.
No defect.
7 During heating operation, the use of an airflow block will not In heating operation, if an airflow block is set, then the air
cause other louvers to turn downward (P4). outlet control outside the airflow block will be within the
range P0-P3.
8 When using airflow block, the airflow block will be routinely No defect.
lifted (become horizontal) during heating operation. Set louver to horizontal (P0) during thermostat OFF.
Check if there are any objects that generate temperature
change when moving.
For example:
Although people are not present, the infrared presence · An electric heater with swing function
9 sensor detects human presence. · Doors, curtains, blind switches
· Output of paper from a fax machine or a printer
· Turning on/off of incandescent lights
· Moving objects
Check for the following conditions.
· Lack of movement
10 Although people are present, the infrared presence sensor · Facing away from the sensor
fails to determine their presence. · Little skin exposed
· Slight movement in a place far from the sensor
Check for the following conditions.
· Sensor detection zone affected by solar radiation
· High or low temperature objects in the sensor detection zone
11 Large difference between floor temperature and actual · Large difference between floor temperature and
temperature temperature of the living space
· Sensors installed near walls may be affected by wall
temperature.
Error diagnosis of "Louver operation different from setting"
Is the individual YES

Normal
airflow set? Reset (Cancel)
individual airflow.
NO
Is the Is the
YES automatic draft prevention YES
airflow direction set to Normal
automatic? function "enabled"? Automatic draft
NO NO prevention function
switches flap to
horizontal position
when human
presence is detected.
Is the connection YES Is the YES

of the step motor wire harness Replace the wire
connector normal? broken? harness.
NO
Replace the step
NO motor. (Motor failure)
Connect to the
connector
correctly before
action verification.

2.2 For All Outdoor Units

Problem Measure
Decrease of main circuit power supply insulation Define the measure using the flowchart below.
resistance (Less than 1 MΩ)
Decrease of main circuit power supply

insulation resistance
Cut the power supply.
Remove the compressor wiring from the

power supply terminal. Isolate the wiring
and be careful not to touch the live parts.
Measure the insulation resistance of the

main circuit power supply.
NO
1 MΩ or more? Defective local power supply
YES Check the local power supply.

Turn the power supply on and leave it on
for 6 hours (keep the compressor wiring
disconnected).
Cut the power supply.
Connect the compressor wiring to the

terminal, or to the noise filter PCB and
measure the insulation resistance.
NO
1 MΩ or more? Compressor abnormality
YES Replace the compressor.

Normal

SiMT341715E Troubleshooting by Remote Controller
3. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller

3.1 Wired Remote Controller
3.1.1 BRC1E62, BRC1E63
The illustrations are for BRC1E63 as representative.
The following message is displayed on the screen when an error (or a warning) occurs during operation.
Check the error code and take the corrective action specified for the particular model.
Screen
Operation lamp
Menu/Enter button
(1) Check if it is error or warning.

Operation Status Display
The operation lamp (green) starts to

Abnormal The system stops blink. The message Error: Push
shutdown operating. Menu button blinks at the bottom of
the screen.
The operation lamp (green) remains

The system continues its on. The message Warning: Push
Warning operation. Menu button blinks at the bottom of
the screen.
(2) Take corrective action.
Press the Menu/Enter button to check the error code. Error code
FXFSQ25AVM
RXQ6AYM Applicable
Take the corrective action specific to the model.
model names

Troubleshooting by Remote Controller SiMT341715E

If the unit stops due to an error, the operation indicating LED on the signal receiving part of indoor unit blinks.
The error code can be determined by following the procedure described below. (The error code is displayed
when an operation error has occurred. In normal condition, the error code of the last problem is displayed.)
UP button
DOWN button
Unit number
MODE button
1. Press INSPECTION/TEST button to enter inspection mode. Then the figure 0 blinks on the unit number
display.
2. Press UP button or DOWN button and change the unit number until the receiver of the remote controller
starts to beep.
3 short beeps : Follow all steps below.
1 short beep : Follow steps 3 and 4. Continue the operation in step 4 until you hear a continuous beep.
This continuous beep indicates that the error code is confirmed.
Continuous beep : There is no abnormality.
3. Press MODE button. The left 0 (upper digit) indication of the error code blinks.
4. Press UP button or DOWN button to change the error code upper digit until the receiver of the indoor unit
starts to beep.
The upper digit of the code changes as shown below.
O0 A C E H F J L P U 9 8 7 6 5 4
"UP" button "DOWN" button
Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits match. (Error code is confirmed.)
2 short beeps : The upper digit matches but the lower digit does not.
1 short beep : The upper digit does not match.
5. Press MODE button. The right 0 (lower digit) indication of the error code blinks.
6. Press UP button or DOWN button and change the error code lower digit until the receiver of the indoor unit
generates a continuous beep.
The lower digit of the code changes as shown below.
0123456789AHCJEF
"UP" button "DOWN" button
Continuous beep : Both upper and lower digits match. (Error code is confirmed.)
2 short beeps : The upper digit matches but the lower digit does not.
1 short beep : The upper digit does not match.
7. Press MODE button to return to the normal mode. If you do not press any button for 1 minute, the remote
controller automatically returns to the normal mode.

2. Change the unit number with

Normal mode UP button or DOWN button.
1. Press INSPECTION/TEST button to enter

inspection mode.
If no button is pressed
for 1 minute, equipment
returns to normal mode.
3. Press MODE
button.
The upper digit
7. When MODE button is blinks.
pressed or no button is
pressed for 1 minute,
equipment returns to
normal mode.
If no button is pressed
for 1 minute, equipment
returns to normal mode.
6. Change the lower

digit with UP
button or DOWN 4. Change the
button. upper digit with
UP button or
5. Press MODE button. DOWN button.
The lower digit blinks.

3.3 BRC4M, BRC7M Series

When the air conditioner stops in emergency, the operating indicator lamp on the indoor unit starts blinking.
Take the following steps yourself to read the error code that appears on the display. Contact your local dealer
with this code. It will help pinpoint the cause of the trouble, speeding up the repair.
35
7
24
6
1
1. Press the INSPECTION button to select the inspection mode “ ”.
“0” appears on display and blinks.
“UNIT No.” appears.
2. Press PROGRAMMING TIMER button and change the unit number.
Press to change the unit number until the indoor unit beeps and perform the following operation according
to the number of beeps.
Number of beeps
3 short beeps.............Perform all steps from 3 to 6.
1 short beep .............Perform 3 and 6 steps.
1 long beep .............Normal state
3. Press OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button.
“0” on the left-hand of the error code blinks.
4. Press PROGRAMMING TIMER button and change the error code.
Press until the indoor unit beeps twice.
5. Press OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button.
“0” on the right-hand of the error code blinks.
6. Press PROGRAMMING TIMER button and change the error code.
Press until the indoor unit makes a long beep.
The error code is fixed when the indoor unit makes a long beep.
7. Reset of the display
Press the OPERATION MODE SELECTOR button to get the display back to the normal state.

3.4 Error Codes and Descriptions

k: ON h: OFF l: Blink
Error code Operation Error contents Reference
lamp page
Indoor Unit A0 l External protection device abnormality 184
A1 l Indoor unit PCB abnormality 185
A3 l Drain level control system (S1L) abnormality 186
A6 l Indoor fan motor (M1F) lock, overload 188
Indoor fan motor abnormality 190
A8 l Power supply voltage abnormality 196
A9 l Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality, dust clogging 199
AF k Humidifier system abnormality 201
AH l Auto grille unit error 202
AJ l Capacity determination device abnormality 203
C1 l Transmission abnormality (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 204
C4 l Indoor heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor abnormality 209
C5 l Indoor heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor abnormality 209
C6 l Combination abnormality (between indoor unit PCB and fan PCB) 210
Capacity setting abnormality 211
C9 l Suction air thermistor (R1T) abnormality 209
CA k Discharge air thermistor abnormality 209
CE k Infrared presence/floor sensor error 213
CJ k Remote controller thermistor abnormality 218
Outdoor Unit E1 l Outdoor unit main PCB abnormality 219
E2 l Current leakage detection 220
Missing of leakage detection core 221
E3 l Actuation of high pressure switch 222
E4 l Actuation of low pressure sensor 224
E5 l Inverter compressor motor lock 226
E7 l Outdoor fan motor abnormality 228
E9 l Electronic expansion valve coil abnormality 231
F3 l Discharge pipe temperature abnormality 233
F4 l Wet alarm 235
F6 l Refrigerant overcharged 236
H3 l Harness abnormality (between outdoor unit main PCB and inverter PCB) 237
H7 l Outdoor fan PCB abnormality 238
H9 l Outdoor air thermistor (R1T) abnormality 239
J3 l Discharge pipe thermistor (R21T, R22T) abnormality 239
Compressor body thermistor (R8T, R9T) abnormality
J5 l Suction pipe thermistor (R3T) abnormality 239
J7 l Subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (R5T) abnormality 239
J8 l Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor (R4T) abnormality 239
J9 l Subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor (R6T) abnormality 239
JA l High pressure sensor abnormality 241
JC l Low pressure sensor abnormality 242
L1 l Inverter PCB abnormality 243
L2 l Momentary power failure during test operation 245
L4 l Inverter radiation fin temperature rise abnormality 246
L5 l Inverter compressor instantaneous overcurrent 248
L8 l Inverter compressor overcurrent 250
L9 l Inverter compressor startup abnormality 252
LC l Transmission error between inverter PCB and outdoor unit main PCB 255
P1 l Power supply voltage imbalance 257
P3 l Reactor temperature abnormality 259
P4 l Inverter radiation fin temperature abnormality 260
PJ l Field setting after replacing outdoor unit main PCB abnormality or 262
combination of PCB abnormality

k: ON h: OFF l: Blink
Error code Operation Error contents Reference
lamp page
System U0 k Refrigerant shortage 263
U1 l Open phase 264
U2 l Power supply insufficient or instantaneous abnormality 265
U3 l Check operation not executed 267
U4 l Transmission error between indoor units and outdoor units 268
U5 l Transmission error between remote controller and indoor unit 271
U7 l Transmission error between outdoor units 272
U8 l Transmission error between main and sub remote controllers 277
U9 l Transmission error between indoor unit and outdoor unit in the same system 278
UA l Improper combination of indoor unit and outdoor unit, indoor unit and remote 279
controller
UC k Address duplication of centralized controller 282
UE l Transmission error between centralized controller and indoor unit 283
UF l System not set yet 285
UH l System abnormality, refrigerant system address undefined 286
The system operates for error codes indicated in black squares, however, be sure to check and repair.

3.5 Error Codes (Sub Codes)

If an error code like the one shown below is displayed when the navigation remote controller (BRC1E62) is in
use, make a detailed diagnosis or a diagnosis of the relevant unit referring to the attached list of detailed error
codes.
3.5.1 Indoor Unit

Troubleshooting
Error code
Description of error Description of diagnosis
A6 - 01 Fan motor locked A locked fan motor current has been detected.
Turn the fan by hand to check for the connection of
connectors.
A6 - 10 Fan overcurrent error A fan motor overcurrent has been detected.
Check for the connection of the connector between the fan
motor and the PCB for the fan. If the connection is normal,
replace the fan motor. If this still cannot solve the error,
replace the PCB for the fan.
A6 - 11 Fan position detection error An error in the detection of position of the fan motor. Check
for the connection of the connector between the fan motor
and the PCB for the fan. If the connection is normal, replace
the fan motor. If this still cannot solve the error, replace the
PCB for the fan.
A8 - 01 Power supply voltage error Check for the input voltage of the fan motor.
A9 - 01 Electronic expansion valve error There is an error in the electronic expansion valve coil or a
connector disconnected.
A9 - 02 Refrigerant leakage detection error Refrigerant leaks even if the electronic expansion valve is
closed.
Replace the electronic expansion valve.
AH - 03 Transmission error (between the self-cleaning
decoration panel and the indoor unit) Check for the connection of the harness connector between
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is the panel PCB and the indoor unit PCB.
mounted)
AH - 04 Dust detection sensor error Check for the connections of the connector X12A on the
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is panel PCB and the connectors X18A and X19A on the
mounted) sensor PCB.
AH - 05 Dust collection sign error Check for clogging with dust at the dust collection port as
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is well as in the brush unit, S-shaped pipe, and dust box.
mounted) Furthermore, check for any stains of the light receiving and
emitting parts of the infrared unit.
AH - 06 Air filter rotation error Check for anything getting in the way of rotating the filter
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is (e.g. the filter comes off or the drive gear is clogged with
mounted) foreign matter).
AH - 07 Damper rotation error The damper does not rotate normally. Check for any foreign
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is matter around the damper and for the operation of the gear
mounted) and limit switch.
AH - 08 Filter self-cleaning operation error The unit has not yet completed the filter self-cleaning
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is operation even after the lapse of specified period of time.
mounted) Check for any external noise, etc.
AH - 09 Filter self-cleaning operation start disabled error The unit has been put into a state in which the filter self-
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is cleaning operation is disabled. Check the unit for the
mounted) operating conditions.
AH - 12 Auto grille unit error It is detected that the grille does not operate properly.
(when the auto grille unit is mounted) Check whether the grille does not contact with something or
the wire does not snaggle.
AJ - 01 Capacity setting error There is an error in the capacity setting of the indoor unit
PCB.
AJ - 02 Electronic expansion valve setting error There is a fault in the setting of the gear type electronic
expansion valve/direct acting type electronic expansion
valve.
C1 - 01 Transmission error (between indoor unit PCB Check for the conditions of transmission between the indoor
and the PCB for the fan) unit PCB and the PCB for the fan.
C6 - 01 Defective combination of indoor unit PCB and the A combination of indoor unit PCB and the PCB for the fan is
PCB for the fan defective. Check whether the capacity setting adaptor is
correct and the type of the PCB for the fan is correct.
U4 - 01 Indoor-Outdoor transmission error Refer to the U4 flow chart.
UA - 13 Refrigerant type error The type of refrigerant used for the indoor unit is different
from that used for the outdoor unit.
UA - 15 Not applicable for self-cleaning decoration panel An outdoor unit is not applicable for the self-cleaning
(when the self-cleaning decoration panel is decoration panel is connected.
mounted)
As there are various combinations of indoor and outdoor units, the sub codes of A0 - A3 are not shown in this
table.

3.5.2 Outdoor Unit, System

Troubleshooting
Error code
E1 - 01 Outdoor unit PCB error Refer to the E1 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
E1 - 02 Defective outdoor unit PCB of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
E2 - 01 Earth leakage detection error (Master)
E2 - 02 Earth leakage detection error (Slave 1)
E2 - 03 Earth leakage detection error (Slave 2)
E2 - 06 Missing of earth leakage detection core Refer to the E2 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
(Master) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
E2 - 07 Missing of earth leakage detection core
(Slave 1)
E2 - 08 Missing of earth leakage detection core
(Slave 2)
E3 - 01 High pressure switch activated (Master)
E3 - 02 High pressure switch activated (Master)
E3 - 03 High pressure switch activated (Slave 1)
Refer to the E3 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
E3 - 20 High pressure switch activated (Master) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
E3 - 07 High pressure switch activated (Batch)
E3 - 13 Liquid stop valve check error (Master)
E3 - 14 Liquid stop valve check error (Slave 1)
E3 - 15 Liquid stop valve check error (Slave 2)
E4 - 01 Low pressure error (Master)
Refer to the E4 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
E4 - 02 Low pressure error (Slave 1) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
E4 - 03 Low pressure error (Slave 2)
E5 - 01 Inverter compressor M1C lock (Master)
E5 - 02 Inverter compressor M1C lock (Slave 1)
E5 - 03 Inverter compressor M1C lock (Slave 2) Refer to the E5 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
E5 - 07 Inverter compressor M2C lock (Master) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
E7 - 01 Fan motor M1F lock (Master)
Refer to the following to make a diagnosis of the fan motor of the
E7 - 02 Fan motor M2F lock (Master) relevant unit.
E7 - 05 Fan motor M1F instantaneous overcurrent (Master)
E7 - 06 Fan motor M2F instantaneous overcurrent (Master)
E7 - 09 Fan motor M1F IPM error (Master)
E7 - 10 Fan motor M2F IPM error (Master)
E7 - 13 Fan motor M1F lock (Slave 1) For fan motor lock, refer to E7-01, -02, -13, -14, -25, and -26.
E7 - 14 Fan motor M2F lock (Slave 1)
E7 - 17 Fan motor M1F instantaneous overcurrent (Slave 1)
E7 - 21 Fan motor M1F IPM error (Slave 1)
For instantaneous overcurrent, refer to E7-05, -06, -17, -18, -29,
E7 - 22 Fan motor M2F IPM error (Slave 1) and -30.
For IPM error, refer to E7-09, -10, -21, -22, -33, and -34.

Troubleshooting
Error code
E9 - 01 Electronic expansion valve coil Y1E error (Master)
E9 - 05 Electronic expansion valve coil Y1E error (Slave 1)
E9 - 28 Electronic expansion valve coil Y4E error (Slave 2) Refer to the E9 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
of the relevant electronic expansion valve of the relevant unit
E9 - 48 Electronic expansion valve overcurrent (Master) based on the Error code shown to the left.
E9 - 49 Electronic expansion valve overcurrent (Slave 1)
E9 - 50 Electronic expansion valve overcurrent (Slave 2)
E9 - 51 Electronic expansion valve fuse thermal cutting (Master)
E9 - 52 Electronic expansion valve fuse thermal cutting (Slave 1)
E9 - 53 Electronic expansion valve fuse thermal cutting (Slave 2)
E9 - 54 Defective circuit (Master)
E9 - 55 Defective circuit (Slave 1)
E9 - 56 Defective circuit (Slave 2)
F3 - 01 Discharge pipe high temperature error (Master)
F3 - 03 Discharge pipe high temperature error (Slave 1)
F3 - 05 Discharge pipe high temperature error (Slave 2) Refer to the F3 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
F3 - 20 Compressor overheat error (Master) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
F3 - 21 Compressor overheat error (Slave 1)
F3 - 22 Compressor overheat error (Slave 2)
F4 - 02 Wet alarm for inverter compressor M1C (Master)
F4 - 03 Wet alarm for inverter compressor M2C (Master)
F4 - 04 Wet alarm for inverter compressor M1C (Slave 1)
F4 - 08 Wet error for inverter compressor M1C (Master) Refer to the F4 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
F4 - 09 Wet error for inverter compressor M2C (Master)
F4 - 10 Wet error for inverter compressor M1C (Slave 1)
F4 - 14 Indoor unit failure alarm

Troubleshooting
Error code
F6 - 02 Excess refrigerant charge error Excess refrigerant charge was detected during test run.
F6 - 03 Excess refrigerant charge warning Excess refrigerant charge was detected during operation other
than test run.
H3 - 02 Connection error between main PCB and
inverter PCB 1 (Master)
inverter PCB 2 (Master)
inverter PCB 1 (Slave 1) Refer to the H3 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
H3 - 05 Connection error between main PCB and of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
inverter PCB 2 (Slave 1)
H7 - 21 Defective fan PCB for M1F (A7P) (Master)
H7 - 22 Defective fan PCB for M2F (A4P) (Master)
H7 - 23 Defective fan PCB for M1F (A7P) (Slave 1) Refer to the H7 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
H7 - 24 Defective fan PCB for M2F (A4P) (Slave 1) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
H7 - 25 Defective fan PCB for M1F (A7P) (Slave 2)
H7 - 26 Defective fan PCB for M2F (A4P) (Slave 2)
H9 - 01 Defective outdoor air thermistor (Master)
Refer to the H9 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
H9 - 02 Defective outdoor air thermistor (Slave 1) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
H9 - 03 Defective outdoor air thermistor (Slave 2)
J3 - 16 Defective discharge pipe 1 thermistor: Open
(Master)
J3 - 17 Defective discharge pipe 1 thermistor: Short
(Master)
(Master)
(Master)
(Slave 1)
(Slave 1)
(Slave 1)
(Slave 1)
(Slave 2) Refer to the J3 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
of the relevant compressor of the relevant unit based on the Error
J3 - 29 Defective discharge pipe 1 thermistor: Short code shown to the left.
(Slave 2)
(Slave 2)
(Slave 2)
J3 - 38 Defective compressor body thermistor for
M1C: Open (Master)
M1C: Short (Master)
M1C: Open (Slave 1)
M1C: Short (Slave 1)
M1C: Open (Slave 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
M2C: Open (Master)
M2C: Short (Master)
M2C: Open (Slave 1)
J3 - 50 Defective compressor body thermistor for Refer to the J3 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
M2C: Short (Slave 1) of the relevant compressor of the relevant unit based on the Error
J3 - 51 Defective compressor body thermistor for code shown to the left.
M2C: Open (Slave 2)
J3 - 56 Discharge pipe warning (Master)
J3 - 57 Discharge pipe warning (Slave 1)
J3 - 58 Discharge pipe warning (Slave 2)
J5 - 01 Defective suction pipe thermistor (Master) Refer to the J5 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
J5 - 03 Defective suction pipe thermistor (Slave 1) of the relevant thermistor of the relevant unit based on the Error
code shown to the left.
J5 - 05 Defective suction pipe thermistor (Slave 2)
J7 - 06 Defective subcooling heat exchanger liquid
pipe thermistor (Master)
Refer to the J7 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
J7 - 07 Defective subcooling heat exchanger liquid of the relevant thermistor based on the Error code shown to the
pipe thermistor (Slave 1) left.
J7 - 08 Defective subcooling heat exchanger liquid
pipe thermistor (Slave 2)
J8 - 01 Defective heat exchanger liquid pipe
thermistor (Master)
J8 - 02 Defective heat exchanger liquid pipe Refer to the J8 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
thermistor (Slave 1) of the relevant thermistor of the relevant unit based on the Error
code shown to the left.
J8 - 03 Defective heat exchanger liquid pipe
thermistor (Slave 2)
J9 - 01 Defective subcooling heat exchanger outlet
thermistor (Master)
thermistor (Slave 1)
thermistor (Slave 2) Refer to the J9 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
of the relevant thermistor based on the Error code shown to the
J9 - 08 Error detection of subcooling heat left.
exchanger outlet pipe thermistor (Master)
J9 - 09 Error detection of subcooling heat
exchanger outlet pipe thermistor (Slave 1)
J9 - 10 Error detection of subcooling heat
exchanger outlet pipe thermistor (Slave 2)
JA - 06 Defective high pressure sensor: Open
(Master)
JA - 07 Defective high pressure sensor: Short
(Master)
(Slave 1) Refer to the JA flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
JA - 09 Defective high pressure sensor: Short of the relevant sensor based on the Error code shown to the left.
(Slave 1)
(Slave 2)
JA - 11 Defective high pressure sensor: Short
(Slave 2)
JC - 06 Defective low pressure sensor: Open (Master)
JC - 07 Defective low pressure sensor: Short (Master)
JC - 08 Defective low pressure sensor: Open (Slave 1) Refer to the JC flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
JC - 09 Defective low pressure sensor: Short (Slave 1) of the relevant sensor based on the Error code shown to the left.
JC - 10 Defective low pressure sensor: Open (Slave 2)
JC - 11 Defective low pressure sensor: Short (Slave 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
L1 - 01 IPM error: Inverter compressor M1C
(Master)
L1 - 02 Defective current sensor: Inverter
compressor M1C (Master)
L1 - 03 Current offset: Inverter compressor M1C
(Master)
L1 - 04 IGBT error: Inverter compressor M1C
(Master)
L1 - 05 Jumper settings error: Inverter compressor
M1C (Master)
L1 - 07 IPM error: Inverter compressor M1C (Slave 1) The inverter PCB may be defective or a PCB other than the
L1 - 08 Defective current sensor: Inverter specified is mounted.
compressor M1C (Slave 1) Refer to the L1 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
(Slave 1)
(Slave 1)
L1 - 11 IPM error: Inverter compressor M1C (Slave 2)
compressor M1C (Slave 2)
(Slave 2)
(Slave 2)
M1C (Slave 1)
M1C (Slave 2)
L1 - 17 IPM error: Inverter compressor M2C
(Master)
(Master)
(Master)
M2C (Master)
compressor M2C (Slave 1) The inverter PCB may be defective or a PCB other than the
specified is mounted.
L1 - 24 Current offset: Inverter compressor M2C Refer to the L1 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
(Slave 1) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
(Slave 1)
M2C (Slave 1)
L1 - 36 EEPROM abnormality: Inverter compressor
M1C (Master)
M2C (Master)
M1C (Slave 1)
M2C (Slave 1)
M1C (Slave 2)
M2C (Slave 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
(Slave 2)
(Slave 2)
M2C (Slave 2)
The inverter PCB may be defective or a PCB other than the
L1 - 47 Power supply voltage abnormality: Inverter specified is mounted.
compressor M1C (Master) Refer to the L1 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
L1 - 48 Power supply voltage abnormality: Inverter of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
L1 - 49 Power supply voltage abnormality: Inverter
L2 - 01 Momentary power failure (Master)
L2 - 02 Momentary power failure (Slave 1)
L2 - 03 Momentary power failure (Slave 2) Refer to the L2 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
L2 - 04 Power ON (Master) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
L2 - 05 Power ON (Slave 1)
L2 - 06 Power ON (Slave 2)
L4 - 01 Radiation fin temperature rise: Inverter PCB
for M1C (Master)
for M1C (Slave 1)
for M1C (Slave 2)
L4 - 06 Radiation fin temperature rise: Fan M1F
(Master)
(Master)
for M2C (Master) Refer to the L4 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
L4 - 10 Radiation fin temperature rise: Inverter PCB of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
for M2C (Slave 1)
for M2C (Slave 2)
(Slave 1)
(Slave 1)
(Slave 2)
(Slave 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
L5 - 03 Current offset error (Master)
L5 - 05 Current offset error (Slave 1)
L5 - 07 Current offset error (Slave 2)
L5 - 14 Inverter compressor M2C instantaneous Refer to the L5 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
overcurrent (Master) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
L5 - 15 Inverter compressor M2C instantaneous
overcurrent (Slave 1)
L5 - 16 Inverter compressor M2C instantaneous
overcurrent (Slave 2)
L8 - 03 Inverter compressor M1C overcurrent error
(Master)
(Slave 1)
(Slave 2) Refer to the L8 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
L8 - 11 Inverter compressor M2C overcurrent error code shown to the left.
(Master)
(Slave 1)
(Slave 2)
L9 - 01 Inverter compressor M1C startup error
(Master)
(Slave 1)
(Slave 2)
(Master)
(Slave 1)
(Slave 2) Refer to the L9 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
L9 - 13 Inverter compressor M1C output open code shown to the left.
phase (Master)
L9 - 14 Inverter compressor M1C output open
phase (Slave 1)
phase (Slave 2)
phase (Master)
phase (Slave 1)
phase (Slave 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
LC - 14 Transmission error (Between outdoor units,
inverter PCB 1) (Master)
inverter PCB 1) (Slave 1)
fan PCB 1) (Master)
fan PCB 1) (Slave 1)
fan PCB 1) (Slave 2) Refer to the LC flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
LC - 24 Transmission error (Between outdoor units, of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
fan PCB 2) (Master)
inverter PCB 2) (Master)
P1 - 01 Unbalanced power supply voltage (Master)
P1 - 02 Unbalanced power supply voltage (Slave 1)
P1 - 03 Unbalanced power supply voltage (Slave 2)
P1 - 07 Inverter 2 power supply unbalanced voltage Refer to the P1 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
(Master) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
P1 - 08 Inverter 2 power supply unbalanced voltage
(Slave 1)
P1 - 09 Inverter 2 power supply unbalanced voltage
(Slave 2)
P3 - 01 Defective reactor thermistor 1 (Master:
Inverter PCB 1)
P3 - 02 Defective reactor thermistor 1 (Slave 1:
Inverter PCB 1)
Inverter PCB 1)
Inverter PCB 1)
Inverter PCB 1)
Inverter PCB 1) Refer to the P3 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
P3 - 07 Defective reactor thermistor 1 (Master: of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
Inverter PCB 2)
Inverter PCB 2)
Inverter PCB 2)
Inverter PCB 2)
Inverter PCB 2)
Inverter PCB 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
P4 - 01 Defective radiation fin thermistor (Master:
Inverter PCB 1)
P4 - 02 Defective fan M1F fin sensor (Master)
P4 - 03 Defective fan M2F fin sensor (Master)
P4 - 04 Defective radiation fin thermistor (Slave 1:
Inverter PCB 1)
Inverter PCB 1)
P4 - 06 Defective radiation fin thermistor (Master: Refer to the P4 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
Inverter PCB 2) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
Inverter PCB 2)
Inverter PCB 2)
P4 - 15 Defective fan M1F fin sensor (Slave 1)
PJ - 04 Incorrect type of inverter PCB 1 (Master)
PJ - 05 Incorrect type of inverter PCB 1 (Slave 1)
PJ - 09 Incorrect type of fan PCB 1 (Master)
PJ - 10 Incorrect type of fan PCB 2 (Master)
PJ - 12 Incorrect type of inverter PCB 2 (Master) Refer to the PJ flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
PJ - 13 Incorrect type of inverter PCB 2 (Slave 1) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
PJ - 15 Incorrect type of fan PCB 1 (Slave 1)
U0 - 05 Refrigerant shortage warning (cooling)
U0 - 06 Refrigerant shortage warning (heating)
U0 - 08 Refrigerant shortage (Master) Refer to the U0 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
U0 - 09 Refrigerant shortage (Slave 1)
U0 - 10 Refrigerant shortage (Slave 2)
U1 - 16 Open phase for power supply (Master)
U1 - 17 Open phase for power supply (Slave 1)
U1 - 18 Open phase for power supply (Slave 2) Refer to the U1 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
U1 - 19 Hz error for power supply (Master) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
U1 - 20 Hz error for power supply (Slave 1)
U1 - 21 Hz error for power supply (Slave 2)
U2 - 01 Shortage of inverter power supply voltage (Master)
U2 - 08 Shortage of inverter power supply voltage (Slave 1)
U2 - 11 Shortage of inverter power supply voltage (Slave 2) Refer to the U2 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
U2 - 22 Shortage of inverter 2 power supply voltage (Master) of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
U2 - 25 Shortage of inverter 2 power supply voltage (Slave 1)
U2 - 28 Shortage of inverter 2 power supply voltage (Slave 2)

Troubleshooting
Error code
U3 - 02 Initial installation alarm / Test operation
failed due to indoor unit error
U3 - 03 Test operation not conducted
U3 - 04 Abnormal end of test operation
U3 - 05 Premature end of test operation during
initial transmission error – check indoor unit
error U4 / U9
Refer to the U3 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
U3 - 06 Premature end of test operation during of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
normal transmission error
U3 - 07 Premature end of test operation due to
transmission error
U3 - 08 Premature end of test operation due to
transmission error of all units
U3 - 10 System refrigerant auto charge operation
not yet executed
U4 - 01 Transmission error between indoor and
outdoor units Refer to the U4 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
U4 - 03 Transmission error between indoor unit and of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
system: check indoor unit error
U7 - 01 Error when external control adaptor for
outdoor unit is installed
U7 - 02 Alarm when external control adaptor for
outdoor unit is installed
U7 - 03 Transmission error between master and
slave 1 units
U7 - 04 Transmission error between master and Refer to the U7 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
slave 2 units of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
U7 - 05 Multi system error
U7 - 06 Error in address settings of slave 1 and 2
U7 - 07 Connection of four or more outdoor units in
the same system
U7 - 11 Error in indoor unit connection capacity for
test operation
U9 - 01 Other indoor units and outdoor unit Refer to the U9 flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
abnormality of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
UA - 00 TSS plus unit field settings error, CT
address duplication warning
UA - 03 Connection of excessive indoor units
UA - 17 Connection of excess indoor units
UA - 18 Connection of incorrect models of indoor Refer to the UA flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
units of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
UA - 20 Improper combination of outdoor units

UA - 21 Wrong connection
UA - 31 Multi system combination error
UF - 01 Wrong wiring check error Refer to the UF flowchart of each manual and make a diagnosis
UF - 05 Defective stop valve for test operation of the relevant unit based on the Error code shown to the left.
UH - 01 Wiring error Refer to the UH flowchart of each manual.

Troubleshooting by Error Code SiMT341715E
4. Troubleshooting by Error Code

4.1 External Protection Device Abnormality
Error Code A0
Applicable All indoor unit models
Models
Method of Error Detects open or short circuit between external input terminals in indoor unit.
Detection
Error Decision An open circuit occurs between external input terminals with the remote controller set for
Conditions external ON/OFF input.
Supposed Activation of external protection device

Causes Improper field setting
Defective indoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Caution connectors, or parts may be damaged.
External
protection device
is connected to terminals YES
T1 and T2 of the indoor Actuation of external protection
unit terminal device.
block.
NO
Check the setting state of the
external ON/OFF input by
remote controller.
ON/OFF
input from
outside (mode No.
12, first code No. 1) has YES
been set to external protection Change the second code No. to
device input (second 01 or 02.
code No. 03) by
remote
controller.
NO
Replace the indoor unit main
PCB (A1P).

SiMT341715E Troubleshooting by Error Code
4.2 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Error Code A1
Models
Method of Error Data from EEPROM is checked.

Detection
Error Decision Data cannot be correctly received from the EEPROM

Conditions EEPROM: Type of nonvolatile memory. Maintains memory contents even when the power
supply is turned OFF.
Supposed Defective indoor unit PCB

Causes External factor (Noise etc.)
Troubleshooting
Turn the power supply OFF,

then the power ON again.
Does the YES

system return to The indoor unit main
normal? PCB (A1P) is normal.
External factor other than
NO error (for example, noise
etc.).
Replace the indoor unit
main PCB (A1P).

4.3 Drain Level Control System Abnormality

Error Code A3
Applicable FXFSQ, FXFQ, FXZQ, FXUQ, FXCQ, FXEQ, FXKQ, FXDQ-PDVE(4), FXDQ-PDV2S, FXDQ-
Models NDVE(4), FXDQ-NDV2S, FXDQ-SP, FXSQ, FXMQ-PA, FXMQ-M (Option), FXHQ (Option)
Method of Error By float switch OFF detection

Detection
Error Decision Float switch goes OFF when the conditions for water level rise are not met
Conditions
Supposed 220-240 V power supply is not provided.

Causes Defective float switch or short circuit connector
Defective drain pump
Drain clogging, upward slope, etc.
Defective indoor unit main PCB
Loose connection of connector
Troubleshooting
Is power supply NO
220-240 V provided? Provide 220-240 V power
supply.
YES
The
float switch is NO A short circuit NO
connected to the indoor connector is Connect either a short circuit
unit PCB. (∗1) connected. (∗1) connector or float switch and
turn ON again.
YES YES
The
float switch Becomes
contact is forming a YES normal when the NO
short circuit (continuity check connector (∗1) of the Replace the indoor unit main
with the connector (∗1) indoor unit PCB is PCB (A1P).
disconnected) short circuited.
NO YES
Defective connection of
connector.
Water builds up NO The float switch NO

in the drain pan. functions normally. Replace the float switch (S1L).
YES YES Modify the float switch's

connection and turn ON again.
The
drain pump NO
is connected to Connect the drain pump and
the indoor unit turn ON again.
PCB. (∗2)
YES
A

The drain
pump works when YES
the power supply is reset for Check the drain piping for
the indoor unit. clogging or upward slope, etc.
NO
The
voltage
of drain pump
terminals (∗2) is in NO
accordance to the criteria Replace the indoor unit main
(∗3) (within 5 minutes of PCB (A1P).
resetting the
power
supply).
YES
Replace the drain pump or
check for dirt, etc.
Note:
∗1: Float switch (S1L) / ∗2: Drain pump (M1P) ∗3: Drain pump (M1P)
Model short circuit connector connector voltage Note
FXFSQ-A X15A X25A 13 VDC –

FXFQ-A X15A X25A 13 VDC –
FXZQ-M X8A X25A 220-240 VAC –
FXUQ-A X15A X25A 13 VDC –
FXCQ-M X8A Y1, Y2 220-240 VAC –
FXEQ-A X15A X25A 13 VDC –
FXKQ-MA X8A Y1, Y2 220-240 VAC –
FXDQ-PDVE(4) X8A X5A 220-240 VAC –
FXDQ-PDV2S X8A X5A 220-240 VAC –
FXDQ-NDVE(4) X8A X5A 220-240 VAC –
FXDQ-NDV2S X8A X5A 220-240 VAC –
FXDQ-SP X8A X25A 220-240 VAC –
FXSQ-PA X15A X25A 13 VDC –
FXMQ-PA X15A X25A 13 VDC –
FXMQ-M X8A Y1, Y2 220-240 VAC Option
FXHQ-MA X8A X25A 220-240 VAC Option

4.4 Indoor Fan Motor Lock, Overload

Error Code A6
Applicable FXUQ, FXEQ, FXSQ20-125PA, FXMQ20-40PA, FXAQ
Models
Method of Error Abnormal fan revolutions are detected by a signal output from the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision The fan revolutions do not increase.

Conditions
Supposed Broken wires in, short circuit of, or disconnection of connectors from the fan motor harness
Causes Defective fan motor
(Broken wires or defective insulation)
Abnormal signal output from the fan motor (defective circuit)
Instantaneous disturbance in the power supply voltage
Fan motor lock
(Due to motor or external causes)
The fan does not rotate due to foreign matter blocking the fan.
Disconnection of the connector between the high-power PCB and the low-power PCB:
FXSQ20-125PA, FXMQ20-40PA
Troubleshooting Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting
Turn OFF the power

supply, and then wait for
a period of 10 minutes.
Are there
any foreign matter YES
Remove the foreign matter.
around the fan?
NO
Is the
connector properly NO
connected to the indoor Properly connect the connector.
unit main PCB?
(∗1)
YES
By
disconnecting the
connector, the fan can be NO Replace the fan motor (M1F).
lightly rotated by
hand.
YES
Disconnect the connector

from the fan motor, and then
make measurement of
resistance between pins.(∗2)
Is the
resistance
between the pins less than NO
the judgement PCB (A1P).
criteria?
YES
Replace the fan motor and the
indoor unit main PCB (A1P).

Notes: ∗1: Check the following connectors.

Model Connector
FXUQ-A X20A, Relay connector
FXEQ-A X20A
FXSQ20-125PA X8A
FXMQ20-40PA X8A
FXAQ-P X20A
∗2. Resistance measuring points and judgment criteria.
1 — —
1 White FG 2 White PG
2 Orange Vsp 3 Orange Vsp
3 Brown Vcc 4 Brown Vcc
4 Blue GND 5 Blue GND
5 — — 6 — —
6 — — 7 — —
7 Red Vdc 8 Red Vm
6 White PG
Judgment criteria
5 Orange Vsp Measuring point Criteria
FG-GND 1 MΩ or more
4 Brown Vcc
Vsp-GND 100 kΩ or more
3 Blue GND Vcc-GND 100 Ω or more
Vdc-GND 100 kΩ or more
2 — —
1 Red Vdc

4.5 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality

4.5.1 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality (FXDQ, FXHQ)
Error Code A6
Applicable FXDQ, FXHQ
Models
Method of Error This error is detected if there is no revolution detection signal output from the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When no revolutions can be detected even at the maximum output voltage to the fan
Conditions
Supposed Defective indoor fan motor

Causes Broken wires
Defective contact
Troubleshooting
Are the
X4A and X27A NO
Properly connect the connectors.
connectors securely
connected? (At this time, check for any
defective connector contact or
YES broken wires.)
Is the
power of
12 VDC
supplied between
the Pins 1 and 3 when YES
the X27A is disconnected Check the indoor fan motor and
and the power the wiring circuits of the fan
supply turns motor.
ON?
NO

PCB (A1P).
Note: ∗1. Check on connector of fan motor (Power supply cable)

Turn OFF the power supply.
Measure the resistance between phases of U, V, W at the motor side connectors (three-core
wire) to check that the values are balanced and there is no short circuiting, while connector
or relay connector is disconnected.
Judgment
Red Model
Black-Red Black-White
FXDQ20-32PD 71.0 Ω ± 10% 73.5 Ω ± 10%
White FXDQ40ND 71.0 Ω ± 10% 73.5 Ω ± 10%
FXDQ50/63ND 39.2 Ω ± 10% 41.3 Ω ± 10%
FXDQ20-32SPV1 71.0 Ω ± 10% 73.5 Ω ± 10%
Black FXDQ40-63SPV1 39.2 Ω ± 10% 41.3 Ω ± 10%
FXHQ32/63MA 71.0 Ω ± 10% 73.5 Ω ± 10%
FXHQ100MA 53.5 Ω ± 10% 31.6 Ω ± 10%

4.5.2 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality (FXSQ140P, FXMQ50-140P)

Error Code A6
Applicable FXSQ140PA
Models FXMQ50-140PA
Method of Error Error from the current flow on the fan PCB
Detection Error from the RPM of the fan motor in operation
Error from the position signal of the fan motor
Error from the current flow on the fan PCB when the fan motor starting operation
Error Decision An overcurrent flows.

Conditions The RPM is less than a certain level for 6 seconds.
A position error in the fan rotor continues for 5 seconds or more.
Supposed Clogging of a foreign matter

Causes Disconnection of the fan motor connectors (X1A and X2A)
Disconnection of the connectors between the indoor unit main PCB (A1P) and fan PCB
(A2P)
Defective fan PCB (A2P)
Defective fan motor

Troubleshooting
Turn off the power and wait for

10 minutes.
There is a YES
foreign matter around Remove the foreign matter.
the fan.
NO
The fan
motor connectors (X1A YES
and X2A) of the fan PCB (A2P) Connect the connector
are disconnected. properly.
NO
The connectors
between the indoor unit YES
PCB (A1P) and the fan Connect the connector
PCB (A2P) are properly.
disconnected.
NO
The fuse (F3U, white) NO

on the fan PCB (A2P) Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
has no continuity.
YES
The fan
can be moved lightly
by hand after the fan motor NO
Replace the indoor fan
connector of the fan PCB
motor.
(A2P) is removed.
YES
The
resistance
between the power wire YES
terminals of the fan motor and Replace the indoor fan
motor frame (metal part) motor.
is 1 MΩ or
below.
NO
Remove the power wire

connector from the fan motor
and measure the resistance
between U and V, V and W, and
W and U phases (∗1).

Troubleshooting
A
The resistance YES

among U, V, and W are unbalanced Replace the indoor fan
or short circuited. motor.
NO
Remove the signal connector

from the fan motor and check
the resistance (∗2).
Between VCC and GND YES

terminals, and between GND Replace the indoor fan
and HW, HV, or HU terminals are motor.
short-circuited.
NO
Turn on the power.
The HAP
lamp of the indoor
unit PCB (A1P) blinks and YES
Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
the HAP lamp of the fan
PCB (A2P) is
off.
NO
Replace the indoor fan
motor.
Notes: ∗1. Measurement of power wire connector.

Remove the X1A connector from the fan PCB (A2P) and measure the resistance between
the U and V, V and W, and W and U phases of the motor connector (with five conductors)
and check that each phase are balanced (within a permissible dispersion range of ±20%).
∗2. Measurement of signal wire connector.
Remove the X2A connector and measure the resistance between GND and VCC, HW, HV, or
HU terminals of the motor connector (with five conductors).
Connector power wire use (X1A) Connector signal wire use (X2A)
5 Red U 5 Gray GND
4 — 4 Pink Vcc
3 White V 3 Orange Hw
2 — 2 Blue HV
1 Black W 1 Yellow HU

4.5.3 Indoor Fan Motor Abnormality (FXFSQ, FXFQ)

Error Code A6-10
Applicable FXFSQ, FXFQ
Models
Method of Error Detection from the current flow on the fan PCB (A1P)
Detection Detection from the rotation speed of the fan motor in operation
Detection from the position signal of the fan motor
Detection from the current flow on the fan PCB when the fan motor starting operation
Error Decision An overcurrent flows

Conditions The rotation speed is less than a certain level for 6 seconds.
A position error in the fan rotor continues for 5 seconds or more.
Supposed Clogged foreign matter

Causes Disconnection of fan motor connectors
Fan motor lock
Defective fan motor
Troubleshooting
Caution Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors,
or parts may be damaged.
Turn OFF the power supply and
wait for 10 minutes.
There is a foreign YES

matter around the fan. Remove the foreign matter.
NO
The fan motor

connector (∗1) is connected to NO
the indoor unit main
Connect the connector correctly.
PCB (A1P).
YES
It is
possible to rotate
the fan manually when
the fan motor connector is NO
disconnected from the indoor
Replace the fan motor.
unit main PCB (A1P).
YES
Resistance
between UVW of fan motor is YES
unbalanced, or short-
circuited.
NO
Turn ON the power supply and check
the HAP lamp on the indoor unit
main PCB (A1P).

The HAP lamp on NO

the indoor unit main PCB is Replace the indoor unit main
blinking. PCB (A1P).
YES
∗1 Check also if the relay connector between the indoor unit main PCB and the fan motor are
correctly connected.

4.6 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality

Error Code A8
Applicable FXMQ20-140PA
Models
Method of Error Error is detected by checking the input voltage of the fan motor.
Detection
Error Decision When the input voltage of fan motor is 150 V or less, or 386 V or more.
Conditions
Supposed Defective power supply voltage.

Causes Defective connection on signal line.
Defective wiring.
Instantaneous power failure, others.
Troubleshooting
Check the condition
of the power supply.
(1) Check if power supply
voltage is 220-240 V
± 10%.
(2) Check if there is power
open phase or
defective wiring.
(3) Check if power supply
voltage unbalance is
within 6 V.
There
are problems on YES
the condition of power Correct any fault.
supply described
above.
NO
A8 YES
Reoccurrence of Check and correct each wiring.
error.
NO
It is possible to have external

factor, such as brownout and
instantaneous power failure.

4.7 Power Supply Voltage Abnormality

Error Code A8-01
Applicable FXFSQ, FXFQ-A
Models
Method of Error This error is detected by checking the voltage status with the microcomputer.
Detection
Error Decision Overvoltage or voltage drop is detected on the fan driver.

Conditions
Supposed Defective connection of power supply connector

Causes Defective indoor unit PCB (A1P)
External factors (e.g. noise)

Troubleshooting
Caution Be sure to turn off the power switch before connecting or disconnecting connectors, or parts may be damaged.
Check the condition of the power

supply.
Check if power supply voltage is
220-240 V±10%.
There are
problems YES
on the condition of power Correct any fault.
supply described
above.
NO
Is the
X27A connector on NO
the main PCB properly Properly connect the connector.
connected?
YES
Is the
harness YES
connecting the X27A and the Replace the harness.
terminal block (X2M)
disconnected?
NO
Is there any YES

external factor such as Remove the external factor.
noise?
NO
Turn OFF the power once and turn
ON again.
↓
Start operation by remote
controller.
Does the error NO

A8 reoccur? Normal.
YES
Replace the indoor unit PCB
(A1P).

4.8 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality, Dust

Clogging
Error Code A9, A9-02
Models
Method of Error Electronic expansion valve coil conditions are checked via micro-computer.
Detection The electronic expansion valve main body is checked for dust clogging via micro-computer.
Error Decision Pin input for electronic expansion valve coil is abnormal when initializing micro-computer.
Conditions Either of the following conditions is seen/caused/occurs while the unit stops operation.
z Temperature of suction air (R1T) – temperature of liquid pipe of heat exchanger (R2T) > 8°C.
z Temperature of liquid pipe of heat exchanger (R2T) shows fixed degrees or below.
Supposed Defective electronic expansion valve coil

Causes Defective indoor unit main PCB
Defective relay cables
Troubleshooting
NO
Power is supplied. Replace the electronic expansion
valve main body.
YES
NO
valve is connected to Shut the power supply OFF after
X5A/X7A of indoor connection and then restart.
unit PCB.
YES
Check (∗1)
of electronic NO
expansion valve coil Replace the electronic expansion
indicates normal. valve coil.
YES
Relay cables short YES

circuit or Replace the relay cables.
disconnected.
NO
When restarting the operation

after shutting the power supply
OFF does not work, replace the
indoor unit main PCB (A1P).

Note: ∗1. How to check the electronic expansion valve coil

Remove the connector for electronic expansion valve (X7A) from PCB. Measure the
resistance value between pins and check the continuity to judge the condition.
The normal products will show the following conditions:
Orange (1) White (1)

φ1 φ1
Gray (6) M Red (5) M
φ3 φ3
Yellow (3) Orange (3)
φ2 φ4 φ2 φ4
Red Black Yellow Brown Blue

(2) (4) (2) (6) (4)
(1) Orange (1) White
(2) Red (2) Yellow
(3) Yellow (3) Orange
(4) Black (4) Blue
(5) — (5) Red
(6) Gray (6) Brown
(1)-(2): No continuity (1)-(2): No continuity

(1)-(3): 300 Ω (1)-(3): 300 Ω
(1)-(6): 150 Ω (1)-(5): 150 Ω
(2)-(4): 300 Ω (2)-(4): 300 Ω
(2)-(6): 150 Ω (2)-(6): 150 Ω
For FXFSQ, FXFQ
Orange (1)
φ1
Gray (6) M
φ3
Yellow (3)
φ2 φ4
Red Gray Black

(2) (6) (4)
(1) Orange
(2) Red
(3) Yellow
(4) Black
(5) —
(6) Gray
(1)-(2): No continuity
(1)-(3): 92 Ω
(1)-(6): 46 Ω
(2)-(4): 92 Ω
(2)-(6): 42 Ω

4.9 Humidifier System Abnormality

Error Code AF
Applicable FXFSQ, FXFQ, FXZQ, FXUQ, FXCQ, FXEQ, FXKQ, FXDQ-PDVE(4), FXVQ-PDV2S, FXDQ-
Models NDVE(4), FXDQ-NDV2S, FXDQ-SP, FXSQ, FXMQ-PA, FXMQ-M (Option), FXHQ (Option)
Method of Error Water leakage from the humidifier system is detected based on float switch ON/OFF operation
Detection while the compressor is not in operation.
Error Decision The float switch changes from ON to OFF while the compressor is not in operation.
Conditions ∗ Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed Humidifier unit (optional accessory) leaking

Causes Defective drain piping (upward slope, etc.)
Troubleshooting

Field drain
piping has a defect such YES
Modify the drain piping.
as upward sloping.
NO
A
humidifier unit YES
(optional accessory) is installed Check if the humidifier unit is
on the indoor unit. leaking.
NO
Defective indoor unit main
PCB (A1P).

4.10 Auto Grille Unit Error

Error code AH-12
Applicable FXFSQ (when auto grille panel BYCQ125EASF is installed)
Models FXFQ (when auto grille panel BYCQ125EASF is installed)
Method of Error This error is determined when an abnormal signal from the auto grille kit is detected.
Detection
Error Decision Any of the following conditions is established while the grille is elevating.
Conditions The storage detection limit switch does not detect anything for a prescribed time while the
grille is moving upward.
The position detection limit switch does not detect anything for a prescribed time while the
grille is moving upward.
The position detection limit switch detects a position for less than one second while the grille
is moving downward.
Supposed A large load on the grille

Causes Tangled wire
Defective motor
Defective limit switch
Troubleshooting
Is there any YES

abnormality on appearance of Check the items below.
the grille? • The grille is elevating
while tilted in a horizontal
NO direction.
• The grille is caught by
something.
• The grille is not mounted.
→ After correcting any of
the items above,
perform elevating
operation again.
A large load YES
is applied to the grille. Eliminate the load on the
grille.
→ Perform elevating
NO operation again.
YES
A wire is tangled. Correct the winding of wire.
NO
YES
Is the drive unit normal? Normal.
NO
Check the limit switch,
gear, motor of the drive
unit.

4.11 Capacity Determination Device Abnormality

Error Code AJ
Models
Method of Error Capacity is determined according to resistance of the capacity setting adaptor and the memory
Detection inside the IC memory on the indoor unit PCB, and whether the value is normal or abnormal is
determined.
Error Decision The capacity code is not saved to the PCB, and the capacity setting adaptor is not connected.
Conditions A capacity that does not exist for that unit is set.
Supposed The capacity setting adaptor was not installed.

Causes Defective indoor unit PCB
Troubleshooting
The indoor unit PCB NO

was replaced with a Replace the indoor unit main
spare PCB. PCB (A1P).
YES
The
capacity setting
adaptor need to be NO
installed when Replace the indoor unit main
replacing the PCB (A1P).
PCB.
YES Install a capacity setting adaptor.

4.12 Transmission Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB

and Fan PCB)
Error Code C1
Applicable FXSQ, FXMQ20-140PA
Models
Method of Error Transmission conditions between the indoor unit main PCB (A1P) and fan PCB (A2P) are
Detection checked via micro-computer.
Error Decision When normal transmission is not carried out for a certain duration.
Conditions
Supposed Defective connection of the connector between indoor unit main PCB (A1P) and fan PCB
Causes (A2P)
Defective indoor unit main PCB (A1P)
Defective fan PCB (A2P)
External factor, such as instantaneous power failure

Troubleshooting

Is the
connector between
indoor unit PCB (A1P) and fan NO
Connect the connector accurately.
PCB (A2P) accurately
connected? (∗1)
YES
Confirm the condition of
transmission on indoor unit
PCB using field setting mode.
(∗2)
Under
above field setting NO
mode, second code PCB (A1P).
No. is 01.
YES
Connect the connector X70A

and turn ON the power again.
C1 YES
Reoccurrence Replace the fan PCB (A2P).
of error.
NO
Continue the operation (It is

possible to have a cause, such
as instantaneous power failure).
Notes: ∗1. Pull out and insert the connector once and check it is absolutely connected.
∗2. Method to check transmission part of indoor unit main PCB.
(1) Turn OFF the power and remove the connector X70A of indoor unit main PCB (A1P).
(2) Short circuit X70A.
(3) After turning ON the power, check below numbers under field setting from remote
controller. (Confirmation: Second code No. at the condition of first code No. 21 on mode
No. 41)
↓
Determination 01: Normal
Other than 01: Transmission error on indoor unit main PCB
∗ After confirmation, turn OFF the power, take off the short circuit and connect X70A back to
original condition.


Error Code C1-01
Models
Method of Error Check the condition of transmission using microcomputer.

Detection
Error Decision Error is decided when transmission has been lost for 15 seconds and the error code is
Conditions displayed on the remote controller 60 seconds later.
Supposed Defective connection of the transmission connector (X70A)

Causes Defective indoor unit main PCB
External factor such as noise
Troubleshooting
Is the
connector X70A on the NO
indoor unit main PCB Connect the connector correctly.
connected correctly?
YES
Is there any YES

noise other than
failure?
NO
Turn OFF the power supply and
then turn it ON again.
↓
Put the unit into operation with the
remote controller.
Error is NO
displayed again. Normal.
YES
Check the indoor unit main PCB
(A1P).

4.14 Transmission Error (between indoor unit PCB and Auto

Grille Control PCB)
Error Code C1-06
Applicable FXFSQ (when auto grille panel BYCQ125EASF is installed)
Models FXFQ (when auto grille panel BYCQ125EASF is installed)
Method of Error The status of communication between the indoor unit PCB (X70A) and the auto grille control
Detection PCB (X12A) is checked with the microcomputer.
Error Decision When transmission communication between the indoor unit PCB and the auto grille control PCB
Conditions is not normally performed for a certain period or time or more.
Supposed Defective connection of the transmission communication connector between the indoor unit
Causes PCB and the auto grille control PCB
Defective auto grille control PCB

Troubleshooting
Is the
X70A connector on the NO
indoor unit PCB properly Properly connect the connector.
connected?
YES
Is the X12A
connector on the auto grille NO
Properly connect the connector.
control PCB properly
connected?
YES
Is the harness YES

disconnected? Replace the harness.
NO
Is there any YES

noise?
NO
Turn OFF the power once and turn
ON again.
↓
Perform grille operation by wired
remote controller.
Is
"Auto grille
elevation operation" NO
displayed in the remote Check the indoor unit PCB and
controller menu? the auto grille control PCB.
YES
Can
the target unit be NO
Check the indoor unit PCB and
selected?
the auto grille control PCB.
YES
Normal.

4.15 Thermistor Abnormality

Error Code C4, C5, C9, CA
Applicable C4, C5, C9: All indoor unit models
Models CA: FXVQ models only
Method of Error The error is determined by the temperature detected by the thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision The thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is running.
Conditions
Supposed Defective thermistor

Disconnection of connector
Troubleshooting
Remove the thermistor from

the indoor unit PCB. Then,
insert the connector again.
Is the thermistor YES

normal? Normal (The error is caused by
defective contact.)
NO
Remove the thermistor from
the indoor unit PCB, and then
make resistance measurement
of the thermistor using a
multimeter.
CHECK 11 NO
5 to 90 kΩ Replace the thermistor.
YES
PCB (A1P).
Note: Error code and thermistor

Error Code Thermistor Symbol
C4 Indoor heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor R2T
C5 Indoor heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor R3T
C9 Suction air thermistor R1T
CA Indoor heat exchanger outlet thermistor R4T
CHECK 11 Refer to page 295.

4.16 Combination Abnormality (between Indoor Unit PCB and

Fan PCB)
Error Code C6
Applicable FXSQ, FXMQ20-140PA
Models
Method of Error Transmission conditions with the fan PCB (A2P) are checked using the indoor unit PCB (A1P).
Detection
Error Decision Fan PCB (A2P) communication data is determined to be incorrect.

Conditions
Supposed Defective fan PCB (A2P)

Causes Defective connection of capacity setting adaptor
Field setting error
Troubleshooting
Does the
fan PCB part No. NO
match that of the spare Replace it with the correct
parts list? fan PCB (A2P).
YES
Has the
indoor unit main PCB NO After establishing
(A1P) been replaced with
a spare PCB? transmission for indoor and
outdoor, diagnose the
operation again.
YES
Was the
correct capacity
setting adaptor installed NO
Install the correct capacity
when replacing it with setting adaptor.
a spare PCB?
YES
After establishing
transmission for indoor and
outdoor, diagnose the
operation again.

4.17 Capacity Setting Abnormality

Error Code C6-01
Models
Method of Error This error is detected by checking communication between the PCB (A1P) and the fan
Detection microcomputer.
Error Decision Based on the communication data, decide whether the combination of capacity setting and the
Conditions type of fan driver is correct.
Supposed Defective connection of the capacity setting adaptor

Causes Wrong field setting
Troubleshooting
Is the
NO indoor unit PCB (A1P)
replaced by the spare PCB?
YES
Is a
proper capacity
setting adaptor installed NO Install a proper capacity
when replaced by the setting adaptor.
space PCB?
YES
After transmission between

the indoor and the outdoor
PCBs is established, perform
operation again and then
perform diagnosis again.

4.18 Indoor Unit PCB Abnormality

Error Code C6-05
Models
Method of Error This error is detected by checking the current sensor value.
Detection
Error Decision When an abnormal signal is detected at the start of operation of the fan motor.
Conditions
Supposed Disconnection of the connector of the fan motor lead wire

Causes Defective fan motor (Broken wires or defective insulation)
Defective PCB (A1P)
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply, and then

wait for a period of 10 minutes.
Is the fan motor

NO
connector (X901A) connected Properly connect the connector.
properly?
YES
Resistances
between UVW phases of
YES
the fan motor are imbalanced, or Replace the fan motor.
there is a short circuit
between UVW.
NO
Replace the indoor unit PCB

(A1P).

4.19 Infrared Presence/Floor Sensor Error

Error Code CE
Applicable FXFSQ
Models
Method of Error The contents of a failure vary with the detailed error code. Check the code and proceed with the
Detection flowchart.
Error Decision Error is detected based on sensor output signals

Conditions
Supposed Defective or disconnected infrared presence sensor connector: CE-01

Causes Defective infrared floor sensor (Temperature compensation circuit disconnection): CE-02
Defective infrared floor sensor (Temperature compensation short circuit): CE-03
Defective infrared floor sensor element: CE-04
Troubleshooting
Error type varies according

to error code. Check the
error code and take the
following steps.
Error code
See diagnosis procedure 1.
CE-01
Error code
CE-02
Error code
CE-03
Error code
CE-04

Troubleshooting
Diagnosis procedure 1
Infrared presence sensor
error (Error code CE-01)
Is the
connection
of the connentor
on infrared presence NO
sensor PCB (A4P) and Connect the connector correctly.
the connector X2A
on A2P
normal?
YES
Is the
connection of the NO
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared presence sensor output; refer to

sensor and address data No. 22-25.
Displays
15 by the above NO
Normal.
verification method.
YES
Turn off the power and then reconnect.
Displays CE-01
again or 15 for NO
Normal.
sensor and
address data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

Troubleshooting
Infrared floor sensor error
(Error code CE-02)
Is the
connection
of the connentor
on infrared floor NO
sensor PCB (A3P) and Connect the connector correctly.
the connector X2A
on A2P
normal?
YES
Is the
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared floor sensor output; refer to sensor

and address data No. 26.
Displays
"--" by the above NO
Normal.
verification
method.
YES
Displays CE-02
again or "--" for NO
Normal.
sensor and
address data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

Troubleshooting
(Error code CE-03)
Is the
connection
of the connentor
on infrared floor sensor NO
PCB (A3P) and the Connect the connector correctly.
connector X2A on
A2P normal?
YES
Is the
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared floor sensor output; refer to

sensor and address data No. 26.
Displays
Normal.
verification
method.
YES
Displays
CE-03 again or "--" NO
for sensor and address Normal.
data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

Troubleshooting
(Error code CE-04)
Is the
connection
of the connentor
on infrared floor sensor NO
PCB (A3P) and the Connect the connector correctly.
connector X2A on
A2P normal?
YES
Is the
sensor connector
normal?
YES
Check infrared floor sensor output; refer to

sensor and address data No. 26.
Displays
Normal.
verification
method.
YES
Displays
CE-04 again or "--" NO
for sensor and address Normal.
data.
YES
Replace the sensor.

4.20 Remote Controller Thermistor Abnormality

Error Code CJ
Models
Method of Error Error detection is carried out by the temperature detected by the remote controller thermistor.
Detection (See note.)
Error Decision When the remote controller thermistor becomes disconnected or shorted while the unit is
Conditions running.
∗ Error code is displayed but the system operates continuously.
Supposed Defective room temperature thermistor in remote controller

Causes Defective remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Clear the error code history.

(While in inspection mode,
press and hold the “ON/OFF”
button for a period of 4
seconds or more.)
Is CJ YES
displayed on the remote Replace the remote
controller? controller.
NO
External factor other than
equipment error.
(for example, noise etc.)
Note: ∗1: How to delete “history of error codes”.

Press the “ON/ OFF” button for 4 seconds and more while the error code is displayed in the
inspection mode.

4.21 Outdoor Unit Main PCB Abnormality

Error Code E1
Applicable All outdoor unit models
Models
Method of Error Abnormality is detected under the communication conditions in the hardware section between
Detection the indoor unit and outdoor unit.
Error Decision When the communication conditions in the hardware section between the indoor unit and the
Conditions outdoor unit are not normal.
Supposed Defective outdoor unit main PCB

Causes Disconnection of the inside/outside relay wires
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power once and

turn ON again.
YES External factor other than

Return to normal?
error (for example, noise
etc.).
NO
Check
if inside /
outside relay wires of YES
Connect the inside/outside
outdoor unit main PCB relay wires correctly.
is disconnected.
NO
Replace the outdoor unit

main PCB (A1P).

4.22 Current Leakage Detection

Error Code E2
Sub code: -01 to -03

Models
Method of Error Current leakage is detected in the earth leakage detection circuit. Error is detected on the
Detection outdoor unit main PCB.
Error Decision When leakage current is detected.

Conditions
Supposed Earth fault

Causes Defective wiring with the current sensor
Temporary liquid back or refrigerant stagnation
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply,

and then disconnect the
compressor lead wire.
Check
if the
connection to the NO
Correct the wiring.
current sensor (T1A) is
correctly wired.
YES
Defective compressor YES

Replace the compressor.
insulation
RXQ6-14A: M1C
RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C
NO
Defective
insulation of parts YES
Replace the corresponding
other than the parts.
compressor
NO
Reconnect the wires, and
then reconnect the unit to the Normal
power supply. (Keep operating)
It is possibly caused by
temporary oil return or
refrigerant stagnation.
(Perform maintenance
during long-term
shutdown such as a
power outage.)

4.23 Missing of Leakage Detection Core

Error Code E2
Sub code: -06 to -08

Models
Method of Error Detect error according to whether or not there is continuity across the connector (X101A).
Detection
Error Decision When no current flows at the time of turning ON the power supply.
Conditions
Supposed Disconnection of connector (X101A)

Causes Wiring disconnection
Defective outdoor unit main PCB
Troubleshooting

and then disconnect
compressor leads.
Is the system reset to YES The error is considered to have

normal? resulted from external factors
other than failures (e.g. noise).
NO
Ensure the unit

corresponding to the error
code E2 in monitor mode.
E02-06: Master
E02-07: Slave 1
E02-08: Slave 2
Is X101A connected? NO Properly connect the connector.
YES
Replace the outdoor unit main

PCB (A1P).

4.24 Actuation of High Pressure Switch

Error Code E3
Models
Method of Error Detect continuity across the high pressure switch in the protection device circuit.
Detection
Error Decision When part of the protection device circuit opens.

Conditions (Reference) Operating pressure of the high pressure switch:
Operating pressure: 4.0 MPa
Resetting pressure: 3.0 MPa
Supposed Activation of high pressure switch

Causes Defective high pressure switch
Momentary power failure
Defective high pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
Check for the following 3 points:

(1) Is the stop valve open?
(2) Is the high pressure switch connector properly
connected to the outdoor unit main PCB?
(3) Is there continuity across the high pressure
switch?
Are the NO
above 3 points Remedy defective points.
OK?
YES
(1)Mount a pressure gauge on the high pressure
service port.
(2)Reset the operation using the remote controller,
and then restart the operation.
Is the
operating
Does the error E3 YES pressure of the NO
high pressure switch Replace the high pressure
recur?
normal switch.
(4.0 MPa)? RXQ6-14A: S1PH
RXQ16-20A: S1PH, S2PH
NO YES
Are the
characteristics of NO
the high pressure Replace the high pressure sensor
sensor normal? (S1NPH).
(∗1)
YES
A

Service Checker CHECK 12

Connect the Service Checker, and then make a comparison between “high
pressure” checked by the Service Checker and the measurement of the high
pressure sensor (∗1)
Is
the “high
pressure”
checked by the
Service Checker same as NO Replace the outdoor unit
the measurement of main PCB (A1P).
the high pressure
gauge?
YES
-The high pressure sensor is normal, and pressure detection with the
outdoor unit main PCB is also normal.
-The high pressure has really become high.
CHECK 1 : Eliminate factors that cause the high pressure to rise.
Note: ∗1. Make a comparison between voltage measured by the pressure sensor and that read by the
pressure gauge.
(The pressure sensor makes measurement of voltage at its connector block to convert it to
pressure. CHECK 12 )

4.25 Actuation of Low Pressure Sensor

Error Code E4
Models
Method of Error Make judgement of pressure detected by the low pressure sensor with the outdoor unit main
Detection PCB.
Error Decision When low pressure caused a drop while the compressor is in operation:
Conditions Operating pressure: 0.07 MPa
Supposed Abnormally drop in low pressure

Causes Defective low pressure sensor
The stop valve is not opened
Troubleshooting
Is the stop NO
Open the stop valve.
valve open?
YES
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the low pressure
service port.
(2) Reset the operation using the remote
controller, and then restart the operation.
Are the
characteristics NO
of the low pressure Replace the low pressure sensor
sensor normal? (S1NPL).
(∗1)
YES
Service Checker CHECK 12
Connect the Service Checker, and then make a comparison between “low
pressure” checked by the Service Checker and the measurement of the low
pressure sensor. (∗1)
Is the
“low pressure”
checked by the
Service Checker same NO
as the measurement of Replace the outdoor unit main
the low pressure PCB (A1P).
gauge?
YES
- The low pressure sensor is normal, and pressure detection with the
outdoor unit main PCB is also normal.
- The low pressure has really become low.
CHECK 2 : Eliminate factors that cause the low pressure to decrease.

Note: ∗1. Make a comparison between voltage measured by the pressure sensor and that read by the
pressure gauge.
(The pressure sensor makes measurement of voltage at its connector block to convert it to
pressure. CHECK 12 )

4.26 Inverter Compressor Motor Lock

Error Code E5
Models
Method of Error Inverter PCB takes the position signal from UVW line connected between the inverter and
Detection compressor, and the error is detected when any abnormality is observed in the phase-current
waveform.
Error Decision When the inverter compressor motor does not operate even by starting it in forced startup
Conditions mode.
Supposed Inverter compressor lock

Causes High differential pressure (0.5 MPa or more)
UVW connection error
Defective inverter PCB
The stop valve is not opened.
Troubleshooting
Check in Monitor Mode

16-20 HP models are equipped with
2 compressors.
Check for the compressor M1C or
M2C applicable to the error code
E5 while in monitor mode of the
outdoor unit.
Is the stop NO
valve open? Field factor
YES
Check for the connection wiring.
• For compressor M1C
Is the
connection
line of the relevant NO
Replace the connection line,
Power OFF compressor and then securely connect the
normal? connector.
YES
Are wire
connections
made to phases U, V NO Make proper wire connections.
and W in the proper
order and W
manner?
U
YES
V
Are wire
connections
made according to the NO Make proper wire connections.
wiring diagram?
YES
A

The insulation
resistance of the relevant YES
Replace the compressor.
compressor is low RXQ6-14A: M1C
(< 100 kΩ)
RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C
Power OFF NO
The relevant
compressor has a YES
wiring disconnection
in it.
NO
Restart the
compressor, and
then check for the NO Quit work.
operation. Does the Pressure equalization failure
error recur? may have occurred. Check for
the refrigerant system.
Power ON YES
Has the
compressor
started up at high YES
differential pressure Pressure equalization failure.
(0.5 MPa or Check for the refrigerant
more)? system.
NO
CHECK 4
NO
Power OFF Is the power Replace the inverter PCB. (+1)
transistor +1
normal?
RXQ6-12A: A3P
RXQ14A: A6P
YES RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
The error recurs at NO Continue operation.

Power ON
startup. The error could have
resulted from instantaneous
power failure.
YES
Replace the inverter
Power OFF PCB. (+1)
The error recurs NO

Power ON Continue operation.
at startup.
YES
compressor.
This is not a failure of the
inverter PCB. Reinstall the
PCB.
RXQ6-14A: M1C
RXQ16-20A: M1C, M2C

4.27 Outdoor Fan Motor Abnormality

Error Code E7
Models
Method of Error Detect according to the value of current flowing through the inverter PCB (or fan PCB in
Detection case of fan motor 2).
Detect error of the fan motor system according to the fan revolutions detected by the Hall IC
during the fan motor runs.
Error Decision When overcurrent is detected from the inverter PCB or the fan PCB (Detecting overcurrent 4
Conditions times will shut down the system).
When the fan revolutions fall below a given level for a period of 6 seconds while in fan motor
rotation mode (Detecting shortage of revolutions will shut down the system).
Supposed Fan motor failure

Causes Disconnection of harness/connector between the fan motor and the fan PCB
Fan does not rotate due to foreign matter caught in it
Clearing condition: fan motor performs normal operation for a period of 5 minutes

Troubleshooting

14-20 HP models are equipped with 2 fan motors.
Check for the fan motor M1F or M2F applicable to the error
code E7 while in monitor mode of the outdoor unit.
Turn OFF the power supply, and then wait for a period of 10 minutes.
There is
foreign matter around the YES
Remove the foreign matter.
applicable fan.
NO
Check for Connection of Connector

Check for the connections of all fan motor connectors.
Some connectors are YES

Insert the connector.
disconnected.
NO
Check for Colors of Relay Connectors

Check for any wire connection errors in 2 units of fan motors.
• Fan motor 1: Power supply cables and signal cables are all white.
• Fan motor 2: Power supply cables and signal cables are red
on the PCB side and white on the motor side.
There is a relay YES

Correct the connection of the
connection error. connector.
NO
There
is no
continuity across the YES
fuse (F101U) on the Replace the fan PCB. (+1)
fan PCB. +1
(+1) RXQ6-12A: A4P
RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P
NO
The
fan cannot be
rotated by hand YES
when disconnecting the Replace the relevant fan motor.
connector from the
fan motor.
NO
Resistance
between the fan
motor power supply cable YES
terminal and the motor Replace the relevant fan motor.
frame (metallic part)
is not more than
1 MΩ.
NO
A

CHECK 16
Check for the connector
(power supply cable) of the
fan motor.
Resistance
between U, V, W
phases of the fan motor
power supply cable has lost YES
Replace the relevant fan motor.
balance or short circuit is
caused between U, V,
W phases.
NO
Turn ON the power supply to check for the following LED lamps. +1
(1) HAP lamp on the inverter PCB (+1) RXQ6-12A: A3P
(2) HAP lamp on the fan PCB (+2) RXQ14A: A6P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
+2
RXQ6-12A: A4P
The HAP RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P
lamp on A3P, A6P YES
blinks, but that on A4P, A7P Replace the fan PCB. (+1)
does not blink.
NO

4.28 Electronic Expansion Valve Coil Abnormality

Error Code E9
Models
Method of Error Detect according to whether or not there is continuity across the electronic expansion valve
Detection coils (Y1E, Y2E, Y4E).
Error Decision When no current flows through common (COM+) at the time of turning ON the power supply.
Conditions
Supposed Disconnection of connectors from electronic expansion valves (Y1E, Y2E, Y4E)
Causes Defective electronic expansion valve coil
Troubleshooting
Turn OFF the power supply

once, and then turn it ON again.
YES Investigate external causes other than

Return to normal?
failures (e.g. noise).
NO
The
Is sub code resistance of
one of the following? YES the electronic NO
Replace the defective electronic
E9-48,49,50,51, expansion valve coil
52,53,54,55,56 expansion valve coil.
is normal. (∗1)
NO YES
Replace the outdoor unit main PCB
(A1P).
Check for electronic expansion valves applicable to the error code E9 while
in monitor mode.
• Sub code
Y1E: E9-01 (Master), E9-05 (Slave 1), E9-08 (Slave 2)
Connector for
the electronic NO
expansion valve of the outdoor Properly and securely connect the
unit main PCB (A1P) is connector.
connected.
YES
The
resistance of
the electronic NO
Replace the electronic expansion
expansion valve coil is
normal. (∗1) valve coil.
YES
Replace the outdoor unit main PCB
(A1P).

Note: ∗1. Make measurement of resistance between the connector pins, and then make sure the
resistance falls in the range shown below.
RXQ6-12A
X21A (Y1E)
X22A (Y2E) X25A (Y4E)
(White) 1 (Orange) 1
(Yellow) 2 (Red) 2 Judgment criteria

Measuring points Y2E
Y1E Y4E
(Orange) 3 (Yellow) 3
1-6
(Blue) 4 (Black) 4 2-6
120-180 Ω 35-55 Ω
3-6
— 5 — 5 4-6
(Red) 6 COM+ (Gray) 6
RXQ14-20A
X22A (Y2E)
X21A (Y1E) X25A (Y4E)
(White) 1 (Orange) 1
(Yellow) 2 (Red) 2 Judgment criteria

Measuring points Y2E
Y1E
(Orange) 3 (Yellow) 3 Y4E
1-6
(Blue) 4 (Black) 4 2-6
120-180 Ω 35-55 Ω
3-6
— 5 — 5 4-6
(Red) 6 COM+ (Gray) 6

4.29 Discharge Pipe Temperature Abnormality

Error Code F3
Models
Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with the discharge pipe or compressor body
Detection thermistor.
Error Decision When discharge pipe temperature becomes abnormally high (i.e., 135°C or more)
Conditions When discharge pipe temperature sharply rises (remains at 120°C or more for a period of
consecutive 10 minutes)
When compressor surface temperature becomes abnormally high (i.e., 120°C or more)
When compressor surface temperature sharply rises (remains at 110°C or more for a period
of consecutive 10 minutes)
Supposed Abnormal discharge pipe temperature

Causes Defective discharge pipe thermistor
Abnormal compressor surface temperature
Defective compressor body thermistor

Troubleshooting
Connect the Service Checker.

Reset the system operation,
and then restart it.
CHECK 11
Are the characteristics
of the discharge pipe and NO
Replace the relevant thermistor.
compressor body
thermistors normal?
(∗1)
YES
Service Checker
Connect the Service Checker, and then make a
comparison between “discharge pipe temperature” (or
“compressor surface temperature” and “low pressure”
checked by the Service Checker and the
measurements of discharge pipe surface temperature
(or “compressor surface temperature.”)
Is the
“temperature”
checked by the NO
Service Checker same as Replace the outdoor unit main
the measurement of the PCB (A1P).
temperature?
YES
• All thermistors are normal, and temperature detection

with the outdoor unit main PCB is also normal.
• The discharge pipe temperature (or compressor surface
temperature) has really become high.
CHECK 3 : Eliminate the causes of superheat operation.
Note: ∗1. Thermistors

RXQ6-14A RXQ16-20A
Applicable Thermistor Electric Electric
Connector Connector
symbol symbol
Discharge pipe thermistor
(for M1C) R21T R21T
Discharge pipe thermistor — R22T

(for M2C) X19A X19A
(Group (Group
Compressor body thermistor connector) connector)
(for M1C) R8T R8T
Compressor body thermistor — R9T

(for M2C)

4.30 Wet Alarm

Error Code F4
Models
Method of Error In cooling operation, detect the condition under which liquid refrigerant returns to the
Detection compressor, according to the temperature and pressure of each part.
Error Decision When the following wet state continues for a period of 180 minutes, an alert is issued.
Conditions An error is defined for 240 minutes.
Wet state in outdoor units
When the following wet state continues for a period of 180 minutes, an alert is issued.
Wet state in some of indoor units
Supposed Defective suction pipe thermistor

Causes Defective discharge pipe thermistor
Defective high pressure sensor
Defective indoor unit electronic expansion valve
Dirty air filter
Troubleshooting
Connect the Service Checker.

Mount a pressure gauge on the
high pressure service port.
Reset the operation, and then
restart the operation.
Are the
characteristics of the NO
suction pipe thermistor Replace the relevant
normal? thermistor.
YES
Are the
discharge pipe NO
thermistor characteristics Replace the discharge
normal? pipe thermistor.
YES
Are the
high pressure sensor NO
characteristics Replace the high
normal? pressure sensor
(S1NPH).
YES
Service Checker
Use the Service Checker to find indoor units
operating under the following conditions:
& • Gas pipe temperature (R6T) - Liquid pipe temperature (R4T) < 2.5˚C
• Electronic expansion valve opening < 300 pulse
Stop the relevant indoor units while

the system is in cooling operation,
and then check for the liquid pipe
temperature of these indoor units
after the system is stabilized.
The liquid pipe

temperature is low YES
(equivalent to the evaporating Replace the indoor
temperature). electronic expansion
valve.
NO
Clean the air filters
of the indoor units.

4.31 Refrigerant Overcharged

Error Code F6
Models
Method of Error Detect overcharged refrigerant according to outdoor air temperature, heat exchanger liquid pipe
Detection temperature, and subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe temperature during test operation.
Error Decision When the amount of refrigerant, which is calculated using outdoor air temperature, heat
Conditions exchanger liquid pipe temperature, and subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe temperature
during test operation, exceeds the regular charge amount by 30% or more
(If refrigerant is charged slightly over the regular charge amount, F6 may be displayed on the
remote controller.)
Supposed Refrigerant overcharged

Causes Disconnection of outdoor air thermistor
Disconnection of heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor
Disconnection of subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor
Troubleshooting
Check for the conditions of

mounting of the temperature
sensors of the outdoor air
thermistor, the heat exchanger
liquid pipe thermistor, and
subcooling heating exchanger
liquid pipe thermistor to the piping.
Are the temperature NO

sensors properly Properly connect the thermistors,
mounted? and then operate the system.
YES
Disconnect the outdoor air
thermistor, the heat exchanger
liquid pipe thermistor, and
subcooling heating exchanger
liquid pipe thermistor from the
outdoor unit main PCB, and
then make measurement of
resistance using a multimeter.
CHECK 11 NO
Replace abnormal thermistors,
Normal? and then operate the system.
YES
Remedy refrigerant overcharging.

4.32 Harness Abnormality (between Outdoor Unit Main PCB

and Inverter PCB)
Error Code H3
Models
Method of Error Check for the transmission conditions of the following harnesses between the PCBs using
Detection microcomputer:
RXQ6-12A: Inverter 1
Between X28A (A1P) and X6A (A3P)
RXQ14A: Inverter 1
RXQ16-20A: Inverter 2
Error Decision When normal transmission between PCBs is disabled during the compressor stops running.
Conditions
Supposed Defective connection of harnesses between PCBs

Causes Defective outdoor unit main PCB
Defective inverter PCB (A3P, A6P)
Troubleshooting
Check for the transmission

conditions of the following
jumpers between the PCBs:
• RXQ6-12A
Between X28A (A1P) and
X6A (A3P)
• RXQ14A
X6A (A6P)
• RXQ16-20A
X6A (A3P)
X6A (A6P)
YES
Harness error Return the relevant harness to
normal.
NO

PCB.
NO
H3 error recurs. Complete countermeasures.
YES
Replace the inverter PCB. (+1)
+1
RXQ6-12A: A3P
RXQ14A: A6P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P

4.33 Outdoor Fan PCB Abnormality

Error Code H7
Models
Method of Error Detect according to values detected with current sensor.

Detection
Error Decision When the current sensor is abnormal.

Conditions
Supposed Disconnection/Short circuit in fan motor leads or disconnection of connector

Causes Defective fan PCB (A4P, A7P)
Troubleshooting
Check for fan motor applicable to the error code H7 while in monitor mode.
• Sub code
Fan PCB (A7P): H07-21 (Master), H7-23 (Slave 1), H7-25 (Slave 2)
Fan PCB (A4P): H07-22 (Master), H7-24 (Slave 1), H7-26 (Slave 2)

and wait for 10 minutes.
Is
resistance
between Vcc-UVW
and between GND-UVW NO Replace the defective fan motor.
of the fan motor lead in
balance?
YES
Replace the defective fan PCB.
RXQ6-12A: A4P
RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P

4.34 Thermistor Abnormality

Error Code H9, J3, J5, J7, J8, J9
Models
Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with individual thermistors.

Detection
Error Decision When the system is in operation and the thermistor causes wiring disconnection or short circuit
Conditions in it.
Supposed Defective connection of thermistor

Causes Defective thermistor
Troubleshooting
Thermistor is NO
connected to the Connect the connector and turn
connector. ON again.
YES
Resistance
is normal when
measured after
disconnecting the NO
thermistor from the Replace the thermistor (∗1).
outdoor unit main PCB.
CHECK 11
(1.8 to
800 kΩ)
YES
PCB (A1P).

Note: ∗1. Error codes and thermistors

RXQ6-14A RXQ16-20A
Error Applicable
Code Thermistor Electric Connector Electric Connector
symbol symbol
Outdoor air
H9 thermistor R1T X18A R1T X18A
Discharge pipe
thermistor R21T R21T
(for M1C)
Discharge pipe
thermistor — X19A R22T X19A
J3 (for M2C) (Group (Group
connector) connector)
Compressor body R8T R8T
thermistor (for M1C)
Compressor body
thermistor (for M2C) — R9T
Suction pipe
J5 thermistor
R3T R3T
Subcooling heat
J7 exchanger liquid R5T R5T
pipe thermistor X30A X30A
(Group (Group
Heat exchanger connector) connector)
J8 liquid pipe thermistor
R4T R4T
Subcooling heat
J9 exchanger gas pipe R6T R6T
thermistor

4.35 High Pressure Sensor Abnormality

Error Code JA
Models
Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with the high pressure sensor.
Detection
Error Decision The high pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Conditions (Pressure range: 0-4.3 MPa)
Supposed Defective high pressure sensor

Causes Connection of low pressure sensor in mistake for high pressure sensor
Defective connection of high pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the

high pressure service port.
(2) Connect the Service Checker for
VRV systems.
Are the
characteristics of
the high pressure sensor
normal? (Make a comparison NO
between voltage characteristics Replace the high pressure sensor
(S1NPH).
and gauge pressure.)
CHECK 12
YES
Is the
outdoor unit main
PCB detection pressure
normal? Make a comparison
between data on pressure checked by NO Replace the outdoor unit main
the Service Checker and the PCB (A1P).
voltage characteristics.
CHECK 12
YES
restart it.
Are the
high pressure sensor Replace the high pressure sensor
normal? (S1NPH).
YES
PCB (A1P).

4.36 Low Pressure Sensor Abnormality

Error Code JC
Models
Method of Error Detect according to temperature detected with the low pressure sensor.
Detection
Error Decision The low pressure sensor is short circuit or open circuit.
Conditions (Pressure range: 0-1.7 MPa)
Supposed Defective low pressure sensor

Causes Connection of high pressure sensor in mistake for low pressure sensor
Defective connection of low pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
(1) Mount a pressure gauge on the

low pressure service port.
(2) Connect the Service Checker for
VRV systems.
Are the
characteristics of
the low pressure
sensor normal? (Make a
comparison between voltage NO
Replace the low pressure sensor
characteristics and gauge (S1NPL).
pressure.)
CHECK 12
YES
Is the
outdoor unit main
PCB detection pressure
normal? Make a comparison
between data on pressure checked by NO Replace the outdoor unit main
the Service Checker and the PCB (A1P).
voltage characteristics.
CHECK 12
YES
restart it.
Are the
low pressure sensor Replace the low pressure sensor
normal? (S1NPL).
YES
PCB (A1P).

4.37 Inverter PCB Abnormality

Error Code L1
Models
Method of Error Detect according to current value detected during the output of waveform before compressor
Detection startup
Detect according to current value detected with the current sensor during synchronous
operation for startup
Error Decision When overcurrent (OCP) flows during the output of waveform
Conditions When the current sensor error during synchronous operation
When IPM error occurs
Supposed Inverter PCB

IPM failure

Causes  

 Current sensor failure 
Drive circuit failure



Troubleshooting

once, and then turn it ON
again.
YES
Return to normal? The error could have resulted from
external factors other than failures
(e.g. external noise or thunder).
NO

16-20 HP models are
equipped with 2 compressors.
Check for the compressor
M1C or M2C applicable to the
error code L1 while in monitor
mode of the outdoor unit.
CHECK 4
Is the power NO
transistor normal?
Is the
YES insulation to
ground resistance of NO
Replace the compressor and the
the relevant compressor
100 kΩ or inverter PCB (1) together.
more?
YES
Replace the inverter PCB. (1)
CHECK 4
Is the power NO
transistor of the fan Replace the inverter PCB (1) and
driver normal? the fan PCB (2).
YES
Replace the inverter PCB. (1)
+1
RXQ6-12A: A3P
RXQ14A: A6P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
+2
RXQ6-12A: A4P
RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P

4.38 Momentary Power Failure during Test Operation

Error Code L2
Models
Method of Error Momentary power failure is detected by the PCB.

Detection
Error Decision Judgement is made by AC power frequency detection circuit on the outdoor unit main PCB
Conditions
Supposed Defective wiring

Troubleshooting
Error
recurs after NO
turning OFF the power Temporary problem
and ON again.
YES
Any
disconnection
of connectors, loose
contact or wiring disconnection YES
Correct any fault.
in the transmission wirings to
the outdoor unit main
PCB?
NO
main PCB (A1P).

4.39 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Rise Abnormality

Error Code L4
Models
Method of Error Detect temperature of power module of the inverter PCB and fan PCB.
Detection
Error Decision Thermistor located inside the power module of the inverter PCB for compressor and fan motor.
Conditions Cooling tube plate poor heat-exchange.
Supposed Radiation fin temperature rise of fan PCB.

Causes Cooling tube plate not fixed with screws.
U0 error.
Defective inverter PCB.
High outdoor air temperature.
Troubleshooting Subcode L4-01, 02, 03, 09, 10, 11


16-20 HP models are
Check for the cooling

conditions of cooling tube
used to cool the inverter.
(1) Is the cooling tube plate
fixed with screws?
(2) Error code U0 is
displayed on the Error
History screen.
NO
Normal? Rectify troubles.
YES
Turn ON the
power supply, and YES
then press the ON button Replace the inverter PCB. (+1)
continuously. Does
the error +1
recur? RXQ6-12A: A3P
RXQ14A: A6P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
NO
Continue operation.
Field factor. Power module temperature
may have risen due to high outdoor air
temperature.

Subcode L4-06, 07, 18, 19, 20, 21

Check the cooling conditions

of the inverter heat sink.
(1) Is the insulation sheet
(blue) properly fixed?
(2) Is the heat sink properly
fixed with screws?
(3) Error code U0 is displayed
on the Error History
screen.
Normal? NO Rectify troubles.
YES
Turn
ON the power
supply. Does the error YES Replace the fan PCB (A4P, A7P).
recur when operation
starts?
NO
Continue operation.
Field factor. Heat sink radiation fin
temperature may have risen due to
high outdoor air temperature.

4.40 Inverter Compressor Instantaneous Overcurrent

Error Code L5
Models
Method of Error Detect current flowing through the power transistor.

Detection
Error Decision The current exceeds A (A) instantaneously in the power transistor.
Conditions Trigger point
Compressor model A (A)
JT1GUVDYR 41.9
JT16KCVDYR 64.2
Supposed Defective compressor coil (such as wiring disconnection or insulation failure)

Causes Compressor startup failure (mechanical lock)
Troubleshooting
Compressor inspection


16-20 HP models are
NO
Is the stop valve open? Open the stop valve.
YES
Check for the leads of the
compressor.
Power OFF • For compressor M2C
Are the
leads of the relevant NO
Replace the leads of the
compressor relevant compressor.
normal?
YES
Are
wiring and wire NO
connections to the relevant Rectify the wiring and
compressor wire connections.
normal?
YES

Power OFF The

insulation
compressor is 100 kΩ compressor.
or less.
NO
The coil
of the relevant YES
compressor has caused Replace the inverter
wiring disconnection compressor.
in it.
NO
CHECK 4
NO
Is the power Replace the inverter
transistor normal? PCB. (1)
1
RXQ6-12A: A3P
YES
RXQ14A: A6P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Restarting the NO
system results in the Continue operation.
recurrence of the
( )
The error could have
error. resulted from causes
YES such as instantaneous
power failure.
Replace the inverter PCB
Power OFF (+1).
Restarting the NO
recurrence of the
error.
YES
compressor.

4.41 Inverter Compressor Overcurrent

Error Code L8
Models
Method of Error Detect current flowing through the power transistor.

Detection
Error Decision (1) The secondary-side inverter current exceeds A (A) for a period of 5 consecutive seconds.
Conditions (2) The secondary-side inverter current exceeds B (A) for a period of 260 consecutive seconds.
Trigger point
Compressor model A (A) B (A)
JT1GUVDYR 21.0 17.6
JT16KCVDYR 30.0 27.5
Supposed Compressor overloaded

Causes Wiring disconnection in compressor coil
Disconnection of compressor wiring
Troubleshooting

16-20 HP models are
NO
Is the stop valve open? Open the stop valve.
YES
Check for the leads of the
compressor.
Power OFF • For compressor M1C
Are the
leads of the relevant NO
compressor Replace the leads of the
normal? relevant compressor.
YES
Are
wiring and wire NO
connections to the relevant Rectify the wiring and
compressor wire connections.
normal?
YES
A

Power OFF The

insulation
resistance of the YES
relevant compressor is Replace the inverter
1 MΩ or less to compressor.
ground.
NO
The coil
of the relevant YES
compressor has caused Replace the inverter
wiring disconnection compressor.
in it.
NO
CHECK 4
NO
Is the power Replace the inverter
transistor normal? PCB. (+1)
+1
RXQ6-12A: A3P
YES RXQ14A: A6P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Restarting the NO
recurrence of the
( )
error. resulted from causes
YES such as instantaneous
power failure.
Power OFF (+1).
Restarting the NO
recurrence of the
error.
YES
compressor.

4.42 Inverter Compressor Startup Abnormality

Error Code L9
Models
Method of Error Detect error according to the signal waveform of compressor.

Detection
Error Decision When compressor startup operation has not been completed.
Conditions
Supposed The stop valve is not opened

Causes Defective compressor
Error in wire connections to compressor
Large differential pressure before compressor startup

Troubleshooting
Startup for
the first time after NO
Go to the next page.
installation? (Startup failure in aging operation)
YES
Is a proper NO
amount of refrigerant Charge a proper amount of
charged? refrigerant.
YES
Is the stop valve NO

open?
YES
Refrigerant is
melting (No power YES
applied for a period of 6 Eliminate the melting state of
hours or more) refrigerant.
NO

16-20 HP models are
Is the
insulation NO
resistance of the relevant Eliminate the melting state of
compressor 100 kΩ refrigerant.
or more?
YES
Are the
leads of the YES
compressor Connect the leads of the compressor.
disconnected?
NO
Apply power, and then restart
operation.

From the previous page

(Startup failure in aging
operation)
Refrigerant is
melting (No power YES
applied for a period of 6 Eliminate the melting state of
hours or more) refrigerant.
NO
Is the
insulation
resistance of the NO
relevant compressor Replace the inverter compressor.
100 kΩ or
more?
YES
There is YES
wiring disconnection in Replace the inverter compressor.
the compressor.
NO
CHECK 4
NO
Is the power Replace the inverter PCB. (+1)
transistor normal?
+1
YES RXQ6-12A: A3P
RXQ14A: A6P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Recheck for the compressor and the

refrigerant system.

4.43 Transmission Error between Inverter PCB and Outdoor

Unit Main PCB
Error Code LC
Models
Method of Error Check for the transmission conditions between the inverter PCB and the outdoor unit main PCB
Detection using a microcomputer.
Error Decision Normal transmission is disabled for a given period of time or more.
Conditions
Supposed Defective connection between the inverter PCB and the outdoor unit main PCB
Causes Defective outdoor unit main PCB (transmission block)
Defective noise filter
Defective reactor
Defective inverter compressor
Defective fan motor
Troubleshooting
Is the
harness between
terminal block and noise NO
Properly connect the harness.
filter PCB securely
connected?
(∗1)
YES
Is the
harness between
noise filter PCB and NO
inverter PCB securely
connected?
(∗1)
YES
Is the
harness between
reactor and inverter PCB NO
securely connected?
(∗1)
YES
Is the
connector between
main PCB and each NO
Properly connect the connector.
inverter PCB securely
connected?
(∗1)
YES


16-20 HP models are
error code LC while in monitor
Does the
relevant inverter PCB part NO
No. match that of the spare Replace with a proper PCB.
parts list?
YES
The
insulation
Replace the inverter compressor.
inverter compressor is
not more than
100 kΩ.
NO
The insulation
relevant fan motor is Replace the fan motor.
not more than
1 MΩ.
NO
The
microcomputer normal
monitor indication lamp (green) NO
This is not the LC error.
on the outdoor unit main Recheck the error code.
PCB (A1P) is
blinking.
YES
The
microcomputer normal The fuse of
monitor indication lamp (green) NO NO
the noise filter PCB has Replace the inverter PCB. (+1)
on the outdoor unit main blown out.
PCB (A1P) is
blinking. +1
YES RXQ6-12A: A3P
YES RXQ14A: A6P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Replace the reactor and all of the
inverter, fan (+2), and noise filter (+3)
PCBs.
+2
RXQ6-12A: A4P
RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P
+3
RXQ6-12A: A2P
Is the RXQ14A: A5P
connector RXQ16-20A: A2P, A5P
between the outdoor unit NO
main PCB and the inverter Properly connect the connector.
PCB securely
connected?
YES
YES
The LC error recurs. Replace the outdoor unit main PCB
(A1P).
NO
Continue operation.
The error could have resulted from
causes such as instantaneous
power failure.
Note: ∗1. Connect and disconnect the connector once to ensure that it is securely connected.

4.44 Power Supply Voltage Imbalance

Error Code P1
Models
Method of Error Detect voltage imbalance through inverter PCB.

Detection
Error Decision Power supply voltage imbalance exceeds approximately 12 V.

Conditions
Error is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
P1 will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed Open phase

Causes Interphase voltage imbalance
Defective capacitor in the main circuit
Defective wiring in the main circuit

Troubleshooting

16-20 HP models are equipped
with 2 compressors.
Check for the compressor M1C
or M2C applicable to the error
code P1 while in monitor mode
of the outdoor unit.
Is supply
voltage imbalance YES Open phase? YES
Correct the open phase of
over approximately
12 V? (∗1) power supply.
NO NO
Rectify the power supply
voltage imbalance.
Take countermeasures (listed
Is the below).
imbalance of voltage YES
applied to the inverter over Defective noise filter, inverter
approximately 12 V? PCB or defective wiring
(∗2) Turn OFF the power supply,
and then check and repair
NO
wirings in the main circuit and
<If voltage can be monitored> defective components.
(1) Defective connection or
Use equipment capable of constantly wiring disconnection
recording power supply voltages (e.g. between the power supply
Memory HiCorder) to record power and the inverter
supply voltages between phases (R-S, (2) Adhesion/meltdown of
S-T, and R-T) for a period of contact of, or defective
consecutive 1 week. connection of K1M
(3) Wiring disconnection or
defective connection of
noise filter
Even though the power Power supply voltage imbalance Even
supply voltage is normal, the though power supply voltage remains
error recurs. balanced when making measurement,
it often becomes imbalanced during
night-time (from 6:00 PM to 10:00 PM).
Take countermeasures.
+1
RXQ6-12A: A3P
RXQ14A: A6P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Explanation to users ∗ Use the document “Notice of Inspection Results” attached to spare part.
Be sure to explain user that “power supply
Hand the “Notice of Inspection Results” to user to ask
voltage imbalance” will occur and Daikin
him/her to rectify the imbalance.
accepts no responsibility for the imbalance.
Notes: ∗1. Make measurement of voltage at the power supply terminal block (X1M).
∗2. Make measurement of voltage at the L1, L2 and L3 terminals of diode module located on
the inverter PCB during the compressor is in operation.

4.45 Reactor Temperature Abnormality

Error Code P3
Models
Method of Error Detect according to the value detected with the reactor surface thermistor.
Detection
Error Decision When the system is in operation and the thermistor causes wiring disconnection or short circuit
Conditions in it.
Supposed Defective connection of thermistor

Causes Defective reactor surface thermistor
Troubleshooting

16-20 HP models are
error code P3 while in monitor
Make measurement of
resistance of the radiation
fin thermistor.
Is the
thermistor normal? Replace the inverter PCB. (+1)
+1
YES RXQ6-12A: A3P
RXQ14A: A6P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Turn ON the YES
power supply. Replace the inverter PCB. (+1)
Does the error
recur?
NO
Continue operation.

4.46 Inverter Radiation Fin Temperature Abnormality

Error Code P4
Models
Method of Error Detect the resistance of the following thermistors during the compressor stops running:
Detection (1)Radiation fin thermistor
(2) Thermistor located in PCB circuit
Error Decision When the resistance of the thermistor comes to a value equivalent to open or short circuit.
Conditions
Error is not decided while the unit operation is continued.
P4 will be displayed by pressing the inspection button.
Supposed Defective radiation fin temperature thermistor

Causes Defective inverter PCB
Defective fan PCB
Defective inverter compressor
Defective fan motor
Troubleshooting Subcode P4-01, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08


16-20 HP models are
error code P4 while in monitor
Make measurement of
resistance of the radiation
fin thermistor.
Is the
relevant thermistor Replace the inverter PCB. (+1)
normal?
+1
YES RXQ6-12A: A3P
RXQ14A: A6P
The RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
insulation
relevant inverter compressor Replace the inverter
is not more than compressor.
100 kΩ.
NO
The insulation
fan motor is not more
than 1 MΩ.
NO
Turn ON the
power supply. YES
Does the error
recur?
NO
Continue operation.

Subcode P4-02, 03, 15, 16, 17, 18

The insulation
relevant fan motor is Replace the fan motor.
less than 1 MΩ.
NO
Turn ON
the power supply. YES
Replace the relevant fan PCB
Does the error recur?
(A4P or A7P).
NO
Continue operation.

4.47 Field Setting after Replacing Outdoor Unit Main PCB

Abnormality or Combination of PCB Abnormality
Error Code PJ
Models
Method of Error This error is detected according to communications with the inverter PCB.
Detection
Error Decision Make judgement according to communication data on whether or not the type of the inverter
Conditions PCB is correct.
Supposed Mismatching of type of PCB

Causes Improper (or no) field setting after replacing outdoor unit main PCB
Troubleshooting

16-20 HP models classes are
code PJ while in monitor mode
Does
the inverter PCB NO
(1) part No. match that Replace with a correct
of the spare parts inverter PCB. (+1)
list? +1
YES RXQ6-12A: A3P
RXQ14A: A6P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Does the
fan PCB (2) part NO
Replace with a correct fan
No. match that of the
spare parts PCB. (+2)
list? +2
RXQ6-12A: A4P
YES RXQ14-20A: A4P, A7P
Has the
DIP switch setting
been made properly to NO
Properly make DIP switch
replace the outdoor unit
main PCB? setting.
(After completion of setting,
reset the power supply.)
YES
main PCB (A1P).

4.48 Refrigerant Shortage Warning

Error Code U0
Sub code: 05

Models
Method of Error Detects refrigerant shortage according to the ending conditions of cooling oil return operation.
Detection
Error Decision Cooling oil return operation does not finish according to the ending conditions, and the time is
Conditions up for 3 consecutive times.
∗ No abnormality is determined, and the operation continues.
Supposed Refrigerant shortage and refrigerant clogging (wrong piping)

Causes Defective thermistor
Defective low pressure sensor
Troubleshooting
Are the
suction air thermistor Replace the thermistor.
normal?
YES
Are the
low pressure sensor Replace the low pressure
normal? sensor.
YES
CHECK 2 CHECK 2
NO YES
Is refrigerant shortage detected Is another cause detected as a Correct the abnormally low
as a cause of abnormally cause of abnormally low pressure.
low pressure? pressure?
YES NO
CHECK 3 CHECK 3
NO YES
Is refrigerant shortage detected Is another cause detected Correct the superheat
as a cause of superheat as a cause of superheat operation.
operation? operation?
YES NO
CHECK 7 YES
Is refrigerant Correct the insufficient low
insufficient? refrigerant condition.
NO
main PCB.

4.49 Open Phase

Error Code U1
Models
Method of Error The phase of each phase is detected by phase detection circuit and open phase is judged.
Detection
Error Decision When any phase is open phase.

Conditions
Supposed Abnormal supply voltage

Causes Open phase
Troubleshooting
Power
supply harness
(3-phase, 4 wires) is NO
properly connected to Connect the harness properly.
the terminal
block.
YES
Power
supply voltage falls
within 380 V to 415 V NO
Check the power supply for
between L1-L2, L2-L3 abnormalities.
and L3-L1.
YES
The connectors
between the terminal
block, noise filter PCB NO
and inverter PCB are Connect the connectors properly.
properly connected.
YES
The fuse of the NO

noise filter PCB is Replace the inverter PCB. (+1)
blown out.
+1
YES RXQ6-12A: A3P
RXQ14A: A6P
RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
Replace the noise filter PCB (+2)

and the inverter PCB (+1).
+2
RXQ6-12A: A2P
RXQ14A: A5P
RXQ16-20A: A2P, A5P

4.50 Power Supply Insufficient or Instantaneous Abnormality

Error Code U2
Models
Method of Error Detect the voltage of capacitor of the main circuit in the inverter PCB.
Detection
Error Decision When the voltage in the DC circuit (between diode module and power module) falls below
Conditions 380 VDC.
Supposed Abnormal power supply voltage

Causes Instantaneous power failure
Open phase
Defective compressor
Defective main circuit wiring
Defective fan motor
Defective connection of signal cable
Troubleshooting

16-20 HP models classes are
code U2 while in monitor mode
Check for power supply

conditions.
(1) Power supply voltage falls
within the range of 380 to
415 V?
(2) Any open phase in the
power supply wiring or any
wrong wiring?
(3) Imbalance in the power
supply voltage is
maintained within 12 V?
There are some

defects in the power YES
supply conditions Remedy the defects.
aforementioned.
NO
The insulation
compressor is not more Replace the compressor.
than 100 kΩ.
NO

The insulation
resistance of the fan YES
motor is not more If the motor gets severely
than 1 MΩ.
damaged, the inverter
PCB (+1) should also be
replaced.
+1
NO RXQ6-12A: A3P
RXQ14A: A6P
CHECK 4 RXQ16-20A: A3P, A6P
NO
Is the power Replace the inverter PCB.
transistor normal? (1)
YES
RXQ6-12A RXQ14A RXQ16-20A
A1P A3P A1P A6P A1P A3P A6P
Connect and disconnect the X20A X4A X20A X4A X20A X4A
connectors as shown in the X28A X6A X28A X6A X28A X6A
table. X40A X63A X40A X63A X40A X63A
X41A X63A
X41A X4A
X61A X6A
The
inverter PCB (+1) YES
has damage. (+1).
If the inverter PCB gets
NO severely damaged, the
compressor and the fan
motor may have been
Turn ON the power supply, damaged.
and then press the ON button.
The
system enters
standby mode before the YES
outdoor fan starts
rotating. (+1).
NO
The
system enters
standby mode before YES
completing the startup Replace the inverter PCB
operation of the (+1).
compressor. If the inverter PCB gets
severely damaged, check
NO for the compressor.
YES
The error U2 recurs. Check for wirings.
NO
Continue operation.
resulted from causes such
as instantaneous power
failure.

4.51 Check Operation Not Executed

Error Code U3
Models
Method of Error Check operation is executed or not executed

Detection
Error Decision Error is decided when the unit starts operation without check operation.
Conditions
Supposed Check operation is not executed.

Causes
Troubleshooting
The contents of individual

failures vary with sub code.
Ensure the sub code, and
then go to the following:
U3-02 Conduct the test operation.

(Test operation failed due
to indoor unit error.)
U3-03 Conduct the test operation.

(The test operation has not
been conducted.)
U3-04 Check for the refrigerant

piping, and then conduct
the test operation.
U3-05 Conduct the test operation

(due to the premature end
of the test operation).
U3-06 Conduct the test operation

(due to the premature end
of the test operation).
U3-07 Check for transmission

between indoor and
outdoor units, and then
conduct the test operation.
U3-08 Check for transmission

between indoor and
outdoor units, and then
conduct the test operation.
U3-10 Conduct the refrigerant

auto charge operation.
(The refrigerant auto
charge operation has not
been conducted.)

4.52 Transmission Error between Indoor Units and Outdoor

Units
Error Code U4
Models All outdoor unit models
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor and outdoor units is normal.
Detection
Error Decision When transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Conditions
Supposed Short circuit in indoor-outdoor or outdoor-outdoor transmission wiring (F1/F2), or wrong

Causes wiring
Outdoor unit power supply is OFF
System address does not match
Defective outdoor unit PCB

Troubleshooting
Check for details of error in

monitor mode.
NO
U4-01 Go to the next page.
U4-03
YES (Indoor unit system
transmission error)
Has the
indoor or
outdoor unit PCB
been replaced, or has YES
the indoor-outdoor or Press and hold BS3 on the
outdoor-outdoor master outdoor unit main
transmission PCB (A1P) for a period of 5
wiring been seconds or more. (The
modified? system will not operate for a
period of 12 minutes at
maximum.)
NO
Do all
indoor unit Are the
remote controllers in NO indoor-outdoor and YES
the same refrigerant outdoor-outdoor Replace the indoor unit PCB.
system display transmission wirings
U4? normal?
YES NO Modify the transmission

wirings.
Reset the power supply once.
Correct the voltage.
Does the ∗1 :OFF :ON :BLINK

microcomputer Is voltage
normal monitor NO between L1 and N NO (1) SEG1 SEG2 SEG3
indication lamp (HAP) on terminals of the outdoor
the outdoor unit unit PCB 380 to
main PCB 415 V?
blink?
(2)
YES YES
Does the Fuse on

seven-segment NO YES
the outdoor unit PCB
display show (1) or (2)? has blown out.
(∗1)
Replace the fuse.
YES NO
The PCB.
lamp does not turn YES
OFF for a period of 12 Press and hold BS3 on the
minutes or more. outdoor unit main PCB (A1P)
for a period of 5 seconds or
more.
NO
Are the
indoor-outdoor
and outdoor-outdoor NO
Modify the transmission
transmission wirings wirings.
normal?
YES
Disconnect
the outdoor-outdoor
transmission wiring. NO
Does the system normally Replace the outdoor unit main
operate with a single PCB (A1P).
transmission
line?
YES
Mount the DIII-NET extension
adaptor.

U4-03
Indication after YES

launch test Check controller indoor units :
operation? (1) Some error about
thermistor, or fan motor,
electronic expansion
NO valve, or defective PCB.
(2) Test operation was
Operate all indoor units. interrupted by button BS1
"Mode".
NO
Do all units display U9? Check all indoor error
indication.
YES
Did 2 minutes or more NO

elapse after U9 is Carry out the diagnosis again
displayed? after a lapse of 2 minutes or
more.
YES
The PCBs of indoor units

displaying U9 are normal.
Check for indoor units of
other systems to troubleshoot
them according to relevant
error codes.

4.53 Transmission Error between Remote Controller and

Indoor Unit
Error Code U5
Models
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and remote controller is normal.
Detection
Conditions
Supposed Transmission error between indoor unit and remote controller

Causes Connection of 2 main remote controllers (when using 2 remote controllers)
Defective remote controller PCB
Transmission error caused by noise
Troubleshooting
Using 2 Main/Sub
YES setting of the remote YES
remote controllers Set Main/Sub setting of the
control. controller is set to remote controller to Main.
Main. Turn OFF the power supply,
NO NO and restart operation.
All indoor Operation

unit PCB microcomputer NO returns to normal when NO
the power is turned OFF Replace the indoor unit
monitors blink. momentarily. PCB.
YES YES
There is possibility of error
Replace the remote controller. caused by noise. Check the
surrounding area and turn ON
again.
YES
Normal Normal
NO
Replace the indoor unit PCB.
YES
Normal Normal
NO
There is possibility of error
caused by noise. Check the
surrounding area and turn ON
again.
Refer to page 67 for Main/Sub setting.

4.54 Transmission Error between Outdoor Units

Error Code U7
Models
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between outdoor units is normal.

Detection
Conditions
Supposed Connection error of transmission wirings between outdoor unit and external control adaptor
Causes for outdoor unit
Connection error of transmission wirings between outdoor units
Defective external control adaptor for outdoor unit

Troubleshooting
Ensure the sub code or

the lamp display of
monitor mode, and then
go to the following:
U7-01
Error code Sub code
Go to Diagnosis Flowchart-1.
(Transmission error when the
external control adaptor is
mounted)
U7-03
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error between
master and slave 1)
U7-04
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error between
master and slave 2)
U7-05
Error code Sub code
(Multi system error)
U7-06
Error code Sub code
(Manual address setting error for
slave 1, 2)
U7-07
Error code Sub code
(Connection 4 or more outdoor
units to the same system)
U7-11
Error code Sub code
(Connection of excess indoor
units for test operation)

Diagnosis Flowchart-1
U7-01
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error when the

external control adaptor is mounted)
Is
there any
wiring
disconnection or wiring NO
error in the transmission Modify the transmission wirings
wirings to the external to the external control adaptor for
control adaptor for outdoor unit.
outdoor unit?
YES
Is the
normal
operation monitor LED NO Is power supplied to NO
on the outdoor unit the outdoor unit? Supply power to the outdoor
main PCB unit.
blinking?
YES YES
PCB (A1P).
Is the
Is the power
normal supply cable of the
operation monitor LED NO external control adaptor NO
on the external control for outdoor unit connected Connect the power supply cable
adaptor for outdoor to the16 VDC power of the external control adaptor
unit blinking? supply line? for outdoor unit to the 16 VDC
power supply line.
YES YES
Replace the external control
adaptor PCB.
main PCB (A1P).

U7-03
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error between master

and slave 1)
The
multi transmission
wirings to multi slave 1 have NO
caused wiring disconnection in Replace the outdoor unit main
them or are being PCB (A1P) for multi slave 1.
disconnected.
YES
Modify the outdoor unit multi

transmission wirings, and then
reset the power supply.
U7-04
Error code Sub code
(Transmission error between master

and slave 2)
The
multi transmission
wirings to multi slave 2 NO
have caused wiring disconnection in Replace the outdoor unit main
them or are being PCB (A1P) for multi slave 2.
disconnected.
YES

U7-05
Error code Sub code
(Multi system error)
Multi outdoor unit NO

system?
PCB (A1P).
YES
Disconnect the outdoor unit multi


U7-06
Error code Sub code
(Manual address setting error for

slave 1, 2)
One of
outdoor unit
multi transmission wirings has NO
caused wiring disconnection in it Replace the outdoor unit main
or been disconnected. PCB (A1P).
YES
U7-07
Error code Sub code
(Connection of 4 or more outdoor units

in the same system)
4 or
more outdoor
units are connected using NO
the outdoor unit multi Replace the outdoor unit main
transmission PCB (A1P).
wirings.
YES

U7-11
Error code Sub code
(Connection of excess indoor units

for test operation)
There
is an error in
the connection of YES
indoor-outdoor, indoor-indoor, Rectify the error in the connection
and outdoor multi of transmission wirings, and then
transmission reset the power supply.
wirings.
NO
The
capacity to
connect indoor units NO
Check the capacity to connect
falls within the specified
range. indoor units.
YES
PCB (A1P).

4.55 Transmission Error between Main and Sub Remote

Controllers
Error Code U8
Models
Method of Error In case of controlling with 2 remote controller, check the system using microcomputer if signal
Detection transmission between indoor unit and remote controller (main and sub remote controller) is
normal.
Error Decision Transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time.
Conditions
Supposed Transmission error between main and sub remote controller

Causes Connection between sub remote controllers
Defective remote controller PCB
Troubleshooting
Main/Sub
Using 2 remote NO setting of the remote NO
controllers control. Set Main/Sub setting of the
controller is set to remote controller to Main.
Main. Turn OFF the power supply,
YES YES and restart operation.
Main/Sub
setting of both remote NO
Turn the power OFF and
controllers are set to then restart. If an error
Sub. occurs, replace the remote
YES controller PCB.
Set Main/Sub setting of one
remote controller to Main.
and restart operation.
Refer to page 67 for Main/Sub setting.

4.56 Other Indoor Units and Outdoor Unit Abnormality

Error Code U9
Method of Error Detect the error signal for the other indoor unit within the circuit by outdoor unit main PCB.
Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made on any other indoor units within the system concerned.
Conditions
Supposed Transmission error between other indoors and outdoor units

Causes Defective electronic expansion valve of other indoor unit
Defective indoor unit PCB of other indoor unit
Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor and outdoor unit
Troubleshooting
Turn ON all indoor units.
All the units are NO

Continue the operation.
display U9.
YES
U9 has NO
been displayed for 2 Re-diagnose by display after
minutes or more. passage of 2 minutes or more.
YES
The outdoor unit PCB indicated
by the error code U9 is normal.
Check for the indoor unit of other
system, and then conduct
troubleshooting by diagnosis
according to the Error Code
Flowchart.


Indoor Unit and Remote Controller
Error Code UA
Method of Error A difference occurs in data by the type of refrigerant between indoor and outdoor units.
Detection The number of indoor units connected is out of the allowable range.
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as either of the abnormalities aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed Excess of connected indoor units

Mismatch of the refrigerant type of indoor and outdoor unit.
Setting of outdoor unit main PCB was not carried out after replacing to spare PCB.
Troubleshooting
Ensure the sub code or

the lamp display of
monitor mode, and then
go to the following:
UA-17
Error code Sub code
(Connection of excess indoor
units)
UA-18
Error code Sub code
(Connection of incorrect models
of indoor units)
UA-20
Error code Sub code
(Improper combination of outdoor
units)
UA-21
Error code Sub code
(Wrong connection)
UA-31
Error code Sub code
(Multi system combination error)

UA-17
Error code Sub code
The
number of indoor
units connected to the YES
same system is not
more than 64. PCB (A1P).
NO
Excess indoor units are
connected.
Diagnosis Flowchart-2 Check for the connection to
connect the proper number of
UA-18 indoor units.
Error code Sub code
Check if the
refrigerant type of YES
the outdoor unit Replace the outdoor unit main
corresponds to that PCB (A1P).
of the indoor
unit.
NO
Match the refrigerant types of the
outdoor unit and the indoor unit.
UA-20
Error code Sub code
NO
Multi connection? Replace the outdoor unit main
PCB (A1P).
YES
Was the A
outdoor unit NO different model NO
main PCB replaced with a of outdoor unit is Replace the outdoor unit main
spare PCB? connected. PCB (A1P).
YES YES
Check for the model of outdoor
unit.
Was proper setting of NO

Make setting again, and then
spare PCB made? reset the power supply.
YES
Replace the spare PCB.

UA-21
Error code Sub code
PCB (A1P).
UA-31
Error code Sub code
Is the multi
combination of NO
Correct the multi combination of
outdoor units outdoor units.
proper?
YES
Was the
outdoor unit main NO
PCB replaced with a Replace the outdoor unit main
spare PCB? PCB (A1P).
YES
Is the
procurement of the NO
Procure a proper spare PCB.
spare PCB proper?
YES
Is the setting of the NO

Make setting again, and then reset
spare PCB proper? the power supply.
YES

PCB (A1P).

4.58 Address Duplication of Centralized Controller

Error Code UC
Models Centralized controller
Method of Error The principal indoor unit detects the same address as that of its own on any other indoor unit.
Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed Address duplication of centralized controller

Troubleshooting
The centralized address is

duplicated. Make setting change so that
the centralized address will
not be duplicated.


Indoor Unit
Error Code UE
Models Schedule timer
Central remote controller
Method of Error Microcomputer checks if transmission between indoor unit and centralized controller is normal.
Detection
Error Decision Transmission is not carried out normally for a certain amount of time
Conditions
Supposed Transmission error between optional controllers for centralized controller and indoor unit
Causes Connector for setting main controller is disconnected.
(or disconnection of connector for independent / combined use changeover switch.)
Defective PCB for central remote controller
Troubleshooting
Check
the indoor
unit for which
UE is displayed. Is YES
the transmission error A
UE caused on
all indoor
units?
NO
Is the
power supply of NO
the indoor unit, on which Make sure there are no
the UE occurred, hazardous situations, and
turned ON? then turn ON the power
supply.
YES
Has
the setting of
central control Can the
NO setting of central YES
group No. been made Make correct setting of the
with the indoor unit on control group No be
made? central control group No.
which the UE
occurred?
NO
YES For
VRV systems,
can the setting of NO
central control group No. be Check outdoor units to which
made in one and the the refrigerant system is
same refrigerant connected.
system?
Was the YES
Check whether or not there
central control NO are no problems with the
group No. for indoor transmission wiring length,
unit changed? types of cables and wires,
number of units connected,
YES and others. If no problems,
replace the indoor unit PCB.
Reset the power supplies of
every centralized controller.
For the intelligent Touch
controller, register the air
conditioner again while in
DIII-NET test run menu.

Check the
transmission wiring
between centralized
controller for any broken wire. For NG
details, refer to information in the Correct the wiring.
“Procedure for checking broken
wires” section.
CHECK 15
OK
Check the
transmission
wiring between main
centralized controller for NG
any broken wire. For details, Correct the wiring.
refer to information in the
“Procedure for
checking broken
wires”
section.
OK
Has the main

centralized controller setting NO
Correct the connection of the
connector been connector.
connected?
YES
Disconnect the transmission
wiring of the main centralized
controller, and then check the
voltage between the
transmission terminals (F1 and
F2) of the master unit
transmission equipment using
a multimeter.
Is the
voltage
between the NO
terminals F1 (+) and F2 (-) Replace the centralized
in the range of 15.2 controller.
to 17.6 VDC?
YES
Centralized controller:
Normal
It is supposed that the error

results from external factors
(e.g. noises) from other
equipment.

4.60 System Not Set Yet

Error Code UF
Method of Error On check operation, the number of indoor units in terms of transmission is not corresponding to
Detection that of indoor units that have made changes in temperature.
Error Decision The error is determined as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected through
Conditions checking the system for any erroneous connection of units on the check operation.
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outdoor units and outdoor-
Causes outdoor units
Failure to execute check operation
Stop valve is not opened
Troubleshooting
Are the stop NO

valves opened? Open the stop valve.
YES
Is
Is the check indoor-outdoor YES
NO and outdoor-outdoor unit
operation Replace the indoor unit PCB.
carried out? transmission wiring
normal?
YES
NO
Is
indoor - outdoor NO
and outdoor - outdoor unit After fixing incorrect wiring,
transmission wiring press and hold the RESET
normal? button on the outdoor unit
main PCB for 5 seconds.
YES ∗ The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Wiring check operation may

not have been carried out
successfully.

4.61 System Abnormality, Refrigerant System Address

Undefined
Error Code UH
Method of Error Detect an indoor unit with no auto address setting.

Detection
Error Decision The error decision is made as soon as the abnormality aforementioned is detected.
Conditions
Supposed Improper connection of transmission wiring between indoor-outdoor units and outdoor-
Causes outdoor units

Troubleshooting
Is Does
electricity an error
being introduced occur even after
for the first time after YES 12 minutes elapses
from the time when NO
installation or after an indoor Normal
or outdoor unit main electricity is introduced
PCB has been to indoor and
replaced? outdoor
units?
NO YES
Is
indoor -
outdoor and outdoor - NO
outdoor unit transmission After fixing incorrect wiring,
wiring normal? press and hold the RESET
button on the master outdoor
unit main PCB for 5 seconds.
YES ∗ The unit will not run for up to
12 minutes.
Press and hold the RESET
button on the outdoor unit
main PCB for 5 seconds
NO
Does an error occur? Normal
YES
Disconnect the
outdoor-outdoor
unit transmission wiring YES
to create the one-system Mount the DIII-NET extension
status, and then check adaptor.
whether or not the
system is
normal.
NO
Does a
UH error occur for NO
Replace the indoor unit PCB.
all indoor units in the
system?
YES
PCB (A1P).

Check SiMT341715E
5. Check
5.1 High Pressure Check
CHECK 1
Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points.
Stop valve closed ←Check to be sure the stop valve is open.

Local High pipe
pressure Bent or crashed pipe ←Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
rise resistance
Clogging of foreign ←Is there any temperature difference caused before
particles and after the filter or branch pipe?
In cooling
If the outdoor unit electronic ←Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
Rise in high expansion valve is throttled: Defective valve coil
Defective outdoor
pressure (See ∗1.) unit electronic
expansion valve Defective valve body
Defective A temperature difference in excess of 10°C
high between the inlet and the outlet is deemed to be abnormal.
pressure Defective high pressure sensor ←Are the electrical characteristics normal?
control Defective
control
Defective outdoor unit main PCB ←Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
In cooling
←Is the suction air temperature not more than
High suction High suction Short circuit
air 43°C?
air temperature
temperature of outdoor unit High outdoor air temperature ←Is the outdoor air temperature not more than
of the
condenser 43°C?
Degradation Dirty condenser

in condensing ←Is the heat exchanger clogged? (In cooling)
capacity
Mixing of non-condensable gas ←Is air or else mixed in the refrigerant system?
Defective fan ←Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?

Decreased motor Are the motor coil resistance and
fan insulation normal?
Decreased output Defective outdoor
fan airflow unit main PCB ←If a spare PCB is mounted, is the capacity
rate (Including
capacity setting) setting properly made?
High air Dirty filter ←Is the air filter clogged?

passage
resistance
Obstacle ←Is there any obstacle in the air passage?
Excessive refrigerant charging ←Refer to CHECK 6 .
∗1. In cooling, it is normal if the outdoor electronic expansion valve (Y1E) is fully open.

SiMT341715E Check
5.2 Low Pressure Check

CHECK 2
Referring to the Fault Tree Analysis (FTA) shown below, probe the defective points.
Defective Defective low pressure sensor ←Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Defective compressor ←Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
capacity Defective outdoor unit main PCB
low pressure corresponding to the measurement of the pressure sensor?
control control
Defective low pressure sensor ←Are the electrical characteristics normal?
Defective
low pressure ←Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
protection Defective hot gas solenoid valve
control ←Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Abnormally low
pressure In cooling
(Low evaporating If the indoor unit
temperature) electronic
expansion valve is
throttled too much: Defective indoor
unit electronic Defective valve coil ←Are the coil resistance and insulation normal?
expansion valve
Defective valve body
Defective electronic
expansion valve
Defective gas pipe ←Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
control
Defective thermistor of indoor unit
control
Defective liquid pipe ←Check for the thermistor resistance and connection.
thermistor of indoor unit
←Is the pressure value checked with the Service Checker
Low suction Low suction air Short circuit ←Is the suction air temperature not less than 14˚C
air temperature temperature of
of the indoor unit Low outdoor air temperature ←Is the indoor temperature not more than 14˚C
evaporator
←Is the connector properly connected?
Defective suction air thermistor of indoor unit
Are the thermistor resistance characteristics normal?
Abnormal piping length ←Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
High pipe ←Conduct visual checks for pipe conditions.
Bent or crashed pipe
resistance
Clogging of foreign particles ←Is there any temperature difference caused before
and after the filter or branch pipe?
Stop valve closed
Less ←Check to be sure the stop valve is open.
circulation
quantity of Refrigerant shortage ←Refer to CHECK 7 .
refrigerant
Moisture choke ←Eliminate moisture by vacuum operation.
Dirty ←Is the heat exchanger clogged?
evaporator
Degradation
in condensing Defective fan motor ←Can the fan motor be rotated with hands?
capacity Decreased Are the motor coil resistance and insulation normal?
fan output Defective outdoor unit
main PCB (Including ←If a spare PCB is mounted, is the capacity
Decreased
fan airflow capacity setting) setting properly made?
rate High air
passage Dirty filter ←Is the air filter clogged?
resistance
Obstacle ←Is there any obstacle in the air passage?

Check SiMT341715E
5.3 Superheat Operation Check

CHECK 3
Identify the defective points referring to the failure factor analysis (FTA) as follows.
Hot gas circuit clogging

Defective hot
gas bypass Defective solenoid ← Check if coil resistance and insulation
control valve coil
are normal.
Defective solenoid
valve body
Defective valve coil ← Check if coil resistance and

Subcooling insulation are normal.
Defective electronic Defective valve
discharge expansion body
pipe Defective valve failure Defective low
temperature subcooling ← Check if the voltage property is
pressure sensor
control electronic normal.
expansion valve Control Defective subcooling
control (Y2E) failure heat exchanger outlet ← Check if the connector is connected properly.
thermistor Check if the thermistor resistance property is
normal.
Temperature Defective outdoor ← Check if the pressure value given by the
increase of unit main PCB service checker corresponding to actual
discharge measurement value by the sensor.
pipe
Superheat due to
Compressor shaft damage
overheat Superheat due to
defective compressor
If the indoor unit

electronic
expansion valve is
excessively
throttled. (∗1)
Defective Indoor unit

Defective valve coil ← Check if coil resistance and insulation are
superheated electronic
expansion normal.
degree
control. valve failure Defective valve body
Refrigerant ← Refer to CHECK 7

shortage
Irregular piping length ← Does the piping length fall in the permissible range?
Bend/collapse ← Conduct visual checks.
Large resistance
of piping (Including moisture choke) ← Remove the moisture by vacuum break. (Refer to CHECK 8 )
Stop valve is closed. ← Check if the stop valve is open.
∗1. “Superheating temperature control” in cooling mode is conducted by indoor unit electronic expansion valve.
∗2. Judgement criteria of superheat operation:
(1) Suction gas superheating temperature: 10 degrees and over. (2) Discharge gas superheating temperature: 45 degrees
and over, except for immediately after starting and drooping control, etc..
(Use the above stated values as a guide. Depending on the other conditions, the unit may be normal despite the values
within the above scope.)

SiMT341715E Check
5.4 Power Transistor Check

CHECK 4
Perform the following procedures prior to check.
(1) Power OFF.
(2) Remove all the wiring connected to the PCB where power transistors are mounted on.
Preparation
Multimeter ∗ Prepare the analog type of multimeter.
For the digital type of multimeter, those with
diode check function are available for the
checking.
Point of Measurement and Judgement Criteria

Turn OFF the power supply. Then, after a lapse of 10 minutes or more, make measurement of
resistance.
When using the analog type of multimeter, When using the digital type of multimeter,
make measurement in resistance make measurement in diode check mode
measurement mode in the x1 kΩ range. ( )
Measuring Measuring
No. point Judgement Remarks No. point Judgement Remarks
Criteria Criteria
+ – + –
1 P2 U 1 P2 U Due to condenser
1.2 V and charge and so on,
2 P2 V 2 ~ 15 kΩ 2 P2 V resistance
more
measurement may
3 P2 W 3 P2 W require some time.
4 U P2 4 U P2
5 V P2 5 V P2
Due to condenser
6 W P2 15 kΩ and charge and so on, 6 W P2
more resistance 0.3 ~ 0.7 V
7 N3 U (including ) measurement may 7 N3 U
require some time.
8 N3 V 8 N3 V
9 N3 W 9 N3 W
10 U N3 10 U N3 Due to condenser
1.2 V and charge and so on,
11 V N3 2 ~ 15 kΩ 11 V N3 resistance
more
measurement may
12 W N3 12 W N3 require some time.
PCB and Circuit Diagram
P1 P2 P3
DM IGBT
X10A K2
J1
L1
J2
L2
L3
J3
N3
J1
J2
U V W
J3 X11A
Since the appearance of PCB shown in this outline drawing is different from
the actual appearance, use it as a reference drawing.
N3 U V W
P1 P3

Check SiMT341715E
5.5 Refrigerant Overcharge Check

CHECK 6
In case of VRV Systems, the only way to judge as the overcharge of refrigerant is with operating
conditions due to the relationship to pressure control and electronic expansion valve control.
As information for making a judgement, refer to the information below.
Diagnosis of refrigerant overcharge

1. High pressure rises. Consequently, overload control is conducted to cause insufficient
cooling capacity.
2. The superheated degree of suction gas lowers (or wet operation is performed).
Consequently, the compressor becomes lower in discharge pipe temperature despite of
pressure loads.
3. The subcooled degree of condensate rises.
Cooling
High pressure
drooping control
High pressure Frequency comes to
gradually rises with the minimum level.
increase in
frequency. Subcooled degree
becomes higher.
(Liquid connection
High pressure pipe temperature
lowers.)
(Low pressure is
maintained at a
constant level.)
Low pressure
Low pressure rises due
to decreased
compressor output.
Frequency
To maintain low pressure, frequency

increases under the capacity
control.
(Degree of overcharge)
Proper amount Higher degree of overcharge

SiMT341715E Check
5.6 Refrigerant Shortage Check

CHECK 7
In case of VRV Systems, the only way to judge as the shortage of refrigerant is with operating
conditions due to the relationship to pressure control and electronic expansion valve control.
As information for making a judgement, refer to the information below.
Diagnosis of refrigerant shortage

1. The superheated degree of suction gas rises. Consequently, the compressor discharge gas
temperature becomes higher.
2. The superheated degree of suction gas rises. Consequently, the electronic expansion valve
turns open.
3. Low pressure drops to cause the unit not to demonstrate cooling capacity.
Cooling
The opening degree of the indoor unit Fan control is activated for high
electronic expansion valve becomes pressure protection under
larger. cooling control at low outdoor
Either of the electronic expansion air temperature, i.e., the fan is
valves becomes fully open. hunting at high pressure.
Frequency comes to the minimum level.
High pressure
(Low pressure
is maintained at High pressure drops
a constant with decrease in
level.) compressor capacity.
Low pressure
Low pressure rises as the
opening degree of the indoor
unit electronic expansion
valve becomes larger.
Frequency slightly increases If frequency comes to the
under the capacity control. minimum level, low
pressure cannot be
Frequency maintained.
To maintain low
pressure,
frequency drops
due to the
capacity control.
(Degree of refrigerant shortage)

Proper amount Higher degree of shortage

Check SiMT341715E
5.7 Vacuuming and Dehydration Procedure

CHECK 8
Conduct vacuuming and dehydration in the piping system following the procedure for Normal
vacuuming and dehydration described below.
Furthermore, if moisture may get mixed in the piping system, follow the procedure for Special
vacuuming and dehydration described below.
Normal vacuuming and dehydration

(1) Vacuuming and dehydration
• Use a vacuum pump that enables vacuuming up to –100.7 kPa (5 torr, –755 mmHg).
• Connect manifold gauges to the service ports of liquid pipe and gas pipe and run the
vacuum pump for a period of two or more hours to conduct evacuation to –100.7 kPa or
less.
• If the degree of vacuum does not reach –100.7 kPa or less even though evacuation is
conducted for a period of two hours, moisture will have entered the system or refrigerant
leakage will have been caused. In this case, conduct evacuation for a period of another
one hour.
• If the degree of vacuum does not reach –100.7 kPa or less even though evacuation is
conducted for a period of three hours, conduct the leak tests.
(2) Leaving in vacuum state
• Leave the compressor at the degree of vacuum of –100.7 kPa or less for a period of one
hour or more, and then check to be sure that the vacuum gauge reading does not rise. (If
the reading rises, moisture may have remained in the system or refrigerant leakage may
have been caused.)
(3) Additional refrigerant charge
• Purge air from the manifold gauge connection hoses, and then charge a necessary amount
of refrigerant.
Special vacuuming and dehydration - In cases where moisture gets mixed into the piping∗
• Follow the same procedure as that for 1) Normal vacuuming and dehydration described
above.
(2) Vacuum break
• Pressurize with nitrogen gas up to 0.05 MPa.
• Conduct vacuuming and dehydration for a period of one hour or more. If the degree of
vacuum does not reach –100.7 kPa or less even though evacuation is conducted for a
period of two hours or more, repeat vacuum break - vacuuming and dehydration.
(4) Leaving in vacuum state
• Leave the compressor at the degree of vacuum of –100.7 kPa or less for a period of one
hour or more, and then check to be sure that the vacuum gauge reading does not rise.
(5) Additional refrigerant charge
• Purge air from the manifold gauge connection hoses, and then charge a necessary amount
of refrigerant.
∗ In case of construction during rainy reason, if dew condensation occurs in the piping due
to extended construction period, or rainwater or else may enter the piping during
construction work:

SiMT341715E Check
5.8 Thermistor Check

CHECK 11
Thermistor type of indoor units

R1T R2T R3T R4T
Model Suction air thermistor Indoor heat exchanger Indoor heat exchanger Discharge air
(liquid) thermistor (gas) thermistor thermistor
FXFSQ-A –
Type C Type A
FXFQ-A –
FXZQ-M Type B Type J –
FXUQ-A Type C Type A –
FXCQ-M –
FXEQ-A –
FXKQ-MA –
FXDQ-PD
FXDQ-ND –
FXDQ-SP
FXSQ-PA –
Type A
FXMQ-PA –
FXMQ-M –
Type B Type J
FXHQ-MA –
FXAQ-P –
FXLQ-MA –
FXNQ-MA –
FXVQ-N Type J
FXBQ-P –
FXBPQ-P –
FXMQ-MF Type J
Thermistor type of outdoor units

Thermistor Type
R1T Outdoor air thermistor E
R21T Discharge pipe thermistor (for M1C) H
R22T Discharge pipe thermistor (for M2C) H
R3T Suction pipe thermistor A
R4T Heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor A
R5T Subcooling heat exchanger liquid pipe thermistor A
R6T Subcooling heat exchanger gas pipe thermistor A
R8T Compressor body thermistor (for M1C) H
R9T Compressor body thermistor (for M2C) H

Check SiMT341715E
Thermistor Resistance (kΩ)

temperature
(°C) Type A Type B Type C
–30 363.8 361.7719 –
–25 266.8 265.4704 –
–20 197.8 196.9198 –
–15 148.2 147.5687 –
–10 112.0 111.6578 111.8
–5 85.52 85.2610 85.42
0 65.84 65.6705 65.80
5 51.05 50.9947 51.07
10 39.91 39.9149 39.97
15 31.44 31.4796 31.51
20 24.95 25.0060 25.02
25 19.94 20.0000 20.00
30 16.04 16.1008 16.10
35 12.99 13.0426 13.04
40 10.58 10.6281 10.63
45 8.669 8.7097 8.711
50 7.143 7.1764 7.179
55 5.918 5.9407 –
60 4.928 4.9439 –
65 4.123 4.1352 –
70 3.467 3.4757 –
75 – 2.9349 –
80 – 2.4894 –
85 – 2.1205 –
90 – 1.8138 –
95 – 1.5575 –
100 – 1.3425 –
105 – 1.1614 –
3SA48002
3SA48018
3SA48019 3SA48016
Drawing No. 3S480003 3SA48001 (AD100008)
(AD94A045) (AD87A001) 3S480014
3SA48013 (AD150384)
(AD100026)
∗This data is for reference purposes only.

SiMT341715E Check
Thermistor Resistance (kΩ)

temperature
(°C) Type E Type H Type J
–30 362.4862 3257.371 359.8518
–25 265.9943 2429.222 265.0699
–20 197.3083 1827.883 197.1476
–15 147.8597 1387.099 147.7348
–10 111.8780 1061.098 111.7984
–5 85.4291 817.9329 85.3927
0 65.8000 635.0831 65.8000
5 51.0954 496.5712 51.1273
10 39.9938 391.0070 40.0423
15 31.5417 309.9511 31.5974
20 25.0554 247.2696 25.1125
25 20.0395 198.4674 20.0949
30 16.1326 160.2244 16.1860
35 13.0683 130.0697 13.1222
40 10.6490 106.1517 10.7042
45 8.7269 87.0725 8.7834
50 7.1905 71.7703 7.2479
55 5.9524 59.4735 6.0131
60 4.9536 49.5180 5.0144
65 4.1434 41.4168 4.2021
70 3.4825 34.7923 3.5381
75 2.9407 29.3499 2.9925
80 2.4943 24.8586 2.5420
85 2.1247 21.1360 2.1671
90 1.8173 18.0377 1.8554
95 1.5605 15.4487 1.5949
100 1.3451 13.2768 1.3764
105 1.1636 11.4395 1.1923
110 – 9.8902 1.0365
115 – 8.5788 0.9042
120 – 7.4650 0.7914
125 – 6.5156 0.6950
130 – 5.7038 0.6121
135 – 5.0073 0.5408
140 – 4.4080 0.4791
145 – 3.8907 0.4257
150 – 3.4429 0.3792
3SA48003 3SA48006 3SA48005
Drawing No. (AD87A001) (AD87A001) (AD87A001)
∗This data is for reference purposes only.

Check SiMT341715E
5.9 Pressure Sensor Check

CHECK 12 Pressure Sensor and Voltage Characteristics
Detected Pressure
4.15 4.15
PH (MPa) = × VH – × 0.5
PH, PL 3.0 3.0
(kg/cm2)(MPa) 1.7 1.7
PL (MPa) = × VL – × 0.5
51.0 5.0 3.0 3.0
PH : High pressure (MPa)

45.9 4.5
High Pressure (PH) PL : Low pressure (MPa)
VH : Output Voltage (High Side) (VDC)
40.8 4.0 VL : Output Voltage (Low Side) (VDC)
35.7 3.5
30.6 3.0
25.5 2.5
20.4 2.0
Low Pressure (PL)
15.3 1.5
10.2 1.0
5.1 0.5
0 0
–5.1 –0.5
–0.5 0 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4
Output Voltage VH, VL (VDC)
Voltage Measurement Point of the High Pressure Sensor

+5 V
X32A (Red)
(4) Red
Black High
(3)
pressure
sensor
(2)
Microcomputer
A/D input (1) White
Make measurement of DC
voltage between these wires.
Voltage Measurement Point of the Low Pressure Sensor

+5 V
X31A (Blue)
(4) Red
(3) Black Low

pressure
Microcomputer
(2) White sensor
A/D input
(1)
Make measurement of DC voltage between these wires.

SiMT341715E Check
5.10 Broken Wire Check of the Relay Wires

CHECK 15 1. Procedure for checking outdoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring for broken wires
On the system shown below, turn OFF the power supply to all equipment, short circuit
between the outdoor-outdoor unit terminal F1 and F2 in the "Outdoor Unit A" that is farthest
from the central remote controller, and then conduct continuity checks between the
transmission wiring terminal blocks F1 and F2 of the central remote controller using a
multimeter. If there is continuity between the said terminal blocks, the outdoor-outdoor unit
transmission wiring has no broken wires in it.
If there is no continuity, the transmission wiring may have broken wires. With the outdoor-
outdoor unit terminal of the "Outdoor Unit A" short circuited, conduct continuity checks
between the transmission wiring terminal blocks F1 and F2 of the unified ON/OFF controller.
If there is no continuity as well, conduct continuity checks between the outdoor-outdoor unit
terminal of the "Outdoor Unit E", between the outdoor-outdoor unit terminal of the "Outdoor
Unit D", between the outdoor-outdoor unit terminal of the "Outdoor Unit C", … in the order
described, thus identifying the place with continuity.
If the place with continuity can be identified, there may be broken wires in places before the
said place with continuity.
2. Procedure for checking indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring for broken wires (for
checking the indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring of the "Outdoor Unit C" for broken
wires)
Turn OFF the power supply to all equipment, short circuit between the indoor-outdoor unit
terminal F1 and F2 in the "Outdoor Unit C", and then conduct continuity checks between the
transmission wirings F1 and F2 of the "Indoor Unit a" that is farthest from the "Outdoor Unit
C" using a multimeter. If there is continuity between the said transmission wirings, the
indoor-outdoor unit transmission wiring has no broken wires in it.
If there is no continuity, the transmission wiring may have broken wires. With the indoor-
outdoor unit terminal of the "Outdoor Unit C" short circuited, identify the place with continuity
in the transmission wiring of the "Indoor Unit b", transmission wiring of the "Indoor Unit c",
and transmission wiring of the "Indoor Unit d" in the order described.
If the place with continuity can be identified, there may be broken wires in places before the
said place with continuity.
Short circuit
between the
outdoor-outdoor
unit terminal
parts.
Short circuit between Outdoor-outdoor Unit

Transmission Wiring
Check the transmission the indoor-outdoor unit
wiring for continuity. Indoor-outdoor Unit terminal parts.
If there is continuity, the Transmission Wiring
indoor-outdoor unit
transmission has no
broken wires in it.
Check the transmission

wiring for continuity.
If there is continuity, the
outdoor-outdoor unit
transmission has no broken
wires in it.
Unified ON/OFF controller Central remote controller

Check SiMT341715E
5.11 Fan Motor Connector Check (Power Supply Cable)

CHECK 16 (1) Turn OFF the power supply.
(2) Measure the resistance between phases of U, V, W at the motor side connectors (3-core
wire) to check that the values are balanced and there is no short circuiting, while connector
or relay connector is disconnected.
Red U
Measure the
White V resistance values
between phases
U, V, W.
Black W

SiMT341715E
Part 7
Appendix
1. Wiring Diagrams..................................................................................302
1.1 Outdoor Unit .........................................................................................302
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit ...................................................................................306
1.3 Residential Indoor Unit .........................................................................330
1.4 BP Unit .................................................................................................341
1.5 Air Treatment Equipment .....................................................................345
2. Compressor Cover Removal and Assembly .......................................351
2.1 Compressor Cover Removal ................................................................351
2.2 Compressor Cover Assembly...............................................................355
Appendix 301
Wiring Diagrams SiMT341715E
1. Wiring Diagrams
1.1 Outdoor Unit
RXQ6/8AYM, RXQ6/8AY14, RXQ6/8AY1S
3D111835B
302 Appendix
SiMT341715E Wiring Diagrams
RXQ10/12AYM, RXQ10/12AY14, RXQ10/12AY1S
3D111836D
Appendix 303
RXQ14AYM, RXQ14AY14, RXQ14AY1S
2D111837C
304 Appendix
RXQ16/18/20AYM, RXQ16/18/20AY14, RXQ16/18/20AY1S
2D111838A
Appendix 305
1.2 VRV Indoor Unit

1.2.1 Ceiling Mounted Cassette (Round Flow with Sensing) Type
FXFSQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140AVM, FXFSQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140AVS,
FXFSQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140AV4
3D112965A
306 Appendix
1.2.2 Ceiling Mounted Cassette (Round Flow) Type

FXFQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140AVM, FXFQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140AVS,
FXFQ25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140AV4
3D112978A
Appendix 307
1.2.3 Auto Grille Panel

BYCQ125EASF (for FXFSQ and FXFQ)
3D108035
308 Appendix
1.2.4 Ceiling Mounted Cassette (Compact Multi Flow) Type

FXZQ20/25/32/40/50MVE9, FXZQ20/25/32/40/50MVE4, FXZQ20/25/32/40/50MVES
C: 3D064843
Appendix 309
1.2.5 4-Way Flow Ceiling Suspended Type

FXUQ71/100AVEB
3D079580
310 Appendix
1.2.6 Ceiling Mounted Cassette (Double Flow) Type

FXCQ20/25/32/63MVE9, FXCQ20/25/32/63MVE4
C: 3D039558A
Appendix 311
FXCQ40/50/80/125MVE9, FXCQ40/50/80/125MVE4
C: 3D039559A
312 Appendix
1.2.7 Ceiling Mounted Cassette (Single Flow) Type

FXEQ20/25/32/40/50/63AV36
3D102995D
Appendix 313
314
INDOOR UNIT
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
A2P TERMINAL BOARD
Wiring Diagrams
C1 CAPACITOR (M1F)
POWER SUPPLY
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) ELECTRIC PARTS BOX
220-240V 220V
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE ~ ~ X18A X16A
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) 50Hz 60Hz
S1Q
K1R-K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) C1
FXKQ25/32/40/63MAVE(4)
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) R1T R2T R3T S1L A2P

X1M A1P T1R X1M
L N X2M
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) GRN/ t˚ t˚
A1P RED WHT YLW t˚ BLK
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) FC FH FL FLL
X4A L N
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP)
ORG BRN X13A X12A X11A
X9A X8A X16A
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) A2P RED BLK F1U
HAP
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) YC
X3A X2A LL X18A X30A
X3A PNK
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X1A T2 T2 NOTE-4
T1R WHT
R2T·R3T THERMISTOR (COIL) RED GRY BLK ORG BRN T1 T1 INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
YLW
S1L FLOAT SWITCH F2 F2 NOTE-3
t˚ ORG
NOTE-5 F1 F1 TRANSMISSION WIRING
S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP) X1A BLU
P2 P2 CENTRAL REMOTE
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) K1R K2R K3R KAR KPR BLK
P1 P1 CONTROLLER
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) X2M
FC FH FL FLL X6A X7A
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) X4A Y2 Y1
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE RED BLK ORG BRN
A2P
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER YC R1T
WHT P1P2
R1T X3A X2A LL RED WHT
THERMISTOR (AIR) M SS1
X1A MSW M
SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) ~ ~
1.2.8 Ceiling Mounted Cassette Corner Type
RED GRY BLK ORG BRN Y1E WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER

CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS M1S M1P (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
X16A CONNECTOR (ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) WHT M
C1 ~ Q1M
X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR YLW M1F
FOR ELECTRICAL APPENDICES)
NOTES) 1. : TERMINAL BLOCK, , : CONNECTOR, : TERMINAL

2. : : FIELD WIRING
3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
4. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER.
IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
5. IN CASE HIGH E. S. P. OPERATION, CHANGE OVER THE WIRING CONNECTION FROM X2A TO X3A.
6. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK : PINK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW ORG : ORANGE BLU : BLUE BLK : BLACK RED : RED BRN : BROWN GRY : GRAY)
7. UES COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
C: 3D039564C
SiMT341715E
Appendix
1.2.9 Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type (Standard Series)

FXDQ20/25/32PDVE(4), FXDQ20/25/32PDV2S, FXDQ20/25/32PDVET, FXDQ20/25/32PDVT4,
FXDQ40/50/63NDVE(4), FXDQ40/50/63NDV2S, FXDQ40/50/63NDVET, FXDQ40/50/63NDVT4
3D103337
Appendix 315
1.2.10 Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type (Compact Series)

FXDQ20/25/32/40/50/63SPV1(4)
3D099151
316 Appendix
1.2.11 Middle Static Pressure Ceiling Mounted Duct Type

FXSQ20/25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140PAVE(4)
C: 3D092752C
Appendix 317
FXSQ20/25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140PAVS
3D099246B
318 Appendix
1.2.12 Ceiling Mounted Duct Type

FXMQ20/25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140PAVE(4), FXMQ20/25/32/40/50/63/80/100/125/140PAVS
3D103336
Appendix 319
FXMQ200/250MVES, FXMQ200/250MVE4, FXMQ200/250MVE9
C: 3D039621E
320 Appendix
Appendix
SiMT341715E
INDOOR UNIT H3P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE

A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD (FILTER SIGN-RED)
C1R NOTE-4
CAPACITOR (M1F) H4P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
F1U FUSE( B , 5A, 250V) (DEFROST-ORANGE) POWER SUPPLY RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB) 220-240V 220V (WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER)
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) SS2 SELECTOR SWITCH ~ ~ A2P A3P
KAR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1S) (WIRELESS ADDRESS SET) 50Hz 60Hz A1P X2A
SS1 H1P
KPR MAGNETIC RELAY (M1P) CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS H2P BS1
M1F MOTOR (INDOOR FAN) X8A CONNECTOR (FLOAT SWITCH) SS2 H3P
M1S MOTOR (SWING FLAP) X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR X1M X23A
R1T R2T R3T X1A X1A H4P
Q1M THERMO SWITCH (M1F EMBEDDED) ELECTRICAL APPENDICES)
1.2.13 Ceiling Suspended Type
L N
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X23A CONNECTOR (WIRELESS t˚ t˚ t˚ NOTE-6
R2T THERMISTOR (COIL LIQUID) REMOTE CONTROLLER) A1P RED WHT
R3T THERMISTOR (COIL GAS)
NOTES) L N X13A X12A X11A X8A
S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (SWING FLAP)
1. : TERMINAL BLOCK , : CONNECTOR F1U X18A NOTE-5
T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V/22V) HAP
X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER) : SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR X3A T2 PNK T2 INPUT FROM
X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) T1 WHT T1 OUTSIDE
2. : FIELD WIRING
Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE 3. IN CASE USING CENTRAL REMOTE CONTROLLER, PC F2 YLW F2 NOTE-3
X30A ORG F1 TRANSMISSION
PC PHASE CONTROL CIRCUIT CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH t˚ X1A F1
OPTIONAL PARTS P2
BLU P2 WIRING CENTRAL
THE ATTACHED INSTRUCTION MANUAL. BLK P1 REMOTE CONTROLLER
M1P MOTOR (DRAIN PUMP) 4. X23A IS CONNECTED WHEN THE WIRELESS REMOTE T1R P1
WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER KAR KPR X2M
CONTROLLER KIT IS BEING USED. X27A X23A
R1T THERMISTOR (AIR) X9A X6A X25A X7A
FXHQ32/63/100MAVE, FXHQ32/63/100MAVS, FXHQ32/63/100MAV7
5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, X4A R1T

SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN/SUB)
FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE P1 P2
RECEIVER/DISPLAY UNIT (ATTACHED BLK YLW RED SS1
TO WIRELESS REMOTE CONTROLLER) SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER. IN DETAILS, REFER WHT RED
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT. WHT C1R MSW WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
~ M
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD 6. IN CASE INSTALLING THE DRAIN PUMP, REMOVE THE WHT (OPTIONAL ACCESSORY)
SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR OF X8A AND EXECUTE THE S1Q M1S M
BS1 PUSH BUTTON (ON/OFF) BLK ~ Y1E
ADDITIONAL WIRING FOR FLOAT SWITCH AND DRAIN PUMP. X18A
H1P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (ON-RED) M M1P
7. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS.
~ Q1M X23A A1P C1R T1R
H2P LIGHT EMITTING DIODE
(TIMER-GREEN) PNK : PINK WHT : WHITE YLW : YELLOW ORG : ORANGE M1F X2M X1M
( ) ELECTRIC PARTS BOX X8A
BLU : BLUE BLK : BLACK RED : RED
8. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
C: 3D039801D
321
Wiring Diagrams

FXAQ20/25/32/40/50/63PVE(4)(S)
3D076498
322 Appendix
1.2.15 Floor Standing Type, Concealed Floor Standing Type

FXLQ20/25/32/40/50/63MAVE, FXLQ20/25/32/40/50/63MAVE4, FXLQ20/25/32/40/50/63MAVE8,
FXNQ20/25/32/40/50/63MAVE, FXNQ20/25/32/40/50/63MAVE4, FXNQ20/25/32/40/50/63MAVE8
C: 3D039826G
Appendix 323
1.2.16 Floor Standing Duct Type

FXVQ125/200/250NY1(4)
3D093434D
324 Appendix
FXVQ400/500NY1(4)
3D093435C
Appendix 325
FXVQ500NY16
3D101521B
326 Appendix
FXVQ125/200/250NTL
3D101660A
Appendix 327
FXVQ400/500NTL
3D101661B
328 Appendix
1.2.17 Clean Room Air Conditioner

FXBQ40/50/63PVE(4), FXBPQ63PVE(4)
3D100642A
Appendix 329
1.3 Residential Indoor Unit

1.3.1 Slim Ceiling Mounted Duct Type
FDKS25/35EAVMB, FDKS25/35CAVMB, FDKS50/60CVMB, FDKS25/35EVMB4, FDKS25/35/50/60CVMB4,
CDKS25/35/50/60KVM
C: 3D045012P
BP UNIT
330 Appendix
FDKS09/12EAVMS, FDKS09/12CAVMS, FDKS18/24CVMS
C: 3D059875B
(BP UNIT)
Appendix 331

FTKJ25/35/50NVMW, FTKJ25/35/50NVMS, FTKJ25/35/50NVMMW, FTKJ25/35/50NVMMS
C: 3D085644H
BP unit
332 Appendix
FTKJ25/35/50NVMVW, FTKJ25/35/50NVMVS
C: 3D089688B
Appendix 333
FTKJ25/35/50NVM4W, FTKJ25/35/50NVM4S
C: 3D089654A
334 Appendix
FTKJ09/12/18NV1SW, FTKJ09/12/18NV1SS
Appendix 335
FTKS25/35DVM(4), FTKS25/35KVM
C: 3D046453H
336 Appendix
FTKS50BVMA8
C: 3D038065L
Appendix 337
FTKS50/60/71FVM(4), FTKS50/60/71KVM
C: 3D038530U
338 Appendix
FTKS09/12DVMS
C: 3D063059A
(BP UNIT)
Appendix 339
FTKS18/24/28FVMS
C: 3D040507H
(BP UNIT)
340 Appendix
1.4 BP Unit
BPMKS967A3
3D048288
Appendix 341
BPMKS967A2
3D048438
342 Appendix
BPMKS967B3S
3D077230
Appendix 343
BPMKS967B2S
3D077229A
344 Appendix
1.5 Air Treatment Equipment

1.5.1 Outdoor-Air Processing Unit
FXMQ125/200/250MFV1, FXMQ125/200/250MFV7
C: 3D044996E
Appendix 345
FXMQ48/72/96MFVJU
3D065426D
346 Appendix
Appendix
L N
SiMT341715E
POWER SUPPLY
220-240V
~
50Hz
X1M
L N
VKM50/80/100GAV1(9)
ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING

(OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES) EXTERNAL OUTPUT
(KRP50-2) Note) 4 TERMINALS
Tes10
1 CONTACT R3T R4T R5T
R1T R2T Ry1
2
CAPACITY Note) 7 Y1E
M
Ry2 AC220-240V t˚ t˚ t˚ RED GRN
t˚ t˚ 3 A2P
RED
WHT
0.01~1.6A
RED
WHT
A1P
R S
X2M JC Note) 5 X3M
L N SS1 INPUT FROM F1U X13A X12A X11A X9A X8A X7A PNK Note) 6
X12A X13A X9A X10A X11A NOR OUTSIDE T2 T2
Note) 8 H J2 WHT INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
HAP M
RED T1 T1
F1U J1 Note) 3
RED T2R RED HAP YLW
F2 F2
F2 ORG TO CONNECTION WIRING AND
T1R RED t˚ X3A F1
F1 F1 CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER UNIT
X7A BLU
t˚ BLK P2 P2
P1
X18A BLK
K7R BLU BLU P1 P1
P2 X30A
K1R K2R K3R K4R K5R K6R BLU X1A
BLU P1 P2
X8A FC1 FH1 FM1 FL1 FC2 FH2 FM2 FL2 X3A X5A
BLU SS1
X1A X2A
X18A WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
(OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES)
WHT
WHT
RED
RED
BLK
BLK
BLU
BLU
RED
RED
ORG
ORG
C1 C2 S1Q
A2P MSW
YLW
WHT
YLW
WHT
~ Notes) 1. :TERMINAL BLOCK, :TERMINAL, , :CONNECTOR, :SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR
C1
C2
T2R M1D 2. :FIELD WIRING
SS1 X17A X19A
A1P T1R 3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
1.5.2 Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM Series)
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
X3M
X2M M M 4. IN CASE USING WIRING ADAPTOR, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
X1M ~ ~
t˚ M1F t˚ M2F 5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FRESH UP CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY REMOTE
X11A CONTROL BOX F1UT F2UT CONTROLLER, IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
6. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE
SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER, IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
7. DO NOT REMOVE THE SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTORS OF X8A AND X9A. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THEY ARE REMOVED.
8. SS1 (A1P) HAS ALREADY BEEN SET TO "NOR". AT FACTORY SET. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THE SETTING ARE CHANGED.
9. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW ORG: ORANGE BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1D) (A1P) T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V / 22V) GRN: GREEN)
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD M1D MOTOR (DAMPER MOTOR) T2R TRANSFORMER (220-240V / 22V) 10. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
C1 · C2 CAPACITOR (M1F, M2F) M1F MOTOR (SUPPLY AIR FAN) X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER SUPPLY)
F1U FUSE ( B , 10A, 250V) (A1P) M2F MOTOR (EXHAUST AIR FAN) X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) (A1P)
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) (A2P) R1T THERMISTOR (INDOOR AIR) X3M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL)
F1UT · F2UT THERMO SWITCH R2T THERMISTOR (OUTDOOR AIR) X17A, X19A CONNECTOR (RELAYING WIRE)
(152˚C) (M1F, M2F BUILT-IN) R3T THERMISTOR X20A CONNECTOR (RELAYING WIRE)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (INLET AIR INTO COIL) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR
ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING Tes10 TERMINAL BLOCK
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A1P) R4T, R5T THERMISTOR OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES (KRP50-2) (FOR EXTERNAL OUTPUT) ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) (A2P)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LIQUID / GAS PIPE OF COIL) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER MAGNETIC RELAY CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS
Ry1
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A2P) S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (DAMPER MOTOR) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN / SUB) (OPERATION / STOP) X11A CONNECTOR
K1R~K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) (A1P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH Ry2 MAGNETIC RELAY (ADAPTOR POWER SUPPLY) (A1P)
K4R~K6R MAGNETIC RELAY (M2F) (A1P) (FOR ESPECIALLY USE) (A1P) (FOR HUMIDIFIER OPERATION)
3D051311
347
Wiring Diagrams
348
L N
POWER SUPPLY
220-240V S1H Note) 7
A3P
Wiring Diagrams
~
50Hz SS1 Note) 9 %H2O,
X4 X3 X2 X1 WHT
Note) 7
OFF ON
X2M X1M 1 2 X1M
X1M KFR KCR KHuR X20A
L N Y2 BLK BLK BLK
KHR 5 1 2 X1M
S1L
K8R
VKM50/80/100GAMV1(9)
BLK Y1 3 BLU BLU

F2U WHT 7 RED RED
ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING WHT
(OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES) F2U YC K8R Y2S
EXTERNAL OUTPUT X1A
(KRP50-2) Note) 4 TERMINALS
X2A
8 WHT WHT
Tes10 WHT BLU
1 CONTACT R3T R4T R5T
R1T R2T Ry1 CAPACITY
2 Note) 8 Y1E M
Ry2 AC220-240V t˚ t˚ t˚ RED GRN
t˚ t˚ 3 A2P
RED
WHT
0.01~1.6A
A1P
RED
WHT
R S
X2M JC Note) 5 X3M
L N INPUT FROM F1U X16A X13A X12A X11A X9A X8A X7A PNK Note) 6
X12A X13A X9A X10A X11A SS1 T2 T2
NOR J2 OUTSIDE INPUT FROM OUTSIDE
Note) 10 H RED WHT
HAP M T1 T1
F1U J1 Note) 3
RED T2R RED HAP YLW
F2 F2
F2 ORG TO CONNECTION WIRING AND
T1R RED t˚ X3A F1 F1
F1 CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER UNIT
X7A BLU
t˚ BLK P2 P2
P1
X18A BLK
K7R BLU BLU P1 P1
P2 X30A
K1R K2R K3R K4R K5R K6R BLU X1A
BLU X8A P1 P2
FC1 FH1 FM1 FL1 FC2 FH2 FM2 FL2 X3A X5A
BLU SS1
X1A X2A
X18A WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER
BLK
(OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES)
BLU
BLK
WHT
WHT
RED
RED
BLU
RED
RED
ORG
ORG
SS1 C1 C2
MSW S1Q
A3P A2P
YLW
WHT
YLW
WHT
Notes) 1. :TERMINAL BLOCK, ~
:TERMINAL, , :CONNECTOR, :SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTOR
M1D
C1
T2R
C2
2. :FIELD WIRING
SS1 X17A X19A
T1R 3. IN CASE USING CENTRALIZED REMOTE CONTROLLER, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED
A1P
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
RED
BLK
BLU
ORG
YLW
WHT
INSTRUCTION MANUAL.
X3M
K8R
4. IN CASE USING WIRING ADAPTOR, CONNECT IT TO THE UNIT IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE ATTACHED INSTALLATION MANUAL.
X2M M M
X1M ~ M1F ~ M2F 5. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FRESH UP CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE SELECTED BY
t˚ t˚
X11A CONTROL BOX F1UT F2UT REMOTE CONTROLLER, IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
6. WHEN CONNECTING THE INPUT WIRES FROM OUTSIDE, FORCED OFF OR ON/OFF CONTROL OPERATION CAN BE
A1P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD K7R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1D) (A1P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH SELECTED BY REMOTE CONTROLLER, IN DETAILS, REFER TO THE INSTALLATION MANUAL ATTACHED THE UNIT.
A2P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD K8R MAGNETIC RELAY (S1L) (HUMIDISTAT INPUT) (A3P) 7. IN CASE INSTALLING A HUMIDISTAT S1H (LOCALLY PROCURED), REMOVE THE SHORT CIRCUIT WIRING BETWEEN (1) AND
A3P PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD KCR, KFR MAGNETIC RELAY (A3P) T1R TRANSFORMER (220-240V / 22V) (2) AS SHOWN IN THE FIGURE RIGHT.
8. DO NOT REMOVE THE SHORT CIRCUIT CONNECTORS OF X8A AND X9A. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THEY ARE REMOVED.
(ADAPTOR FOR WIRING) KHR, KHuR MAGNETIC RELAY (A3P) T2R TRANSFORMER (220-240V / 22V)
9. SS1 (A3P) HAS ALREADY BEEN SET TO OFF AT FACTORY SET. HUMIDIFYING BECOMES IMPOSSIBLE , IF THE SETTING ARE
C1 · C2 CAPACITOR (M1F, M2F) M1D MOTOR (DAMPER MOTOR) X1M TERMINAL BLOCK (POWER SUPPLY) CHANGED.
F1U FUSE ( B , 10A, 250V) (A1P) M1F MOTOR (SUPPLY AIR FAN) X1M, X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) (A3P) 10. SS1 (A1P) HAS ALREADY BEEN SET TO "NOR". AT FACTORY SET. THE UNIT WILL NOT RUN IF THE SETTING ARE CHANGED.
F1U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) (A2P) M2F MOTOR (EXHAUST AIR FAN) X2M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) (A1P) 11. SYMBOLS SHOW AS FOLLOWS. (PNK: PINK WHT: WHITE YLW: YELLOW ORG: ORANGE BLU: BLUE BLK: BLACK RED: RED
F1U, F2U FUSE ( B , 5A, 250V) (A3P) R1T THERMISTOR (INDOOR AIR) X3M TERMINAL BLOCK (CONTROL) GRN: GREEN)
F1UT · F2UT THERMO SWITCH R2T THERMISTOR (OUTDOOR AIR) X17A, X19A CONNECTOR (RELAYING WIRE) 12. USE COPPER CONDUCTORS ONLY.
(152˚C) (M1F, M2F BUILT-IN) R3T THERMISTOR X20A CONNECTOR (RELAYING WIRE)
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (INLET AIR INTO COIL) Y1E ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A1P) R4T, R5T THERMISTOR Y2S FEED WATER SOLENOID VALVE ADAPTOR PCB FOR WIRING Tes10 TERMINAL BLOCK X18A CONNECTOR (WIRING ADAPTOR FOR
HAP LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LIQUID / GAS PIPE OF COIL) OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES (KRP50-2) (FOR EXTERNAL OUTPUT) ELECTRICAL APPENDICES) (A2P)
(SERVICE MONITOR-GREEN) (A2P) S1L FLOAT SWITCH (HUMIDIFIER) WIRED REMOTE CONTROLLER Ry1 MAGNETIC RELAY CONNECTOR FOR OPTIONAL PARTS LOCAL SUPPLIED PARTS
K1R~K3R MAGNETIC RELAY (M1F) (A1P) S1Q LIMIT SWITCH (DAMPER MOTOR) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH (MAIN / SUB) (OPERATION / STOP) X11A CONNECTOR S1H HUMIDISTAT
K4R~K6R MAGNETIC RELAY (M2F) (A1P) SS1 SELECTOR SWITCH Ry2 MAGNETIC RELAY (ADAPTOR POWER SUPPLY) (A1P)
(FOR ESPECIALLY USE) (A1P) (FOR HUMIDIFIER OPERATION)
3D051310
SiMT341715E
Appendix
1.5.3 Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM Series)

VAM150/250/350/500/650/800/1000GJVE
3D041839B
Appendix 349
VAM1500/2000GJVE
3D051412A
350 Appendix
SiMT341715E Compressor Cover Removal and Assembly
2. Compressor Cover Removal and Assembly

2.1 Compressor Cover Removal
Compressor cover structure
1. Front compressor cover plate.
2. Top left compressor cover plate.
2 3 3. Top right compressor cover plate.
4. Right compressor cover plate.
5. Left compressor cover plate.
6. Rear right compressor cover plate.
7 6 7. Rear left compressor cover plate.
8. Bottom compressor cover plate.
5 4
Front view 1
Remove step of compressor cover plate part

Unscrew front compressor cover plate and remove it by sliding down then pulling backward.
Note : Beware compressor lead wire in slot of front side.

Unscrew top left compressor cover plate and remove it by sliding left then pulling up.
Appendix 351
Compressor Cover Removal and Assembly SiMT341715E
3. Top right compressor cover plate.

Unscrew top right compressor cover plate and remove top right compressor cover plate by pulling it up.

4.1 Remove R8T/R9T (Compressor body thermistor) wire from wire clip by pulling it out.
4.2 Unscrew right compressor cover plate and remove it by sliding up then pulling forward.
352 Appendix

5.1 Remove compressor’s wire clip by pressing the wire clip tail then pulling out.
5.2 Unscrew left compressor cover plate and remove it by sliding up then pulling forward.

6.1 Remove Y3S/Y4S (Solenoid valve oil return) wire from harness clamp by twisting the harness clamp then
pulling wire out.
Twist
Appendix 353
6.2 Remove rear right cover plate by sliding backward then pulling it up.
7. Rear left compressor cover plate.

Remove rear left cover plate by sliding backward then pull it up.
354 Appendix
2.2 Compressor Cover Assembly

Assembly step of compressor cover plate part
1. Rear left compressor cover plate.
Assemble rear left cover plate by pulling it down then sliding forward.

2.1 Assemble rear right cover plate by pulling it down then sliding forward.
2.2 Assemble Y3S/Y4S (Solenoid valve oil return) by inserting Solenoid valve wire to harness clamp then
twisting the harness clamp.
Twist
Appendix 355

3.1 Assemble left compressor cover plate by sliding down then screwing it.
3.2 Assemble compressor’s wire clip by pushing the wire clip to the hole.

4.1 Assemble right compressor cover plate by sliding down then screwing it.
356 Appendix
4.2 Assemble R8T/R9T (Compressor body thermistor) wire by inserting the wire to the wire clip.
5. Top right compressor cover plate.

Assemble top right compressor cover plate by pulling it down then screwing it.

Assemble top right compressor cover plate by pulling it down then sliding right then screwing it.
Appendix 357

Assemble front compressor cover plate by pushing it in, sliding up, and then screwing it.
Note : Beware compressor lead wire in slot of front side.
358 Appendix
Revision History
Month / Year Version Revised contents
01 / 2018 SiMT341715E First edition

Warning z Daikin products are manufactured for export to numerous countries throughout the world. Prior to
purchase, please confirm with your local authorised importer, distributor and/or retailer whether this
product conforms to the applicable standards, and is suitable for use, in the region where the product
will be used. This statement does not purport to exclude, restrict or modify the application of any local
legislation.
z Ask a qualified installer or contractor to install this product. Do not try to install the product yourself.
Improper installation can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical shock, fire or explosion.
z Use only those parts and accessories supplied or specified by Daikin. Ask a qualified installer or
contractor to install those parts and accessories. Use of unauthorised parts and accessories or
improper installation of parts and accessories can result in water or refrigerant leakage, electrical
shock, fire or explosion.
z Read the user's manual carefully before using this product. The user's manual provides important
safety instructions and warnings. Be sure to follow these instructions and warnings.
If you have any enquiries, please contact your local importer, distributor and/or retailer.
Cautions on product corrosion

1. Air conditioners should not be installed in areas where corrosive gases, such as acid gas or alkaline gas, are produced.
2. If the outdoor unit is to be installed close to the sea shore, direct exposure to the sea breeze should be avoided. If you need to install
the outdoor unit close to the sea shore, contact your local distributor.
Dealer
Head Office:
Umeda Center Bldg., 2-4-12, Nakazaki-Nishi,
Kita-ku, Osaka, 530-8323 Japan
Tokyo Office:
JR Shinagawa East Bldg., 2-18-1, Konan,
Minato-ku, Tokyo, 108-0075 Japan
http://www.daikin.com/products/ac/
c All rights reserved
zSpecifications, designs and other content appearing in this brochure are current as of January 2018 but subject to change without notice.
SiMT341715E
01/2018 AK·K

SiMT341715E (VRV A Service Manual) - 1

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SiMT341715E (VRV A Service Manual) - 1

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

SiMT341715E

Cooling Only 50/60 Hz

Part 1 General Information ........................................................... 1

Part 2 Refrigerant Circuit ........................................................... 20

3. Refrigerant Flow for Each Operation Mode...........................................41

Part 3 Remote Controller ............................................................ 47

Part 4 Functions and Control...................................................... 79

6.4 Compressor Body Protection Control.....................................................89

Part 5 Field Settings and Test Operation................................. 106

Part 6 Service Diagnosis........................................................... 157

iii Table of Contents

3. Troubleshooting by Remote Controller ...............................................167

4.42 Inverter Compressor Startup Abnormality ............................................252

Part 7 Appendix......................................................................... 301

1.1 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Workers

Be sure to disconnect the power cable from the socket before

When disconnecting the suction or discharge pipe of the compressor at

If refrigerant gas leaks during repair work, ventilate the area.

Do not turn the air conditioner on or off by plugging in or unplugging the

Do not clean the air conditioner with water.

Be sure to provide an earth/grounding when repairing the equipment in a

Be sure to conduct repair work with appropriate tools.

Conduct welding work in a well-ventilated place.

1.2 Warnings and Cautions Regarding Safety of Users

When replacing the coin battery in the remote controller, be sure to

Do not install the equipment in a place where there is a possibility of

Check the earth/grounding, and repair it if the equipment is not properly

Do not tilt the unit when removing it.

Icon Type of Description

Note A Note provides information that is not indispensable, but may

Reference A Reference guides the reader to other places in this binder or

Ceiling mounted cassette

Ceiling mounted cassette

Ceiling mounted cassette

20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — — — — — — —

Slim ceiling mounted

Ceiling suspended type FXHQ — — 32MA — — 63MA — — 100MA — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — 125N — 200N 250N 400N 500N Y1

FXBQ — — — 40P 50P 63P — — — — — — — — —

Power supply and standard symbols

 Residential Indoor Units with Connection to BP Unit

VM:1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz

+1 Only available to the Singapore market.

 Air Treatment Equipment

Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM series)

V1: 1 phase, 220-240 V, 50 Hz

Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VAM series)

VE: 1 phase, 220-240/220 V, 50/60 Hz

1.2 Malaysia and Pakistan

Ceiling mounted cassette

Ceiling mounted cassette

Ceiling mounted cassette

20PD 25PD 32PD — — — — — — — — — — — — VE

Ceiling suspended type FXHQ — — 32MA — — 63MA — — 100MA — — — — — —

— — — — — — — — — 125N — 200N 250N 400N 500N Y1

FXBQ + — — — 40P 50P 63P — — — — — — — — —

Power supply and standard symbols

 Residential Indoor Units with Connection to BP Unit

VM:1 phase, 220-240/220-230 V, 50/60 Hz

+ FTKJ models are not available to the Pakistan market.

 Air Treatment Equipment

Heat Reclaim Ventilator (VKM series)

Residential Indoor Units with Connection to BP Unit

Air Treatment Equipment

Residential Indoor Units with Connection to BP Unit

Air Treatment Equipment

Residential Indoor Units with Connection to BP Unit

Air Treatment Equipment

Residential Indoor Units with Connection to BP Unit

Air Treatment Equipment

Residential Indoor Units with Connection to BP Unit

Air Treatment Equipment